Home

GT15 User's Manual

1. 4 6 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED f l Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb T Not lit Power is not supplied 35 2 Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen O H For installing the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit or RGB 4 Video RGB interface T output unit e ao 5 USB intert For connecting a personal computer DZ interface Connector type MINI B GS For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 6 RS 232 interface Connector type D sub 9 pin w Zz 7 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 8 Extension interface For installing an extension unit R oO 9 CF card interface For installing a CF card a 10 CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed 4 C Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the z GOT u 11 CF card access switch _ 28 ON CF card being accessed
2. Item Description Backup restoration Executing backups executing restorations and deleting backup data are possible z Machining programs parameters and others of the CNC connected to the GOT can be copied 5 CNC Data I O Z or deleted 2 gt SFC Monitor The GOT can monitor and display SFC programs of the PLC CPU in the SFC diagram format 5 MELSAP3 or MELSAP L format 5 14 1 2 Display operation of Debug z z W Main menu Debug amp self check 595 lt 9 3 Utility Display su Z W Sei Of n Touch the debug to be operated Touch o Debug amp self check n gt F O Z aie icp O08 Debug is displayed For System monitor a Oo 2 TT z gt s Fie Us LP en wv oog fil Comm Driver Ei E A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY a Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 1 Debug 1 4 2 14 1 2 Display operation of Debug 14 2 Self check 14 2 1 S
3. Power equipment servo etc PLC f ii Connection cable 2 FG i w LG fe Y FG 3 LG 5 AS U Panel 5 grounding Panel O grounding Use a short and thick cable as much as possible r i Ground the system at one end 5 To prevent noise from entering the GOT use a short and thick wire for grounding between the ground and the lt panel to ensure lower ground resistance L ad fal wn 3 Common grounding Not allowed a Zz Power equipment a servo etc 2 2 i Connection cable ZZ lg SS CNIA CNIB jam T Fo IL Eo CN2 CN3 LG Y FG The power equipment and FG GOT control equipment are LG connected with a wire O H Panel grounding ow gt Panel grounding a g 5 omu soe mia i Do not connect the ground cables of the power equipment and control equipment with a wire If the cables are connected noise from the power equipment may influence the control equipment causing malfunction z E ie z OPTION 7 3 Grouding 7 Re 7 3 1 Grounding the GOT Recommended terminal shape Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless sora terminal screw terminal on Let a 4 o When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to one terminal one terminal Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A 7 8 7 3 Grouding 7 3 1 Grounding the GOT 7 3 2 Wir
4. Zz o Program Data control Hard copy information 5 Select drive m Size Date Tine Built in CF card hesee T7 2 0o 11 5 5 DIR PROJECT1 01 31 00 05 23 C Flash Memory Zz O on 2 3 6 29 6 2u ZME Kb Szo Q Fara lt 2g No Ww a0n Number Item Description The drive which displays file or folder can be selected 1 Select drive When CF card is not installed A standard CF Card and B Memory card on are not displayed E th a Q 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder n lt 2 in f In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR g2 f Displays the file name or folder name 1 3 For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc Z gt CF 13 5 4 E Copy operation 3 n After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation A 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed z 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the creation date and time of each file e Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by rm 7 The size of drive ene a 5 drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive ie 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function
5. z 0 o rogram Data Control Operation Log Information 5 Drive R L gt A Built in CF card Jal 5 3 09 06 09 23 il 5 03 09 06 10 38 4k 03 10 06 13 33 3 10 06 13 33 Zz O E lt 4 an Be ZME ue Szo 7 8 9 u 2 BIN CSV Copy Hove Fork Seg Z 610 gt TXT Del Rename List aGe Do hr aon Number Item Description 1 Drive The target drive can be selected Even if CF card is not installed this message appears no 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 9 z in Fe SS In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR fr 5 WFS Displays the file name or folder name g lt F For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed l a E IZE 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the R ename button etc PEL C 13 8 4 IA Rename operation 1 3 After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation Z 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed amp 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 5 m 6 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed u 7 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders x g E e O 7 N re P
6. la PLC side GOT side Fig 4 Fig 5 Fig 4 Fig 4 Fig A ms a a bee JD fe a GT15 EXCNB GT15 C OBS buffer circuit cable extension cable 33 0 1 30 60 0 2 36 49 7 1 96 58 0 2 28 35 0 1 38 42 0 1 65 ofe 49 9 1 97 60 0 2 36 5 8 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 2 2 0 1 b External dimensions of RS 232 connection cable connector GT01 C30R2 6P tae u 16 0 63 50 1 97 3000 118 1 40 1 57 13 0 51 Fa z 7 020 ZQ2 0 79 6r x 28 1 10 EGE g 7 0 28 y PR ane ad 3 i AA 442 aes Z g S amp GT01 C30R2 9S O D zag 16 0 63 50 1 97 3000 118 1 50 1 57 16 0 51 Oz Re INI 204 5 a SoZ fa M 08 lt d g Zan mA i S GT01 C30R2 25P Ed 16 0 63 50 1 97 3000 118 1 53 1 57 16 0 51 z f He ED g A Zo 3 a 2 l w Unit mm inch g 70 am a rJ fog EZ wuts APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 13 App 14 c External dimensions of RS 422 connection cable connector GT01 C30R4 25
7. 10 0 39 175 5 6 91 0 20 a a 56 0 20 52 2 05 86 anaonojj 226 8 90 Unit mm inch App 4 Appendix 1 External Dimensions GT155 O0 5 JONYNALNIYN H04 13S3H SAWIL NOILIGGV SO GYVGNVLS CNV SOLOOd dO NOILVTIVLSNI NOILOAdSNI ANY SONVNALNIVIN Wavy WALSAS ANY ASVSSAW YOuuS 167 6 57 MITSUBISHI L TE S SET 6 0 6 0 OT ZL 7 OZT OT eat gt SAHOIGNAddV 152 5 98 vZ0 rs 9 Z 09 Unit mm inch XaANI App 5 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 6 App 6 Depth dimension and cable bending dimensions of the GOT with extension unit Appendix 1 External Dimensions GOT rear face GOT side face 100 3 94 or more GOT type Dimension of GT1595 55 2 17 GT1585 46 1 81 GT157 O 43 1 69 aa GT156 O 46 1 81 Extension unit bey GT155 O 54 2 13 i i Other equipment Unit mm inch a GT1595 R Model name A B C D i bending radius of the cable TE 95 3 74 55 2 17
8. 18 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 060 c ete 18 5 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 18 6 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS 18 8 18 5 CoreOS 18 11 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS wn ee ee ee piain ne eee ee aa 18 11 18 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 0000 c ccs 18 14 19 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19 1to 19 18 19 1 Daily Inspection 19 2 19 2 Periodic Inspection 19 2 19 3 Cleaning Method 19 3 19 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 19 4 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement 19 5 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 19 6 1 Applicable backlight merda 0244 eke deel ve eee eee eae ve eas 19 6 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 0 0 eee eee 19 6 20 TROUBLESHOOTING 20 1 to 20 32 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 1 20 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 14 20 2 1 Locating error positions 0 0 eee ae 20 14 20 2 2 Further locating error positions 0 eee 20 15 20 2 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 000 e cee eee 20 16 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 17 20 3 1 Error Contents Display is it seeded dered ia hl ated ede aeons a a 20 17 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 1 2 0 0 cette 20 19 APPENDICES App 4 to App 46 Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 Appendix 2 Confirming
9. 60 or less 2 36 Ground wires 2 36 360 or less 49 280mm 11 0 inch 49 360 or less 14 17 1 57 1 57 14 17 Unit mm inch 5 18 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product c For other bus connection cables e Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material with the length shown below e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the braided wire for grounding into the ferrite core a ED pan PLC side 80 Cable shield material 3 15 Grounding braided wire 200mm 7 87 inch Grounding braided wire 50mm 1 97 inch 40 or less Unit mm inch 2 CPU direct connection and computer link connection e Peel the sheath with the length shown below of the cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 a For RS 232 cable GOT side PLC side O mi m 230 or less 40 9 06 1 57 Unit mm inch b RS 422 cable For AC30 100 300R4 25P GOT side PLC side 230 or less 40 9 06 1 57 Unit mm inch 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant 5 19 Product Ww a ar O gt OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AN
10. 8 36 8 8 CF Card 8 8 2 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT Close the cover of the CF card interface Set the CF card access switch to ON When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 8 CF Card 8 37 8 8 2 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT Removing D Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF and make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be removead even during the GOT power on When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 Open the cover of the CF card interface Push the CF card eject button of the GOT The CF card eject button is pulled out after pushing at once When using other than the GT1550 8 38 8 8 CF Card 8 8 2 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT Point P CF card eject button For the following GOTs after opening the cover of the CF card interface raise the CF card eject button e GT1585 S GT1575 S Hardware version B April 2005 or earlier e GT1575 V GT1565
11. ASCII Display ASCII Input Alignment setting is added 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O oO Setting for displayi n input value at the et ng STAR P 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Oo Oo O input target object position is possible When Bit Tri i t met whether to F P STi ee 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected When Bit Trigger is not met whether to p Data List ae 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected When Bit Trigger is not met whether to A i a9 i 7 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O oO Comment Display enable Hold Display can be selected The simple comment is added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Oo Oo oO Continued to next page App 36 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series It D a Version of GT TA toS GT GT Soft GT cription ersion o al peas Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 oO O User alarm 8192 alarms When Bit Trigger is not met whether to i ee y 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O enable Hold Display can be selected Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 2 27D Standard monitor OS 0
12. GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Option function board Multi color display board Protective sheet Protective cover for oil Bar code reader S o KFS Commercially available Memory card RFID controller LP SH g7 CF card Memory card adaptor Commercially available Commercially available 2 4 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 2 Component List 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT15 None GT11 Q ous A Communication None GT1575V interface GT10 2 None Power type Panel color type Display device type ne a o l S0 lt ox rwzooro Resolution one Video RGB V None Model type Screen size type GOT 1000 series GT15 GT11 RS 232 interface Bus interface for Q series CPU Bus interface for A series CPU RS 232 interface RS 422 interface RS 232 interface RS 422 interface 100 to 240VAC 24VDC 5VDC Black TFT color High intensity Wide angle view TFT color STN color STN monochrome 1024 X 768 XGA 800 X 600 SVGA 640 x 480 VGA 320 x 240 QVGA Less than 320 x 240 Video RGB compliant 65536 4096 256 colors 16 colors Monochrome White Black 16 gray scale
13. O If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy button overwrites the Process completed O When the copy is completed the dialog 6 of completion is displayed Q s If touch OK button closes the dialog E E a Zz O ae 30 Sao 5u Move operation ozo An operation log file is moved nformat ion 2 E PROJECT TLOGO00OT s EE TS amp Select the file to be moved by touching a5 R ILON 0600001 1K 01 04 01 08 48 it gt E O LIL 1K 8 gaz 1K 0 ce L 0G00001_0002 k 01 03 01 00 10 B a tu CSV L060000120002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 2 Touch the Move button aon n Oo 2 Z gt 5 ars ov PES DEG T sa 8 a d Y 104KB 499672KB Eilg aAZE guscsy Coy hove Strate Oto GIL gt TXT Del Renane 1 3 m a Select the target folder Z gt 1 1K 01 04 01 08 57 R Selecting a folder is not needed for s e Koes EE P ing di i 5 CSV L0600001 0001 1K 01 03 01 00 10 moving directly below the drive 2 GIL L0G00001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 10 CSV L0600001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 ui T x O W ani O M W 104KB7400672KB File 2 Please select O destination ET focal oO v Continued to next page CLEANING OF
14. For executing the GOT utility install the BootOS and standard monitor OS on the C drive built in flash memory of the GOT or set the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card and insert the CF card with OS files into the GOT BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when upgrading of it is unnecessary This chapter explains the installation using GOT GT Designer2 CF card gt GOT Write OS file BootOS or standard monitor OS installation Ca the CF CF card card in GOT GT Designer2 o Write OS file Install the CF CF card card in GOT 5 et the OS boot drive a A Standard CF Card GOT gt CF card gt GOT BootOS standard Yo OS file upload monitor OS installation GOT p gt eat TT Install the CF CF card card in GOT For details of the installation using GT Designer2 refer to the following A GOT N When GOT is remote installed easily using the CF card The GOT can starts without an OS installed Install OS from GOT to GOT using CF card L gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transmission Manual Point CoreOS In 18 1 to 18 4 of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following lt gt Section 18 5 CoreOS 18 1 ADDITION TIMES Ci RESET FOR fee MAINTENANCE as Zz ta T He Og 5z of
15. ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeees 2 7 8 1 Bus connector conversion DOX assesses 2 15 Bus extension connector DOX sessen 2 15 C CC Link communication Unit ccccseeeeees 2 7 CC Link IE controller network communication unit Abr Mee dt eaten beth Qualitas ied is ha Ne Ae a toed 2 7 8 2 7 Bakers 6 PrP ARR TAEAE TE 2 15 8 35 Applicable CF card 8 35 Gea ari ea a aica tex O 15 1 Cleaning Method cccccceeeeeeeeereeeetteeeeeeeeees 19 3 Display operation of clean 15 1 Operation Of clean eeen 15 2 Cleaning of display section 0 ccceeeeeeeteeeeees 15 1 Communication detail settingS cceeee 10 11 Communication detail settings display operation PE ET TETEE OE A 10 11 Communication detail settings functions 10 11 Display contents of communication detail settings A E EE Rist eae 10 13 Key word registration deletion and protection delete N T yA N R aia E a aes 10 14 Communication interface setting ceee 10 1 Communication setting sseeeeeeee eeen 10 1 Communication setting contents c10 10 2 Communication setting display operation AE E A A A 10 1 10 6 Communication setting functions 08 10 1 Communication Unit ccccccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 7 8 1 Applicable communication unit 0 8 1 Installing procedure 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeenteeeetees 8 3 Component list cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
16. E E Current status The power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable are mixed in the duct O Mixed O Not mixed Measure for the cables mixed Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise 2 Panel outside wiring Power line Current 4 status J Communication cable Fig Power line sa Communication cable H E Measure for the cables Power Wiring Separator i ee A installed Fi 100mm or more T together 9 T in Power Communication Ine cable The power line and communication cable are installed together Leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel at separate places can make the communication cable less influenced by noise from the power line Installing the communication cable apart from the power line or using a separator made of metal in the duct as shown in Fig B can make the communication cable less influenced by noise 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet O Effective O Ineffective O Installed together O Not installed together O Effective O Ineffective 20 7 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 3 Wiring of GOT s FG cab
17. GT1550 QLBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal 16 Grayscale 24VDC memory size 9MB 1 For GOTs supporting 65536 colors refer to the following 3 2 Performance Specifications 2 2 Component List 2 6 2 2 1 GOT be OVERVIEW z o z o i Z 0 0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 2 Option Communication unit Sold separately Product name Bus connection unit Model name Description For last GOT Number of IN side GT15 QBUS For QCPU Q Mode Motion connectors 1 controller CPU Q Series For intermediary and last GOT GT15 QBUS2 connection standard model Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side For last GOT Number of IN side GT15 ABUS For A QnACPU Motion connectors 1 controller CPU A Series For intermediary and last GOT GT15 ABUS2 connection standard model Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L For last GOT Number of IN side For QCPU Q Mode Motion connectors 1 controller CPU Q Series connection slim model For intermediary and last GOT for each side GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L For last GOT Number of IN side For A QnACPU Motion connectors 1 Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 controller CPU A Series connection slim mode
18. BRADLEY PLC onnecton Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to SLC500 series 2 58L Communication driver O oO AB SLC 500 01 00 p Standard monitor OS 01 04 SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS 87 200 a A 2 58L Communication driver O O connection series SIEMENS S7 200 01 00 App 44 Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Version of GT Item Description Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Inverter i E Supporting connection to inverter 2 73B Communication driver oO O connection FREQROL 500 700 01 00 Bar code reader Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O O connection Added GT Designer2 functions ce Version of GT Item Description Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 Library Enables setting the background color of the gt AqzZ workspace figures in the Library Editor screen i O Auxiliary setting Enables setting Specify the touch area 2 77F x O Reading BMP or Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data JPEG image reduced to a resolution of 2000 x 1600 or less 2 77F 5 O O data on GT Designer2 Directly editing Enables editing the comment group directly in aT comment group settings for the lamps
19. Measure example 2 1 Measure example 2 2 7 3 Grouding 7 3 2 Wiring related malfunction causes and the measures examples 7 4 Panel Inside Wiring Panel Outside Wiring 7 4 1 Panel inside wiring In wiring the power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable must not be mixed Mixing the power line and communication cable may cause malfunction due to noise When using an equipment that may occur surge noise such as molded case circuit breaker MCCB electromagnetic contactor MC relay RA solenoid valve or induction motor using a surge suppressor is effective For surge suppressor refer to the following lt 3 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment Separated power lines and communication cables Mixed power lines and communication cables Control panel inside Power cable Control panel inside GOT connection Power cable GOT I l I connection IG l B B IEJ cable g g c e i g 4 i EJ 3 PLC s I O wire PLC s I O wire MC MC RA RA Drive control 7 Drive wire f control l Terminal block l Terminal block 7 4 2 Panel outside wiring When leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel open cable holes at two separate places to lead the cables separately out If cables are led out through the same cable hole for wiring reasons the cables are more easily influenced by noise
20. TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING Copy operation An operation log file is copied Size Date Time OPELOG_20060308_0000 OPELOG_20060309_0001 OPELOG_20060309_0001 1K 03 08 06 11 18 3K 03 09 06 09 23 7K_03 09 06 10 38 4K 03 10 06 acs bb M E155 72KB 0KB 4F i 6102s Copy Move Geis 6w gt TT Del Rename List Size Date Time ie B OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 i OPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 OPELOG_20060309_0001 7K 03 09 06 10 38 OPELOG_200603 10_0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 kd ha SKB 15600KB 4F ile Please select dest ination Target file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Do you want to copy the fi le OK Cancel Target file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Do you want to overwrite the file ok Continued to next page 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 13 100 D Touch and select the file to copy Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Excute button the following dialog shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen
21. amp fo 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 14 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply Item Specifications GT1575V STBD GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBD 3 15 GT1585V STBD GT1595 XTBD GT1575 VNBD GT1555 V GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD GT1585 STBD T157 ET GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBD Input power purp 24VDC 25 20 supply voltage Power 57W or less 43W or less 41W or less 19W or less 18W or less 17W or less 15W or less onsumntior 2380mA 1790mA 1710mA 790mA 750mA 710mA 620mA p 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 32W or less 14W or less At backlight 30W or less 1330mA 580mA 13W or less 540mA 24VDC off 1250mA 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 100A or less 67A or less 4ms 115A or less Inrush current f i 1ms maxim 60A or less 1ms maximum load maximum ims maximum load um load load Permissible instantaneous 10 ms or less power failure time Noise immunity 500Vp p noise voltage 1 ws noise width when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VDC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm7 Applica
22. 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards 3 3 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 1 GT1595 X 3 4 5 6 tem Wega Fanaton version The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment For using multiple extension units a bar code reader or a RFID controller the total current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can s
23. 1D7M25 Describes specifications and settings of the object functions used in GOT1000 series Sold separately GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3 3 SH 080532ENG Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation 1D7M26 method Sold separately GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual i SH 080544ENG Describes extended functions and option functions applicable to GOT series 1D7M32 Sold separately GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual eget i SH 080545ENG Describes specifications system configurations and setting method of the gateway function 1D7M33 Sold separately GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual i f F SH 080654ENG Describes the specifications system configurations and setting method of the MES interface function y 1D7M63 Sold separately 1 The manual in PDF format is included in the GT Works2 and GT Designer2 products A 21 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows gw GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585 GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA
24. ETO 12 1 10 4 8 4 Hon a 74 Re TA 1 For GOTs that can display 65536 colors refer to the following K7 3 2 Performance Specifications 2 Not 16 gray scale for GT10 2 2 Component List 2 2 be OVERVIEW zZ Q z aa o TE Z 0 0 Ww icp gt ep SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 Explanation of the option model name GT kxk x None Common for all types Dedicated for 15 Dedicated for 12 1 Common for 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 Partially common for 5 7 Dedicated for 10 4 Dedicated for 8 4 Dedicated for 5 7 74 TOT Dedicated for video RGB compliant model Dedicated for GT15 Dedicated for GT11 Partially common for GT15 GT11 Dedicated for GT10 Common for GT15 GT11 1 The bus connection unit GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBU2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L can also be used with GT1550 2 The USB environmental protection cover GT11 50UCOV can be used for both the GT15 and GT11 2 2 Component List 3 Third party PLC connection cable GTO09 C xx KR KK N P Plug male S Socket female T Solderless terminal C Preparatory soldering Connector pin type of the connection target For third party PLC side Number of connector pins Indicates the number of terminals for solderless or preparato
25. O 0 DISPLAY SECTION 14 47 6 Export operation Export the operator information stored in the GOT to a memory card Touch the button Add Edit Delete Return Drive in use Import Export Save 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch button and then the Admin The export process overwrites password authentication screen is existing files displayed Input the administrator Do you want to proceed d This saves unsaved changes password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key The export process of operator 3 When the administrator password is information file is conpleted correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in the GOT is exported to a memory card 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 1 Operator management 14 11 2 Password change Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed For the password change log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed UTILITY FUNCTION Display operation of password change COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Main menu Debug amp self check Self check L77 9 3 Utility Display Touch Touch
26. OK displayed CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with gt lt button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 11 11 1 3 Display setting operations 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Functions of the brightness contrast The brightness and contrast can be adjusted Function Description Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels 4 levels for the GT1575 VN GT1572 VN or GT1562 VN The display section contrast can be adjusted by 16 levels GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD Brightness setting Contrast adjustment 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast Main menu GOT setup Display C 9 3 Utility Display Y Touch Touch Touch Brightness GOT setup Display contrast Brightness contrast adjustment Touch Elto adjust the brightness 1 1 12 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Functions of the brightness contrast 11 2 3 Operating the brightness contrast Zz fe o Zz re GD Brightness can be adjusted by touching Z L key of brightness adjustment 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched O au
27. The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank The display section of the GT1595 X is an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction A CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit printer unit option function board or multi color display board onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the multi color display board wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity
28. a Unit mm inch GT15 75ABUS2L CGT15 75ABUSL GT15 ABUS CGT15 ABUS2 Bus connection unit o GT15 75QBUS2L CGT15 QBUS2 z GT15 75QBUSL CGT15 QBUS wo Senmi eun GT15 RS2 9P CGT15 RS4 9S 59 l l l E j GT15 RS4 TE EE Hole for installing GOT Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 oe GT15 J71LP23 25 68 2 68 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 j z MELSECNET 10 communication GT 15 75J71LP23 2 68 2 68 So a unit GT15 75J71BR13 Z auw gt 80 80 Ze 5 3 15 3 15 CC Link IE controller network GT15 J71GP23 SX 68 2 68 2 aa Prohibited area for installation communication unit wu gt ao with an extension unit E GT15 J61BT13 6 CC Link communication unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z Printer unit GT15 PRN O Video input unit GT15V 75V4 68 2 68 k l RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 z z Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 68 2 68 2 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist o Z T zZ O e ja O 6 3 Mounting Position 6 7 c For GT1570 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure Hole for installing GOT 80 80 3 15 3 15 Prohibited area for installation with an extension unit Extension unit Model X
29. button of the scrollbar scrolls up down line by one line If touch A button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected For the operations of the delete copy and rename refer to the following Delete i lt gt this section COPY cece lt this section Rename C this section If touch lt x button closes the screen Delete operation O Deletes the selected file S rT Touch and select the file to delete Z 5 zZ O a Z26 TE SE ui OZ2n L Q az LOV Ze Ir touch Del button th tioned SBE n reen mention D Delete file name ouch E PUTON MS SCE enuone DOD SNAPOOO1 BMP left is displayed Delete now If touch OK button deletes the file If touch Cancel button cancel the os deletion Za BES 459 PaE j Ooa OK Cance a When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch button the dialog is closed Delete is completed ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 5 Hard Copy Information 1 3 39 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information Copy operation Copies the selected file amp Touch and select the file to copy 2 If touch Copy button the dialog Please select a destination is dis
30. within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 2 places W gt O zZ fe 5 ae iz cas i Removing the video RGB uni Point emoving the video unit D p zZ Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws o lt E above z a wn A When installing an extension unit on the unit refer to the following K3 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 9 lt When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer cover the top of mounting screws 4 Sy places with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity 22 Keep the connector cover fixed lt u Keep the sticker stuck as it is O ow 25 one 205S wu gt a Zz z 2 o zZ a OPTION 8 4 Video RGB Unit 8 25 8 4 2 Installing procedure 8 5 External I O Unit The external I O unit is used for connecting to an external I O device or operation panel For connecting the external I O unit set the communication settings For connection details refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 8 5 1 Applicable external I O unit The following external I O unit is applicable to GT1500 Description GT15 DIO External I O unit 8 5 2 Installation procedure The external I O unit can be installed on the GOT with other extension units For installing the external I O unit with other extension units refer to the following after implementing th
31. 3 If touch the Enter button displays the Before LOG00001_0001 G1L After LINE A_LOG GIL agg shown Iek Change filename 4 If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen Process completed When renaming is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog 1 3 78 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation Folder create operation Zz An operation log folder is created S D gt Ww Z elect Drive PROJECT 1 L0G00001 x Q Touch the Create Folder button indName Size Date Time e j DIR ES GIL JLOGO0001 1K 01 04 01 09 59 i GIL LOG00001_0000 1K 01 04 01 09 59 GIL LOGO0001_0001 1K 01 04 01 09 59 CSV LOGO0001_0001 1K 01 03 01 00 10 GIL LOGO0001_ 002 1K 0l 03 01 oO 10 cS ME lt 0 0 11 z O E 2 O Bie Soe te 82a T k 44 16KB 499672KB i BIL gt CSV Copy Move nre GIL gt TXT Del Rename Q az g x The input key window shown left 3 lt Zz Path Name appears then input the file name to be Gwe A PROJECT 1 L0G00001 ppears p 258 Folder Name created By touching the following button input text type is changed a z zZ CEEMTTIT TOP EZ Enaish captal af Q dp ASDF TA NumericSymoo Ook ZUXICIVIBINIM Enter ai
32. Check the file register changes Execute m Not execute Eea 1 1 44 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 11 13 1 Trigger backup settings 11 13 3 Trigger backup setting operation Zz O o 7 ing i i Z a Ee i a Touch a setting Hem in the trigger type Tine 01 45 Won Tue Fri E and then the setting is changed S None A Ris amp 0008 aw Nome Ris Time Tine W Wed Thy Sat iH We o oy 2 None The GOT does not execute B the trigger backup 2 a Rise The GOT backs up data when Su El the trigger device turns on ENE Check the file register changes d fa W Execute I Not execute Time The GOT backs up data at the 95u m tne zZ specified time ES 11 zZ On EO nS wE oO W On Touch a setting item for Check the file register changes and then the setting is changed Execute When the backup is executed lz the GOT checks if data stored Zo 3 in file registers are changed UES after the previous backup a When the data are changed aze the GOT backs up the changed data Not When the backup is executed z execute the GOT does not back up amp data stored in file registers 5 even if the data are changed u after the previous backup ES amp When the trigger type is changed a password input window appears by T touching the OK button re Input the password for the backup restore z When the pas
33. Product TONI Model name Description name For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC intelligent serial RS 232 GT09 C30R20401 15P Cable length 3m as a are a port module cable GT09 C30R20402 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC GT09 C30R40401 7T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40401 7T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES intelligent serial port cable GT09 C200R40401 7T Cable length 20m module GT09 C300R40401 7T Cable length 30m 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 12 be OVERVIEW Zz g a o LL Zz fo oO W i gt n SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Description name RS 232 F ting GOT to HITACHI icati GT09 C30R21301 98 Gable lengih ain or connecting o communication module Cable LQE560 LQE060 LQE160 GT09 C30R41301 9S Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41301 9S Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC LPQ510 and Cable GT09 C200R41301 9S Cable length 20m communication module LQE565 LQE165 GT09 C300R41301 9S Cable length 30m Connection cables for FUJI FA PLCs Sold separately Product ae Model name Description name For connecting GOT to FUJI FA RS 232C interface RS 232 d NV1L RS2 RS 232C 485 interf le FFK120A GT09 C30R21003 25P Cabl
34. i OZo Do you want to Overwrite the file exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites o the file Seg If touch the Cancel button cancels wee icp creating afeiz 5 n Procesa conp leted O When creating is completed completion eS dialog is displayed Fe D Q If touch the OK button closes the va 2 5 dialog oga O lt m zZ lt z e a m lu WL x O W ani oO S W ep O 0 Zz O 5G ge z3 Bio oa Zz fe wg 2e Zu Ze HQ zZ SEY 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 59 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation EJ Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 13 60 rive FAPROJECTT AREC IPE 1 indName ize Date Time DIRI E 2 A 03 16 05 15 17 oe m hd i iFild IP gt cs Copy Move PTFE Execute Create BIP gt TaT Del Rename GIP Data Con pe_Informat ior File Name A PROJECT1 RECIPE1 ARPOO001 G1P Setting No 1 Name Recipe No 1 1 2 P Process 2 setting i 3 Process 3 setting a 4 P Process 4 setting aa Load record Save record Match records PLC Delete Device GOT PLC PLC GOT GOT Value Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Do you want to load record ox Cancel Process completed 13 7 Advanc
35. 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 1 1 21 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation COMMUNICATION 4 INTERFACE PF SETTING zZ On EO ne wE oO W On CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Point P 1 When using GT1595 X For the key position 1 point only can be set 11 22 2 Setting another key position when two have been already set Change either key position from to before making the setting You cannot select three at the same time Example Changing the 2 points of the upper left and right corners to those of the upper left and lower left corners Change at the upper right corner to 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation p Change left corner to at the lower 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Zz 7 fe Touch panel calibration Setting 5 5 a GT1595 11 6 1 Touch panel calibration setting function y E Touch panel reading error can be corrected 595 Normally the adjustment is not required however the difference between a touched position and the Se object position may occur as the period of use elapses 95u When any difference between a touche
36. 13 12 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition O lmg i ogram Data control GOT dat ram Data_ control G T data Ss GOT s OS project data special data are copied to the CF card me This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Z Please select a destination and push Copy button ct Drive 1 Bui It in CF card Zz 2 _ _ CC 2 Sw 50 52g Sis 5 u O n Q Fara lt LO 2 gt Sz Oye Oo ty aon Description Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied l 1 When the memory card is not installed A Built in CF card and B Memory card are not g A Q displayed oO ae 2 Copy Touching the button starts copying g oO 3 oes Ootn ee eae AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 1 3 111 13 12 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition 13 12 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Display operation of GOT data package acquisition The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the memory card This item explains using the A drive othe car Touching the drive name below Select Drive inverts the touched drive name Touching the Copy button starts copying Example Dialog box after touching the Cop
37. 3 i Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard 365 was displayed and close the keyboard Cancel The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed x The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of T i If touch OK button the setting contents z are reflected and the clock display 3 With do not push OK button update re starts if you close the screen the changed a ji 4 If touch X lt button the GOT restarts if the clock settings is changed or the 59 screen closes if clock settings is not Za changed i5 If touch lt button without touching button the dialog shown left is displayed and the changed contents are 5 cancelled and the screen is closed ug ZE ZwE Seu 12 1 Time Setting and Display 1 2 5 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Status Normal Normal Low None Low voltage When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure 8 11 Battery 1 2 6 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY Zz fo PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Zz 5 OS project data screen data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or memory card can be displayed and data can be
38. GT GT Soft GT Item Description j Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 JPEG file reading enabled 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x Function to import IGES format data 2 43V O O O Figure Enables adjusting image qualities for i i 2 47Z Oo O x reading JPEG files Supporting piping 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O oO Text Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x Enables specifyng of background color 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O e Japanese 12dot Japanese 16dot Gothic 2 04E Standard monitor OS 01 01 O O O e Japanese 16dot Mincho e Japanese supporting Europe 12dot e Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Gothic Standard font Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Mincho f aoe i Standard monitor OS 02 04 e Chinese Simplified 12dot 2 27D O O O eters f Boot OS G Chinese Simplified 16dot Mincho Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 12dot Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 16dot Mincho Enables setting the KANJI region 2 472 Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O x Supporting Thai 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O x The following font name is changed Stroke Standard Font JPN Stroke font e The following fonts are added 2 58L Extended function OS Stroke Standard Font China GB Stroke Standard Font 03 03 O 3 Stroke Standard Font China GB supporting Hangul The following
39. Insert the battery into the holder and set it into the GOT backside O Turn the GOT power supply on Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display L gt 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY _Point 1 Precautions after battery replacement Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery replacement Failure to do so may decrease the battery life 2 When the 2 slot type extension unit is connected to GT1560 Before installing or replacing the battery disconnect the unit When connecting or disconnecting the unit be sure to power off the GOT and PLC 8 11 4 Battery life Life span of the battery set in the GOT is shown below Battery life Operating ambient Operating ambient Data backup time after detection temperature of 0 to 45 C temperature of 45 to 55 C of battery voltage low 5 years 14 days In the following conditions the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead is disconnected Point P Battery life and replacement time 1 Battery life reference Approx 5 years in actual use Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Battery replacement time reference 4 to 5 years Calculate the natural discharge amount of the battery as necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is
40. L7 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting The touch panel sensitivity when touching the GOT screen can be set Key sensitivity setting E g a setting can be changed when double touch is 1to8 made when touching the GOT screen only once For preventing chattering Touch panel reading error can be corrected Touch panel calibration L gt 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position X Touch panel calibration Setting For the GT1595 X whether to reduce incorrect inputs responses of parts other than the touched on mm Avoid input error Touch detection mode part when more than 2 points are touched GT1595 ow lt Default Continuous simultaneously on the GOT or to prioritize response Continuous key input key input gt can be selected 1 Relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed The larger the set value in Key sensitivity is the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes E g decrease the value set for Key sensitivity when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows Quick response lt Slow response ace a ce a ee Oms 20ms 10ms 10ms 20ms 40ms 80ms Standard Key sensitivity setting Key reaction speed 120ms 1 1 14 11 3 Operation settings
41. Power line Power line Ree Communication cable z 4 Communication im E 1 cable Za Cable hole Wiring for leading the power line and communication cable out from the panel Install the power line and communication cable as apart from each other as possible in the duct If the cables are installed closely with each other for wiring reasons using a separator made of metal can make the cables less influenced by noise Wiring duct Separator a Power line 100mm or more ae line Wiring of power lines and communication cables in the duct Power line Communication cable 7 4 Panel Inside Wiring Panel Outside Wiring 7 11 7 4 1 Panel inside wiring OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE z O z e 7 zZ OPTION 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment If an improper operation such as communication error occurs in the GOT in synchronization with ON OFF of a particular control equipment hereinafter abbreviated to load such as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor the GOT may be influenced by surge noise In such a case install the ground cable or communication cable apart from the load If the ground cable or communication cable has to be installed close to the load unavoidably attaching a surge suppressor is effective Attach the surge suppressor at the
42. Remove the extension unit cover from the right side of the GOT Remove the extension unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted m ZnA 2 S o a 28h VANSANT E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION W 0 Bs if fs icp Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care z coed of not cutting the cable of the battery holder cza Expanded figure of part A in M 9 Q Ze o z 6 Pull up the backlight drive board and disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the backlight drive board x lt a z When replacing GT15 80SLTT remove the cable from the cable holder When replacing GT15 80SLTT Cable holder 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 9 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight D Press the backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left When pulling the backlight press the packing with your finger so that the backlight will not be hit with the packing When replacing GT15 80SLTT When replacing GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT or GT15 70VLTN Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48 N m When mounting the case take care of not bi
43. Replace the memory card Memory card battery The battery voltage of the memory card is low 335 voltage low Replace x Replace the battery of the memory card battery Either of the following folder or file with the name same as the file to be created exists in the storage destination memory Fil failed Conf pas ile output failed Confirm 337 P Folder storing data X output file path Write protect file Delete the above folder or file or change the name of the file to be created Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been Printer error or power turned on 340 x failure 1 Confirm the printer 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 341 Printer error i x 1 Confirm the printer 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer Error occurred at the external I O interface module External power is not 1 If an external power supply 24VDC is not supplied 342 supplied to external I O supply the external power supply x unit 2 Ifan external power supply is supplied replace the external I O interface module External I O unit _ The external I O interface module is not installed correctly 343 installation error Check if x j Install the extern
44. Unit mm inch Bus connection unit GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 QBUS Serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 J71E71 100 GT15 J71LP23 25 85 3 35 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 f MELSECNET 10 communication GT15 75J71LP23 Z 85 3 35 unit GT15 75J71BR13 Z CC Link IE controller network ao i GT15 J71GP23 SX 85 3 35 communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z Printer unit GT15 PRN i Video input unit GT15V 75V4 85 3 35 RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 a Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 85 3 35 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT Ey Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the extension unit do not exist 6 3 Mounting Position d For GT1560 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT 2 When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be S installed in the areas shown in the following figure g fe X Extension unit Model f Unit mm inch Hole for installing GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Z GOT GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75ABUSL 7 Bus connection unit oc GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 47 1 85 ao GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L H 5 gt O eg GT15 RS2 9P
45. e I Cc Co Co co ca Cc a c B C C C J C C C J C C B Dl f A 0 0 Ee a es 9 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED i Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen For connecting a personal computer 4 USB interface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 5 RS 232 interface Connector type D sub 9 pin 6 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 7 Extension interface For installing an extension unit 8 CF card interface For installing a CF card 9 CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed car Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the 10 CF card access switch PHA ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board 11 p For installing the optional function board interface 12 Multi color display board For installing the multi col
46. e s Cause of Ssp Dup Sta No Error error code F10B Dup Ctrl Sta Error error code F10C Rev Retry Err Error error code F10E Send Retry Err Error error code F10F Time Out Err Error error code F110 Abnormal Line Error error code F112 Disconnection Error error code F11B No Own Sta Baton Error error code F11F Other error code Error error code displayed Displays the cause of disabled data link cyclic transmission of the host Normal Communicating normally StopOrder Cyclic transmission of all stations stopped from host or other station eaves Oh Sey No Shared Param Parameters cannot be received Bad Shared Param Set parameter error Bad Self Sta CPU A medium critical error occurred in the host CPU Com Aborted Host data link error occurred 4 Transient status Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error code No 9 Item Transmission Err Description Displays the number of transient transmission errors ErrCode For other than the GT155 0 Error histories of 16 errors are displayed in 16 lows from the latest For the GT155 0O 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display Only the latest error history is displayed as only a single low is provided 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 24 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTE
47. i OK en 4 If touch gt lt button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the changed settings 1 6 4 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 1 3 Operating the maintenance timing setting 17 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION ADDITION TIMES RESET w z Sg U a i Ta Wiz oa wu lt cS Displays the present value of Backlight maintenance time notification period Display section maintenance time notification period Touch key maintenance time notification count and Built in flash memory maintenance time notification count which are additioned for the maintenance time notification respectively and resets these values For maintenance time notification setting refer to the following lt 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING 17 1 Addition times reset INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 1 Addition times reset function Resets the value which is additioned by the 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting to 0 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM Item Description Backlight power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 Display power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 Touch key pushing addition times reset Function to reset the pushing addition times to 0 Build in flash memory writing addit
48. lt gt this section COPY aaan lt this section MOVE oes lt lt gt gt this section Rename a lt this section A Create Folder gt gt this section List esses lt gt this section FE If touch gt lt button the screen is closed 1 3 96 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Operation of G1O CSV conversion G1O gt TXT conversion Z Operation log file G10 file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on S personal computer re E f Ei a E elect Drive A PROJECT INL 000001 en amp Touch and select the G10 file which is to 7 a L co0001 1K 01 04 01 08 A be converted to CSV file or Unidcode BR IPERE w 1060000120001 91 03 01 Q text file zm V L060000 10002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 2 Touch the following button in Sw A Zz accordance with destination file type gt g ZuE E e CSV file G10 gt CSV button eee 7 e Unicode text file G10 gt TXT button 104KB 499672KB Fi r awa ees A Et o GL gt TXT Del Renae BRE es Zee ECT NOEL EE Select the target folder aoe indName Size Date Time i Na lu G10 GPEL06_20080308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 il Selecting a folder is not needed for ae Vee arrage f tputting directly below the driv 610 OPELO 20060310_0002 4k 03 10 06 13 33 outputting e
49. 03 00 MELSECNE T10 Supporting routing parameter setting with 243V Communication driver connection PLC ST Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01 O r aa to PLC network Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R O O x x Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELSECNET H 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B slate eine al u I pi MELSECNET H 03 09 O O X oe CC Link IE i i Communication driver Supporting connection to CC Link IE f controller network 2 77F CC Link IE Controller O O x x i controller network connection Network 03 12 Supporting connection to CC Link Intelligence device station Communication driver 2 09K aa O x x x Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK ID 01 02 Q173HCPU Supporting connection to CC Link Ver 2 2 32J Cormmunication driver u i i Li er f i x x x CC Link CC Link Ver2 ID 03 00 O connection Supporting connection to Universal model Intelligent device QCPU station Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver 2 63R l m O x x x Supporting connection to CNC C70 CC Link Ver2 ID 03 07 Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B Communication driver u l ene CC Link Ver2 ID 03 09 O z Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Versio
50. 1 Title display The screen title name is displayed in title display part As the screen is composed of multiple layers the title including these layers is displayed Buzzer volume OFF Title display Window move buzzer ON Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Please select keys Title display 2 Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the lt x Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen al gt Scroll one line column F 44 P gt Scroll window gt 9 10 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Change of setting value z O E O Z Ww gt Setting item Select button Setting item Select button COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING cK Default OK Touch the select button setting point on the screen According to the setting item the button requires selecting setting value inputting value or displaying other setting screen
51. 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 0 15 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 2 Deletion Delete a registered keyword E Touching the Regist key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword Input a key word and touch the Enter key and the keyword is deleted Keyword Please input keyword PLC connected FX CPU compatible Input a keyword to delete with 2nd keyword FX CPU not compatible Input the keyword to delete only into the keyword with 2nd keyword The 2nd keyword will be ignored 3 Protection delete Delete the protection by key word in order to access to a FX PLC to which a key word is registered Touching the key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword Input a keyword and touch the Enter key to delete the protection Keyword A Please input keyword 2nd PLC connected FX CPU compatible f Input a keyword to delete the protection with 2nd keyword FX CPU not compatible Input a keyword to delete only into the keyword with 2nd keyword The 2nd keyword will be ignored 4 Protection Reset the keyword in which protection has been deleted to the protection status Touch the Protect key and the keyword goes to a protected status 1 0 16 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of co
52. 11 3 1 Operation setting functions Point gt Operation settings by GT Designer2 6 Set buzzer volume and window move buzzer volume by GOT setup in System Z u Environment of GT Designer2 gt When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data z gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup a i A Zz 11 3 2 Display operation of display setting 202 an O2Zn Main menu GOT setup 11 L 3 gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch GOT setup Operation zZz On EO o wi E oO W on Operation settings CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Touch an item to change settings FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 3 Operation settings 1 1 15 11 3 2 Display operation of display setting Point gt Restart after setting change If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the lt x button after the setting of each item excluding the security setting is changed and touch the P lt button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected Display Operation AS LJ
53. 13 8 4 Logging information operation Delete operation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted X elect Drive _ i erie ELTI sz e TE D Touch and select the file folder to delete DIR t GIL LOGO0001 1K 06 05 01 15 26 la GIL LOGO0002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 GIL MEC 1K 06 05 01 15 18 M hd EBZ File biL cs Copy Move Sreate GIL TX Del Rename If touch Del button the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled Target file LOGOOO001_0002 G1L Are you sure do you want to delete When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Process completed When it cannot be deleted the dialog showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again 3 13 11 5 Precautions The folder is invalid 1 3 74 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation Copy operation Zz O Folder to be used in logging is copied S re dae l
54. 226 FTE SE ui Ozo 11 Zz On With do not push OK button If touch OK button without touching P lt zZ if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is mia value will be canceled displ d ola OK isplayed n 2 3 Socios bt Wo HEG 39g O lt 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup a screens after completing the setting of all lt items to change with lt button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents ae When changing only Brightness 365 contrast the GOT does not restart x O W ani O S D O 0 Zz O 58 ZS z3 Bio oa Zz O wg 2e Zu Zu le SEY 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 1 1 13 11 2 3 Operating the brightness contrast 11 3 Operation settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The items which can be set are described below If touch the each item part the respective setting becomes possible Function Description Setting range OFF SHORT LONG Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed lt At factory shipment SHORT gt ON OFF Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window Window move buzzer volume setting lt At factory shipment can be selected ON gt Security level change screen can be displayed Security setting screen change 3 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed Utility call key screen change
55. 7 4 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section Point gt 1 Precautions for wiring to the power supply section e For 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable use the thickest cable as possible Max 2mm terminals To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws use the solderless terminal with insulation sleeve e When connection is made between LG and FG terminals be sure to connect them to the ground Otherwise the system becomes susceptible to noise Since the LG terminal has potential equal to a half of the input voltage touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock e When grounding the GT1550 ground it with the ground terminal equipped at the lower left corner on the GOT main unit back face Refer to the above Connect only the ground cables of the bus connection cable and the CF card extension unit connection cable to the FG terminal 2 Wiring the power section of the GT1550 when using an extension unit Be sure to wire the power section before connecting a cable to the extension unit If connecting a cable to the extension unit before wiring the power section the terminal block of the power section will be blocked by the cable and the power section cannot be wired and start twisting them at the position closest to the connected 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 5 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE es INSTALLATION OPTION 7 3 Grou
56. BR ahaa Security setting Security setting Security level change GOT setup Operation Security level change RS Touch Please input password Security level change m 7 8 9 af 8 HTE 0 Ho Del Erte Input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer2 1 1 18 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions 11 4 3 Security level change operation Zz fe o Z Password input operation T z GOT setup Operation Security level change By touching 0 to 9 5 A to E key the Nice Ged besuee password of the changed security level is Sj input O 7 8 ofa Bl When correcting the input character touch Sw 4 5 6 0 Del key to delete the correcting character ERE eI ELE and input the password again Si E OJA Dell Enter i 820 11 Zz On EO T l m E Security level change success After inputting password touch the Enter nter oH key When the password matches the normal completion message is displayed When g z gt the password does not match an error Fap message is displayed g a 808 D If LOK button is touched it returns to the kan password input screen again Q Password error Z z 5 O gt E TO x O W ani O S D If lt q button is touched it returns to security setting screen Zz O 58 Bama og B Remark About forgetting to return to t
57. CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 C77 8 1 2 E MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 2 Installing the GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L These cannot be installed on the back stage of a video RGB unit For bus connection use the GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS or GT15 ABUS2 8 16 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 3 Removing video RGB unit bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface board fixing screws e Video RGB unit 8 4 2 Installing procedure e Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 37 8 1 2 FA 2 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit L7 8 1 2 4 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 e CC Link IE controller network communication unit 3 8 1 2 4 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 L77 8 1 2 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link
58. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 1 3 Display setting operations Opening screen screen save time 11 6 With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations If touching the setting numerical keyboard is displayed Input numeric with the keyboard Setting contents are defined if OK is touched If touch gt lt button without touching button the dialog mentioned left is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT button OK setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with lt x button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents Screen save backlight battery alarm display z 8 Cam s Setting item is changed if setting item is 2 ei Jw en touched ON lt gt OFF backlight OFF E z a Ny 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button aie O is touched 0 0 FA 0 in 10 Se O Su 50 FE SE ui Ozo moj 1 1 With do not push OK button If touch gt lt button without touching if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialog mentioned left is value will be canceled disol d 0K isplaye
59. DA COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION SETTINGS STATUS DISPLAY x Oo Ww S LL w Ww 1p O 0 DISPLAY SECTION 2 No 3 No Loop information Displays the loop status of the CC Link IE controller network communication unit Item IN Loop Sts Description Displays the IN side connection status of the host station Normal Rev connect IN LoopBK Sta Displays the station No of the IN side loopback station No loopback station value 1 to 120 IN LoopBK factor Displays the cause of the loopback No LoopBK Sta OUT cable disconnection OUT connecting a line OUT wrong cable connection OUT Loop Sts Displays the OUT side connection status of the host station Normal Rev connect OUT LoopBK Sta Displays the station No of the OUT side loopback station No loopback station value 1 to 120 OUT LoopBK factor Data link information Displays the cause of the loopback No LoopBK Sta IN cable disconnection IN connecting a line IN wrong cable connection Displays the data link information Com Status Cause of Ssp Cause of Stop of the CC Link IE controller network communication unit Item Com Status Cause of Ssp Description Displays the communication status of the host station D Link in prog D Link stopped B Pass exec B Pass stopped Testing Offline Offli
60. DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 101 13 11 4 Operation log information operation B If touch the Execute button the dialo Target file LOGOO001_0001 G1L h left is displ d 9 Do you want to move the file shown lett IS displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen OK Cancel When only file with the same name Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L y Do you want to Overwrite the file exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving O When moving is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog Process completed 1 3 102 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation J Rename operation z An operation log file is changed S re x Z E lo s e Te Select the file to be renamed by me Jott 500001 1K 01 04 01 09 36 7 touching ae 10600001 K ils 01 04 01 09 36 Cey c0800001 0001 c GIL JLOGO0001_0002 K 0 1 00 CSV L0G00001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 Zz O au 30 ke Szi T F 1 112KB 499672KB ild iL Coy Woe Poider GIL gt TXT Del Rename Q Zz ae 2
61. Feb 2007 Manual Number SH NA 080528ENG I The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 47Z Partial corrections Section 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 6 1 6 2 7 2 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 10 1 3 11 2 3 13 1 2 20 3 2 Appendix 1 Partial additions Section 2 2 2 5 2 3 5 3 4 6 2 6 3 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 6 3 14 7 1 Additions Section 8 5 3 8 5 4 8 6 4 Appendix 5 May 2007 SH NA 080528ENG J Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 58L Partial corrections Section 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 5 3 3 5 4 1 6 3 7 2 8 5 8 7 8 68 8 8 78 9 8 88 10 8 98 11 8 10 gt 8 12 8 11 8 13 8 12 8 14 8 16 1 9 2 10 1 3 10 2 3 11 7 1 11 7 2 11 7 3 13 5 2 13 5 3 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 7 20 3 2 Appendix 3 6 Partial additions Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 4 5 5 2 3 5 3 1 5 3 4 8 8 11 7 1 13 5 1 13 5 4 Chapter 14 20 3 1 Appendix 1 6 Additions Section 8 5 8 6 11 2 14 11 Jul 2007 SH NA 080528ENG K Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 62R Partial corrections Section 14 7 1 19 6 1 19 6 2 Partial additions Section 9 2 14 1 20 3 2 Nov 2007 A 10 SH NA 080528ENG L Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 73B Partial corrections Section 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 8 1 1 8 1 2 8 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 2 8 5 2 8 6 2 8 8 2 8 10 1 8 1
62. GT15 QC50B Cable length 5m GT15 QC100B Cable length 10m Q long distance connection cable GOT to GOT long distance connection cable GT15 QC150BS Cable length 15m GT15 QC200BS Cable length 20m For long distance connection 13 2m or longer GT15 QC250BS Cable length 25m of QCPU and GOT A9GT QCNB is necessary GT15 QC300BS Cable length 30m For long distance connection of GOT and GOT GT15 QC350BS Cable length 35m QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable Sold separately Product name Small size CPU extension cable GOT to GOT connection cable Model name GT15 A1SC07B Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B GT15 A1SC30B Cable length 1 2m Cable length 3m Description For connecting QnAS AnSCPU Motion controller CPU A series and GOT GT15 A1SC50B Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and GOT GT15 A1SCO5NB Cable length 0 45m GT15 A1SCO7NB Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC30NB Cable length 3m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and A7GT CNB GT15 A1SC50NB Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and A7GT CNB Large size CPU extension cable GT15 C12NB Cable length 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller GT15 C30NB Cable length 3m f j CPU A series Extension base and GOT GT15 C50NB Cable length 5m GT15 ACO6B Cable length 0 6m GT15 AC12B Cable len
63. GT1575 S Function version C or later GT1575 VN GT1572 GT15 70VLTN For 10 4 TFT VGA VN GT15 60VLTT For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT1565 V GT15 60VLTN For 8 4 TFT VGA GT1562 VN O 7 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit a 2 2 Component List 2 18 2 2 2 Option USB environmental protection cover Sold separately Product name Model name Description USB environmental protection cover GT15 UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side For complying IP67 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 GT11 50UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side For complying IP67 8 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main body Attachment Sold separately Product name Attachment Model name GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 Description 5 7 Applicable GOT screen size 10 4 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 60ATT 87 8 5 GT15 60ATT 77 GOT model to be replaced A985GOT A870GOT SWS A870GOT TWS A8GT 70GOT TW A8GT 70GOT TB A8GT 70GOT SW A970GOT A960GOT A870GOT EWS A8GT 70GOT EW A8GT 70GOT EB A77GOT EL S5 A77GOT EL S3 A77GOT EL A77GOT CL S5 A77GOT CL S3 A77GOT CL A77GOT L S5 A77GOT L S3 A77GOT L Alternative GOT model gt GT1570 A8GT 70GOT SB gt GT1560 GT15 50ATT 95W 5 7 A956WGOT GT15 50ATT 85
64. GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1560 GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GOT1000 Series GT1550 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT1500 GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 Gri166 q Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD Handy GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT11000 GT11 Abbreviation of GT1155 Q GT1150 Q GT11 Handy GOT GT1030 Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW aa GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW GT1000 GT10 Abbreviation of GT1030 GT1020 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series gw Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bue connection unii GT15 Q
65. If the installation failure and the GOT malfunction occur take the following action e If BootOS installation failed Install CoreOS 18 5 1Installing the CoreOS e If standard monitor OS installation failed Install BootOS 18 3 1Installing when starting the GOT ADDITION TIMES Peed RESET FOR fee MAINTENANCE lling when starting the GOT The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of standard monitor OS When the screen requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen Point gt 1 Drives to be used Operatio Q Power OFF GOT and CF card access switch Insert the CF card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT 2 Switch ON Power on the GOT e For GT1595 Power on the GOT while pressing the installation switch S MODE switch on the back of the GOT 1 point press installation function e For GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 Power on the GOT while touching the upper and left of the GOT screen 2 point presses installation function as Zz ta T He OA 5z of an When installing OS at power on use the A drive The B drive cannot be used for OS installation at power on 2 2 point press installation function When the CF card that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive is used the 2 point press installation function is not available MAINT
66. OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol w oO w A INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 4 3 Grounding the cable Ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed 1 Ground the braided shield portion of the cable to the control panel with the cable clamp AD75Ck Braided shield Cable clamps For the cable clamp attaching details refer to AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual lt IB 68682 gt a ForGT15 C EXSS 1 and GT15 C BS Ground the ground wire to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section N Bus connection cable GOT FG terminal FG wire b For other bus connection cables Ground the braided wire for grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw 5 24 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 6 INSTALLATION W CAUTION E Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Do not expose the GOT to dust lamp soot conductive dust corrosive gas or combustible gas high temperature condensing wind or rain or to vibrations and impact 6 Failure to do so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration E Do not drop chips or wire scraps near the ventilation window
67. Q 2 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor 1 8 9 Os Point gt Checking method of BootOS standard monitor OS version 1 Check the version of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details 13 2 OS Information 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1575 VTBA IN 100 240VAC 50 60Hz POWER MAX 90VA SERIAL 0000470YAA00001 A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN J APAN Bootos BACKLIGHT GT15 70VLTT version 1 8 10 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS 18 5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed Normally the CoreOS has not to be installed ADDITION TIMES Ped RESET FOR fee MAINTENANCE Point P Precautions for installing CoreOS When executing the CoreOS installation once it cannot be canceled on the way Do not attempt the followings to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate e Powering the GOT off e Pressing the GOT reset button If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative as Zz ta T He Og 52 of an Q Z lt If the GOT does not recover even
68. Q Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in the communication setting D gt screen Zza Eug aeo es Gos i oleae Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channe l Dr i ver assign x Zz z ChNo RS232 USB Host PC Host PC J ise Extend I F Setting 46 LO Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo GT15 75QBUSL ChNo None 0 None xe O T ChNo T 0 None 0 None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None D 0 None None 5 0 Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK 1 FA device connection 9 PC connection 59 On it oa z O wg E E eo Zu z So 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 0 11 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions 2 The screen switches to the communication detail setting screen Set communication parameters from this screen Refer to the following for the setting change operation C gt 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Communication setting Detail setting BUS Communication parameter Stage No Lo Slot No Default OK Point P Communication parameter setting by Designer2 Set the communication parameters for each communication driver at Communication Settings in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual
69. QD Q lu WL If touch the Download button the dialog Setup a Execute now mentioned left is displayed x If touch OK button the setup is tw O executed u W ep G 0 Zz fej LG Setup is completed 4 When the setup is completed the dialog ae Restart now mentioned left is displayed aa to Touching the OK button restarts the ae GOT Zz O wg 2g gr zZ EB le Seo 13 3 Project Information 1 3 25 13 3 4 Operation of project information Upload setup cancel operation 1 Upload operation By upload operation the project data is transferred from the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive Standard CF Card or B drive Extended memory card The CF card after uploading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT This item explains using the A drive Point gt Before setup operation The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive or B drive when the project data of the A drive or B drive is set up Execute setup cancel L 5 gt 2 Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data plcad Touch A Standard CF Card in Select Do you want to upload drive If touch the Upload button the screen mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes uploading The project data is already existed 0 If any project oun with the same name If upload is done the proj
70. Removal When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw unscrew the screw gt O zZ O 5 20 pE cas 2 Open the CF card cover Turn off the CF card access switch and check that the CF card access LED turns off 2 The CF card can be removed when the CF card access LED turns off even though the GOT s power is Z on al 5 Qa Zz lt x W Ego PAA tE o amp Press the CF card eject button and then the button pops out Press the button again and then the CF card pops out Remove the card 3 A e ii 25 LILO 23a wu gt a 6 z j ions f ing CF Point Precautions for removing card 1 Do not insert or eject a CF card and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit 2 When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit support the card with the hand F because the card might pop out Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit resulting in a 8 damage or failure of the card OPTION 8 8 CF Card 8 43 8 8 4 CF card inserting removing method with CF card extension unit 8 9 Memory Card Adaptor The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card Type II The memory card Type Il is used to transmit the OS project data and to save the data of alarm history function or other functions by installing it to the PC which is equipped
71. Screen switching Screw wei thing Base 09 10 1 09 04 Sitch wel ications pa 10 12 09 09 Switch wol ications B 10 12 08 03 Sereen sai tchine Base 8 10 12 09 17 B 10 Touch switch Screen sel tehing V0 2 08 11 Sereen switching Base a 10 12 09 21 B 1 Maerical Input IO 12 10 00 Switch languages 09 10 12 90 10 B 1 Maerical Inout 3 Switch ications Seitch aol ications EEEIEI Of S 6 e EEEIEI 5555555555555555 55 IFS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS Switch aol ications Seiteh wol ications Switch aol ications Seiteh wol ications FS AS S ES ES ES BS BS E S S S ES ES BS S A S ssasasasasasasasasas Switch applications Screen guitching Bate A 03 10 R 03 10 12 03 10 R 09 10 R 03 10 R 03 10 12 03 10 R 09 10 R 09 10 12 03 10 12 09 10 R 09 10 R 03 10 R 03 10 R 03 10 R 09 10 R 03 10 12 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 5 Touching Search in the list enables searching of a log using the following items Item Date Time O Input the date or time to be searched Touching the Enter button displays the dialog on the left OK Touch the OK button When processing is being executed the Processing message is displayed on the screen O The results found are displayed and the dialog on the left is displayed To continue a search touc
72. Supporting connection to invert 2 18U Communication driver u i i inverter eee FREQROL 500 700 02 02 O x x O Setting range for Timeout Time has been a Inverter Communication driver changed 2 43V O x x O connection FREQROL 500 700 03 01 3 to 30 seconds 1 to 30 seconds Supporting connection to E700 series and Communication driver 2 63R O x x O V500 V500L series FREQROL 500 700 03 07 Supporting connection to ser lifi 2 09K Communication driver u i i vo amplifier pears P MELSERVO J2S M 01 02 O x x Supporting connection to MELSERVO J3 Communication driver i 2 18U O x x O Servo amplifier series MELSERVO J3 J2S M 02 02 connection Supporting connection to MR J3 T seri 2 63R communication driver u i ion to MR J3 T series pi MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 07 Oj x x Supporting writing to the E PROM area in 2 39 Communication driver A x x A parameter writing MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 29 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Version of GT11 A F GT GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS 7 15 GOT1000 Bus Serial Designer2 Supporting t
73. The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Point P The flash PC card of the GOT A900 series In the GT1500 the flash PC card for GOT A900 series cannot be used Use the CF card which is described in the above 8 8 CF Card z 8 8 1 Applicable CF card 8 oi OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 8 2 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF Installing Turn the CF card access switch of the GOT off When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 Open the cover of the CF card interface Insert and install the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 CF Card top face Point gt CF card eject button For the following GOTs after installing the CF card turn the CF card eject button to 90 degree while being pulled e GT1585 S GT1575 S Hardware version B April 2005 or earlier e GT1575 V GT1565 V Hardware version D April 2005 or earlier
74. Touch Utility call key Menu call key GOT setup Operation Menu call key Please select keys Touch buttons to set for the menu call key Notel Pressing time is effective only in case one point 1 1 20 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation GOT setup Operation Menu call key Please select keys Notel Pressing time is effective only in case one point GOT setup Operation Menu call key Please select keys Pressing time With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Touch or displayed at the 4 corners of the setting screen The button repeats lt gt with every touch Set the corner to be set to a key position to e When setting 1 point specify time for keeping pressing the key position to switch to the utility Touch the time input area Touching the input area displays a keyboard Input numerical value from the keyboard Touching OK button determines the setting If touch lt button without touching OK button the dialog mentioned left is displayed O If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with lt j button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents
75. Z 5 m gt Program Data control Memory information x ash memory empty area size 5 A Built in CF card 9268 K byte C Flash Memory User area 7978 K byte C ara 518 bye a s A oot drive empty area size O au 50 Zz IO 5 sce a Ww Ozo Q Zz Seg zaz ade No Ww aon No Item Description 6 z Faa Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files or Fina me 2 folders 2 3 1 Flash memory empty area size xa The A Standard CF Card and B Memory card are not displayed when CF card QTE SE is not installed OTN 2 Boot drive empty area size Indicates the empty area size of boot drive specified by the user 3 ee eae AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 9 Memory Information 1 3 83 13 9 3 Memory information display example 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 1 Special data information function Special data used in the intelligent unit monitor function or others can be copied deleted downloaded or uploaded For details of special data refer to the following manual 3s GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 1 Data Types and Sizes Transferred to the GOT Function Description Reference page Information display of files Displays the name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 87 and folders Delete Deletes a file or holder 13 88
76. amp self check lt gt 9 3 Utility Display a Fe s g Touch System alarm Egu Touch Debug amp self display check n 2 3 Eog HEG 563 O98 System alarm display Oras Reset a 4 nf t jule Z Touching resets the gt system alarm display in the m Battery voltage low or equipment on GOT error A gt a6 N LO 14 x O W I i y 5 0 Z O 38 Ze Za 1o oa Zz O 45 a GOS z m E SEB 14 9 System Alarm Display 1 4 32 14 9 1 System alarm display function 14 9 3 Operating the system alarm display System Alarm display resetting Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred Error causes can be identified by the error code error message and channel No displayed on the System alarm display screen lt 20 TROUBLESHOOTING A method for resetting system alarm depends on an error e GOT error Touch the button to reset system alarms CPU error and Network error The system alarm is automatically reset after its cause is eliminated Point P 1 Before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error __ Eliminate the system alarm cause before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error If not eliminated the system alarm display in the GOT error will not be reset even after the reset operation 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Wr
77. arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the wo
78. gt Precautions on installing BootOS standard monitor OS 1 Installing both BootOS and standard monitor OS After completing BootOS installation install standard monitor OS When installing BootOS the built in flash memory in the GOT is initialized and goes to the status at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when not upgrading it 2 Copying project data using a CF card After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created 3 When OS and project data are in the CF card when using GT Designer2 For a 2 point press installation after the OS installation is complete the project data is downloaded When installing with the utility install the OS and download the project data from their respective operation screens 4 Installation cannot be interrupted Do not perform any of the following during a BootOS or standard monitor OS installation Failure to do so may result in installation failure causing the GOT malfunction e Powering off the GOT e Pressing the reset button of the GOT e Turning off the CF card access switch of the GOT e Removing the CF card 1 8 4 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 3 1 Insta
79. is displayed 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display RLoopBK Sta f f station at which loopback is executed Displays the loopback status No per Perf No per Loop normal forward loop error reverse loop error Loop Back 3 Data link information Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit data link information communication status cause of communication suspension cause of communication stop No Item Description Displays the communication status of the host D Link in prog FData link being executed D Link Stop A ss Cyclic transmission stopped from other station D Link Stop H Cyclic transmission stopped by host B Pass exec No Area Host B W send no allocation d Com Status B Pass exec Param Err Error in host parameters B Pass exec Param unreceived Common parameters not received Disconnect No B Pass Station numbers duplicated cable not connected Disconnect Line Err Cable not connected Testing Testing online offline Reset in prgr Hardware failure Displays the cause of disabled communication transient transmission of the host Normal Comm Communicating normally Offline Offline Offline test Testing offline Initialize Error error code F101 F102 F105 Change Ctrl Sta Error error code F104 F106 Testing Online FError error code F103 F109 F10A Baton Missing Error error code F107 Baton Duplicated Error error code F108
80. is used Point f Before the operation The GOT automatically restarts after executing this setting If project data has been downloaded the GOT starts monitoring of the controller after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety Conaiin GSETORISSEETRE Install communication driver A QnA Standard I F Setting Chane Driver assign QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 to GOT Download of Communication Setting from GT Designer is not required Extend I F Setting After installing communication driver touch ist SS oes the Channel Driver assign button in E Communication Setting ChNo R5232 DUESUppIYA ChNo USB 1 AJ711024 9 Host PC None 2nd ChNo None Q None 3rd ChNo None 0 None Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC_ connection B Touch the Change assignment button on 1 AJ71QC24 Change assignment the dislayed screen as shown left 2 None Change assignment 3 None Change assignment 4 None Change assignment 8 Barcode 9 Host PC OK Continued to next page 1 0 6 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Change assignment Channel No 1 Please select communication driver Ed None i A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 MELSEC FX OMRON SYSMAC Channe l Dr i ve
81. sses 1 5 RS 232 CAbIC cecccceeecceceeseeteceeeesseeeeeeesseeeeees 2 10 RS 422 Cable st istecsseteccestecstardiedeiacesccebiaatevtetevans 2 10 RS 422 conversion UNit cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 8 18 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit 8 18 Installing PrOCECUIe eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 8 18 S Screen data transfer Cable ccceecseeeeeeees 2 20 Security level Change eseese 11 18 Security change display operation 11 18 Security level change functions 008 11 18 Security level change operation 0 05 11 19 Small size CPU extension Cable ceeeee 2 8 Small size CPU long distance connection cable 2 8 Sound output unit 2 eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteneees 8 28 Applicable sound output Unit ee 8 28 Installation procedure 8 28 Special Data Information 0 ccceeeeeeeeee 13 84 Stand oio i ave Teeteecbads 2 17 8 56 Applicable stand 8 56 Installing PrOCCCUIE eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeettteeeeeeeee 8 56 System Configuration 0 c cccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeteees 2 1 System MONILON cece eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteaeeeeeeees 14 1 T Third party PLC connection cable ceee 2 4 Time setting and display eceeceeeeseeeeeeeeee 12 1 Clock setting operations 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 3 Display operation of clock display and setting BRE AA AT err recep ies 12 2 Time setting and display
82. stored see o SE ii oe Sila m Touch the OK button and then the O20 y setting is reflected 11 With donot push OK button Touch the lt lt button without touching the if you close the screen the changed OK button and then the dialog box value will be canceled shown left is displayed zZ On EO nS wE oO W On OK CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY After all settings in the backup restoration setting are completed end the backup restoration setting and GOT setup with touching the lt x button and then the settings are reflected FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 12 Backup Restore Settings 1 1 43 11 12 3 Backup restoration setting operation 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 11 13 1 Trigger backup settings When the conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting Rise Time are met the GOT automatically backs up data How to use the trigger backup refer to the following manual lt gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual 11 Backup restore 11 13 2 Display operation of trigger backup setting Main menu GOT setup Backup restoration setting aE aE f nae Ny So 5 Touch GOT setup y Trig bkup setting Backup restoration setting Trigger backup settings x rigger Backup setting Type Detail
83. touch the password a password input ae n e ENET The NEw password input dialog seg box is displayed and then inputa 3 rs an password 5S5 New password A When the input is completed touch the Enter key Is 225 When the password input is m E 2 ep AS TL completed the New password 58 KE Mit Enter input confirmation dialog box is aze displayed Input the same password Q z e For enabling the setting of Make OperatorNane 0005 gt peratortD COE a permanent password touch lt fa se eet the check box for Make a ge Kake a pernanent pacevord permanent password and then oe the setting is switched set _ Disabled 14 x gt lt Enabled i i _ m E S The operator information editing 3 Touch the OK button after all items are process is conpleted input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added 56 9 a 26 Bio oa OK Zz fe wee Zu e E Zu le SEY 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 42 14 11 1 Operator management 14 43 If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed Edit operation Edit the operator information stored in the GOT Add Edit Delete Return Drive in use Import Export Save OperatorHane P0000 OperatorID CIOL Level Cs Password CI Make a pernanent paesvord The operator information editing process is co
84. 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 21 0 83 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 2 oe 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 37 5 1 48 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 30 1 18 34 5 1 36 15 0 59 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 0 21 0 83 28 1 1 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 4 4 4 45 1 77 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 47 1 85 80 3 15 331 3 L _ 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 50 1 97 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 50 1 97 2 0 08 18 0 71 GT15V 75V4 6 132 5 2 85 3 35 20 0 79 GT15V 75R1 6 77 3 03 30 1 18 32 1 26 2 47 1 85 f ENAT 5 2 1 85 3 35 BNC 20 0 79 RGB 77 RGB 30 RGB 32 1 26 3 03 1 18 GT15V 75ROUT 6 77 3 03 30 1 18 32 1 26 GT15 CFCD z 20 0 79 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 50 1 97 70 2 76 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 81 3 19 31 1 22 43 1 69 50 1 97 21 0 83 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 0 0 30 1 18 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch d GT156 O R Model name A B C D i bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 47 1 85 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 23 0 91 Aa 73 5 2 89 27 5 1 08 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 EaR mide oe ar ee 95 3 74 47 1 85 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L f iaaa E R 73 5 2 89 L 27 1 12 A 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L aoe i aoe 72 5 2 85 28 5 1 12 GT15 RS4 9S 2 on 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 7 23 0 91 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 3 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 42 1 65 GT15 J71BR
85. 11 Backup restore Set the following items with touching the items on the GOT Function Drive for backup setting Drive for backup data Description The drive for storing backup settings including parameters and passwords for controllers can be selected The drive for storing backup data can be selected Setting range A Standard CF Card B Memory card lt Default A Standard CF Card gt A Standard CF Card B Memory card lt Default A Standard CF Card gt Trigger backup setting The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers Rise Time specified for each backup setting are met None Rise Time lt Default None gt 11 13 Trigger backup setting Max of backup data 11 40 Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored 11 12 Backup Restore Settings 11 12 1 Backup restore function Setting range 0 to 50 lt Default 10 gt 11 12 2 Display operation of backup restoration setting Zz 0 Main menu GOT setup S gt 9 3 Utility Display gt gt Touch GOT setup Touch 5 Backup restoration setting a lt Ow 529 Sr Sue Backup restoration setting Q m Touch an item to dp oO Zz m change settings a Zz O lt o W Q 0 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING
86. 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 36 14 11 1 Operator management ssassn anaana 14 36 14 11 2 Password change 0c tt tenes 14 48 14 11 38 Function setting 0 0 eee 14 51 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 1to 15 2 15 1 Clean 15 1 15 1 1 Display operation of Clean 2 0 0 cts 15 1 15 12 Operation of Cl a rusai iania oea sa a aa a a ba E a a EAA aden E Raa te ged 15 2 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING 16 1to 16 4 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 2 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting 0 00 eee eee 16 2 16 1 2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting 0 cee ee ee 16 3 16 1 3 Operating the maintenance timing setting 0 00 c cece eee 16 4 17 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION ADDITION TIMES RESET 17 1to 17 2 17 1 Addition times reset 17 14 17 1 1 Addition times reset function 0 2 00 ete tee 17 1 17 1 2 Display operation of Addition times reset 0 2 0 0 eee ee 17 1 17 1 3 Operation of Addition times reset 0 0 0 0 0000s 17 2 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 18 1to 18 14 18 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation 18 2 18 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 18 3 A 19 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 4
87. 18 3 2 18 4 Section 20 1 20 2 Appendix 5 Partial additions Section 5 3 2 5 3 3 Section 6 2 6 5 Section 8 4 1 8 7 2 8 8 1 8 10 1 8 10 2 Section 10 2 1 Section 11 2 1 11 3 3 Section 13 1 5 Section 14 1 1 Section 19 2 19 4 19 5 19 6 1 19 6 2 Appendix 1 3 Additions Section 3 2 1 to 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 3 2 Section 4 1 Section 8 5 3 Section 11 6 11 8 Section 13 8 13 9 13 10 Section 18 5 Section 4 1 to 4 3 Section 4 2 to 4 4 Section 11 6 Section 11 7 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Jan 2006 SH NA 080528ENG E Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 27D Partial corrections SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 2 1 Section 8 1 1 8 5 to 8 11 8 6 to 8 12 Section 9 2 9 3 Section 10 1 3 Section 11 1 11 7 2 Section 13 7 4 13 10 4 Partial additions Section 2 2 Section 6 3 Section 13 1 5 13 2 4 Chapter 14 Section 19 4 Section 20 2 Appendix 1 3 5 Additions Section 8 5 Section 14 8 14 9 Jun 2006 SH NA 080528ENG F Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 32J Partial corrections Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 3 1 5 4 2 8 4 8 5 2 8 9 9 3 11 2 2 11 3 2 11 4 2 11 5 2 11 7 2 11 8 2 12 1 3 13 1 5 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 3 1 13 3 3 13 4 2 13 4 3 13 5 2 13 5 3 13 6 2 13 6 3 13 7 2 13 7 3 1
88. 2 GT1585 316 12 44 263 10 35 O m Ta a N t o N MTSUBISHI 250 9 84 S teu THe aig 3 ein We a 8 iW i a 301 11 85 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch GT157 O 3 JONYNALNIYN H04 LASSY SAWIL NOILIGGV SO GYVGNVLS NOILOAdSNI Wav Vv SAOIGNAddV GNV SOLOOd ANY SONVNALNIVI WALSAS ANY AO NOILVTIVLSNI ADVSSSW YOuuS 303 11 93 6 T 6r Q ri 3 0 f i f a F o S N N wo N N N 0 eue oz o z o v 8 vTZ S 9 oz zZ 9S 6 0 6 0 rT A i OT 8 L 66T OT 288 11 34 Unit mm inch XaANI App 3 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 4 GT156 0 241 9 49 175 5 6 91 10 0 39 i Gaezann me GOTIOGS 175 6 89 0 0 190 7 48 o m ja MITSUBISHI
89. 22 07 15 34 Operator authentication Information iW G10SAU G1 221K Extend 03 03 64 01 22 07 15 34 Operator authentication Data ba Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation lt 13 2 OS Information 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation A r Zz Point gt Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate e Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating u plate of GOT rear face gt 24 MITSUBISHI 5 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1575 VTBA IN 100V to 240V AC 50 60 Hz POWER MAX 90VA 5 SERIAL 00004701AAD0001 A AA 595 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN E BootOS version su2 BACKLIGHT GT15 70VLTT Sw E O5 w Ozo Q Fara sg e TaZ aoa Die icp aoiz n 2 gt AE HEE x N Sak Siz Ootn ee eae AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 5 13 1 3 OS version confirmation 13 1 4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location When download the project data confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred the transferred project data size the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download The capacities can be confirmed by GT Designer2 Refer to the fo
90. 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication setting 1 0 12 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings The contents of Communication Detail Settings varies according to driver type This section explains setting items different from the communication detail settings of the GT Designer2 For setting items other than described in this section refer to the following manual a UTILITY FUNCTION Ss GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings mi 26 Communication setting Detail setting Zz ray ce BUS uo fF Pami Ww Zo 1 0 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Default OK FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 0 13 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Key word registration deletion and protection delete MELSEC FX Communication setting Detai setting MELSEC FX Transmission Speed 38400 Keyword Regist Delete Clear Protect Default OK 1 Registration Register key words D Touching the Regist key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword 2 Input a keyword and touch th
91. 64 2 52 23 5 0 93 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 16 0 63 31 5 1 24 15 0 59 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 0 18 0 71 28 1 1 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 3 3 3 42 1 65 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 80 3 15 16 0 63 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 47 1 85 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 0 0 18 0 71 GT15V 75V4 5 132 5 2 68 2 68 20 0 79 GT15V 75R1 5 77 3 03 13 0 51 32 1 26 182 7 17 2 68 BNC 20 0 79 GT15V 75V4R1 5 RGB RGB 13 RGB 32 1 26 77 3 03 0 51 GT15V 75ROUT 5 77 3 03 13 0 51 32 1 26 GT15 CFCD 17 0 67 GT15 CFEX C08SET 120 4 72 64 2 52 56 2 20 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 81 3 19 17 0 67 43 1 69 64 2 52 18 0 71 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 0 0 30 1 18 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch App 7 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX App 8 c GT157 O0 R Model name A B C D gt bending radius of the cable AUER 95 3 74 42 1 65 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 l f l 21 0 83 aiaia 73 5 2 89 22 5 0 89 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 Sleen PPR iaa a aS 95 3 74 42 1 65 8 0 32 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L i iba 0 34 e lly AARG 73 5 2 89 22 0 87 8 0 32 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L meen Hen Uaa ika ANT A 72 5 2 85 ee 23 5 0 93 GT15 RS4 9S 2 i Boa 30
92. 75J71BR13 Z uate a A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 8 4 For 15 CC Link IE controller 12 1 network GT15 J71GP23 SxX 3 Optical loop unit 10 4 communication unit 8 4 5 7 For 15 12 1 Gielens Intelligent device station unit 10 4 CC Link CC LINK Ver 2 compliant ji l communication unit 5 7 Intelligent device station unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z y O Set of A8GT 61BT13 GT15 75IF900 12 1 Interface converter Conversion unit for GOT A900 GOT800 series c icati 10 4 3 GT15 75IF900 gt er aries Ms uni uni 1 When using this unit use a standard monitor OS and communication driver of GT Designer2 Version2 15R or later With a standard monitor OS and communication driver of an older version the GOT has cannot recognize the unit to perform monitoring 2 This can be used with the GT1585 STBA and GT1575 STBA of hardware version C or later or the GT1575 VTBA and GT1565 VTBA of hardware version E or later 3 When using this unit use a standard monitor OS and communication driver of GT Designer2 Version2 77F or later With a standard monitor OS and communication driver of an older version the GOT has cannot recognize the unit to perform monitoring 8 2 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 1 Applicable communication unit Installing procedure 8 1 2 When installing a communication unit together with some other extension unit after executing the procedure A communication unit can also be installed togeth
93. 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation Touch and select the G1L file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unidcode text file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type CSV file G1L gt CSV button G1L gt TXT Unicode text file button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 If touch the Excute button the dialog shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When the file whose name is the same File conversion from GIL to CSV ae i 6 Source file L0G000001_0002 61L exists in the destination folder the dialog E Change to LOGOO0001_0002 CSV shown left appears without starting the Z Do you want to overwrite the file i conversion If touch the button z overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels the conversion Lox i O lt Sa Zz Process completed O The message of completion is displayed TE in dialogue when conversion is SE completed If touch button the dialog is closed Q Zz ae 2 pj afeiz n 2 ETA E ug HEG ae Odd ob m zZ lt x z e a m lu WL x O W ani oO S W ep 0 Zz O 5G ZS z3 it 5 oa Zz fe wg 2 E Bo zZ SEY 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 73
94. A EAST 18 2 Prior preparations for installing boot OS and Standa OG eeraa eroi An Esaa RAE AEA AEE 18 3 Program data control function eee 18 6 The 2 point presses installation function 18 5 When installing the different version of boot OS standa OS arsana eaei en Aa ERAN 18 8 Interface converter UNit cccceeesseeeeeeees 2 7 8 2 L Ladder monitor 2 ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeaaees 14 1 Large size CPU extension cable cccce 2 8 Logging information eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 68 13 93 M Maintenance time notification setting 16 1 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting subady dine EAE E E A Poaunguiavsaedhie dug iabacas 16 3 Maintenance time notification function 16 2 Operation of maintenance time notification 16 4 MELSECNET 10 communication unit 2 7 8 2 Memory card adaptor s 2 16 8 44 Index 2 Applicable memory card adaptor 0 8 44 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card adapti ssir s ee aa poe E eee 8 44 Memory card format cceeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeenaes 13 42 Display operation of memory card format 13 42 Format operation of memory Card 13 43 Memory Card format 13 42 Memory Check cecececceeeeeeseeeeeeseseneeeeeeneeeeeens 14 4 Display operation of memory card 14 4 Memory check function seeen 14 4
95. C drive can be read written pas C drive memory check normally 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check 27 Seg ae Q Main menu Debug amp self check Self check almir c 9 3 Utility Display n 2 3 Touch Touch Fao Self check Memory check PEE Touch 57 gt Debug amp self check aZze Z lt z a D o gt wo Ig LO Select the memory to check and touch Check x Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 Memory Board for option function type GT 15 QFNB48M Memory Board for 65536 colors type GT 15 VHNB CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 3 Memory Check 1 4 4 14 3 1 Memory check function 3 Remark Mounting condition of optional devices board ie pe The mounting status of option function board and multi color display board is displayed on the lower left of the memory check screen When mounted The model numbers of the mounted option function board and multi color display board are displayed When not mounted None is displayed Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory Point P When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following e CF card inserting removing method s gt 8 8 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the memory card or built
96. C30R20101 9P Cable length 3m Ta S ec oan ee z module communication board serial communication board GT09 C30R20102 25S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable z ic GT09 C30R20103 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit Z Continued to next page o Z a zZ E fe 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 10 Product name RS 422 cable Connection cables for KEYENC Model name GT09 C30R40101 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40101 9P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40101 9P Cable length 30m Description For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication module serial communication board GT09 C30R40102 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40102 9P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40102 9P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit communication board GT09 C30R40103 5T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40103 5T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40103 5T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to OMRON communication board CP1W CIF11 E PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Description name GT09 C30R21101 6P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 pane GT09 C30R21102 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENC
97. CF card to built in flash memory and starting GOT with built in flash memory When transferring data to CF card and starting GOT with CF card Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable or RS 232 cable Insert the CF card in the PC Insert the CF card in the PC Refer to GT Designer2 Version _ Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Transfer the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the GOT 1 Install standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS to the GOT After installation is completed the GOT automatically restarts Write the OS and project data to be Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card the CF card 1 Write the standard monitor OS 1 Set the OS boot drive to communication driver extended A Standard CF Card 2 function OS option OS project 2 Write the standard monitor data in the CF card OS communication driver option OS extended function OS project data and special data into the CF card Refer to Chapter 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS in this manual for the operations of GOT Check that the CF card access switch is off and insert the CF card into the GOT 2 Download the project data created by the PC Check that the CF card access switch is off and insert the C
98. CF card removal prohibited zz OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible lt m Optional function board 12 p For installing the optional function board interface Multi color display board For installing the multi color display board z 13 9 For GT1575 VN and GT1572 VN 65536 color display is not supported even with 28 interac the multi color display board installed 2 z iB ogw f Hardware reset switch Zg 14 Reset switch on ee Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 15 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 16 Battery holder Houses the battery z amp 1 It is provided for the GT1575V S only a 2 For the multi color display board refer to the following z zZ KE 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN o zZ a zZ O amp 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 4 a7 I g_ 7 3 Remark Bt Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT157 0 is as follows GOT model name GT1575 STBA Hardware version A March 2006 or later GT1575 STBD GT1575 STBA A March 2006 or later B April 2005 or before Connector Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4Ck or equivalent product Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Model name GM C9RMDU11 or equivalent product C Ap
99. CPU ON OFF simultaneously O Restored O Not restored Proceed to e Take the action of 4 h e Connect the cable again O Restored O Not restored Proceed to f The cable connection may be faulty Securely connect the cable If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation f Reinstall the project data O Restored O Not restored Proceed to g Data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering the GOT OFF during the installation of project data or OS g Reinstall the OS O Restored O Not restored Proceed to h h Take the action described in the Action column O Restored O Not restored Proceed to i The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise Do not power the GOT OFF while transferring data If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation Take the action with referring to GOT installation status check sheet i Replace the unit module O Restored O Not restored The hardware of the unit module may be faulty Install the unit module with which the GOT malfunctioned again to see if the unit module caused the malfunction After checking proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O The GOT is not restored even by performing a to i Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation 1 The GOT reset switch does not operate when the bus connection is used 2
100. ChNo heres BY supp ly f ChNo USB 1 A QnA QCPU QS 1024 v3 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo_ None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo_ None ChNo_ None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo O None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 FA device connection 9 PC connection 1 0 _ 10 1 Communication Setting 10 nee ns 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 10 2 Communication Detail Settings Zz Zz 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions 2 a Function Description 5 Communication Set various communication parameters of communication devices 0 parameters setting The settable parameters differ according to the communication device Keyword setting For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Key word deleting For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted eg ce mm a bw Zo Key word protection cancel For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled For the FX series PLCs the cancelled program protection status in the PLC can be returned Keyword protection i i to the protection status again o az ae 2 DON 2 oe aoe 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation aan
101. Clear 5 sheets Zz GT15 80PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets 2 12 1 protective sheet GT15 80PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets a ao GT15 80PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets z nO GT15 70PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT15 70PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets Protective sheet 10 4 protective sheet T GT15 70PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets 4 GT15 70PSGW Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets z GT15 60PSCB Clear 5 sheets 5 GT15 60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets o 8 4 protective sheet GT15 60PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT15 60PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets a Zz GT15 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets S n GT15 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets SS 5 7 protective sheet EE GT15 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets lt i GT15 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Protective cover for oil Sold separately Product name Model name Description W GT05 90PCO For 15 GOT 20 F i rt GT05 80PCO For 12 1 GOT So Protective cover for oil GT05 70PCO For 10 4 GOT GT05 60PCO For 8 4 GOT GT05 50PCO For 5 7 GOT z Backlight Sold separately i lt Product name Model name Description z GT15 90XLTT For 15 high intensity wide angle view TFT XGA GT1595 X GT15 80SLTT For 12 1 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1585V S GT1585 S ae f GT1575 S Function GT15 70SLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA i version B or earlier SEA GT1575V S GT1575 V f 3 For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA zZ Backlight GT15 70VLTT VGA
102. Clock Setting is changed For details of Adjust and Broadcast refer to the following manual GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions 12 1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND my OPERATION Ne SETTINGS gt oc ui E lt oo fay Zz lt FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION gt lt a Q O o 2 GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting Main menu Time setting amp display L gt 9 3 Utility Display Time Setting amp display Clock setting Adjust R F 08 31 2005 15 57 41 WED Touch Time setting amp i GOT internal battery None Low Set the Clock settings display voltage status P A and Time settings 1 2 2 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display z O o Z Clock setting z i A E Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of controller connected to z the GOT 5 Setting Description Adjust the time of GOT c
103. Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards When using a GOT other than shown below the system does not conform to the EMC Directive Item GT1595 Model GT1595 XTBA Hardware version of the GOT Production year and month Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1595 XTBD Version B or later Jun 2006 GT1585 GT1585V STBA Version K or later Feb 2007 GT1585V STBD GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD Version G or later Feb 2007 Version C or later Apr 2005 Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1570 GT1575V STBA Version J or later Feb 2007 GT1575V STBD Version G or later Feb 2007 GT1575 STBA Version C or later May 2005 GT1575 STBD Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD Version E or later May 2005 Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1575 VNBA Version K or later Jan 2006 GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA Version K or later Jan 2006 GT1572 VNBD Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1560 GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD Version E or later Apr 2005 Version B or later Mar 2006 Version B or later Nov 2005 GT1562 VNBA Version J or later Nov 2005 GT1562 VNBD Version B or later Mar 2006 GT1550 GT1555 VTBD Version E or later Aug 2007 GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD Version F or later Dec 2006 Version F or
104. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS ON Key It is a key for selecting the setting value Repeats with each touch ON OF F Numerical Key It is a key for inputting the numerical value It displays the keyboard on the bottom of the screen when touched In the above mentioned screen example there is no setting item which displays the keyboard For the operation of keyboard refer to the next page 516 78 9 Dl al gt CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY 2 011121314 Cancel Enter ll ak Touching Enter confirms the numerical input a x When the setting range exists it repeats the numerical without displaying keyboard 365 Example 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps ed ee e Setting Key It shifts to the setting screen of each setting item when touched ani Displays the another setting screen o i O 0 Zz O 38 Setting contents are reflected if OK button is touched gg 25 to If lt touch button without touching OK button the dialogue mentioned below is displayed ae With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed z value will be canceled Q 0K wg 2g gr GOS z m E SEB 9 3 Utility Display 9 11 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyboard operation Touch the numerical value to be changed 2 Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is
105. Date Time 0S Name ES 10SMONT OUT 1233K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 45 i Standard monitor OS I IG 1F 16STG FON 500K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 45 16dot Standard Gothic Font Japanese IG1F 12STG FON Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 12dot Standard Gothic Font Japanese IS 10SMONT G1D 2K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 System Screen Information 10SMONT G1 637K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 System Screen Data IS 1FTTNMG FON 40K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 True Type Numerical Font 6 1CMAQDR OUT K Comm 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 IG 10SRECP OUT 46K Option 02 04 00 02 02 00 19 33 Recipe m 52 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information If touch Property button after selecting the property displaying target folder the Property display shown left is displayed In Property display the following information is displayed for each file selected by Item Description Name Displays the file name Size Displays the file size Displays the following items according to the file type Boot BootOS Type Basic Standard monitor OS Extend Extended function OS Option Optional function OS Comm Communication driver Version Displays the version of BootOS and OS Date Displays the date and time of the file and time creation If touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch 4 button the s
106. Debug amp self Touch O perator info Password change check Management DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Password change CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Operator setting menu Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY a Oo Ww Oo re w Ww 7 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 48 14 11 2 Password change Password change operation 14 49 Communication setting tal GOT setup TEJ Tine set e OperatorNane PR eus Parsvord blaz Operator manageacat BJ Pasavord change A Function setting FUESAI ZIRICITIBININI Enter Password change Input a new password HETS hir 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 2 Password change Log into the GOT with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed on the Main Menu screen for the utility 2 Touch Password change in the operator setting menu and then the Password change dialog box is displayed Input the current password on the Password change dialog box Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Input a new password 5 After inputting a new password input the new password agai
107. E EE E E E E 14 12 14 5 2 Display operation of Font check 0 ce eae 14 12 14 5 3 Font check operation oy seauu ea EE ERARE E E eee nee 14 13 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 14 14 6 1 Touch panel check function 0 0 0c teas 14 14 14 6 2 Display operation of Touch panel check 0000 cece eee eee 14 14 A 18 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations 0 00 tees 14 15 14 7 I O Check 14 16 14 7 1 VO Check functions soins ene aa e a a tiem Saale sg aaa Zac ed 14 16 14 7 2 Display operation of I O Check 000 c tte 14 17 14 7 3 VO Check Operation areia ea ads ot heedln bese eeu od Fae Medes Leelee 14 18 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 21 14 8 1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display 0 0 00 14 21 14 8 2 Displaying the NETWK unit status display 0 00 00 e eee eee 14 21 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 2000 ee ee eee 14 22 14 9 System Alarm Display 14 32 14 9 1 System alarm display function 00 000 cee tees 14 32 14 9 2 Displaying the system alarm display 0 c eee tees 14 32 14 9 3 Operating the system alarm display 0 000 e cee eee eee 14 33 14 10 GOT Start Time 14 34 14 10 1 GOT start time function 0 ai c cts 14 34 14 10 2 Display operation of GOT start time 0 0 0 ccc ee 14 34 14 10 3 Display of GOT start time 1 2 2 0 tee 14 35
108. GT1030 Designer2 CC Link Standard monitor OS 01 07 connection Via Supporting connection to CC Link Via G4 2 73B Communication driver O O G4 CC Link G4 01 00 f Standard monitor OS 01 02 Microcomputer Supporting the data formats of Format 1 and ee 2 47Z Communication driver O connection Format 2 Computer 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 02 OMRON PLC ae i Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2 47Z Communication driver O connection OMRON SYSMAC 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 73B Communication driver O O KEYENCE PEG KEYENCE KV 700 1000 01 00 connection Communication driver Supporting connection to KV 3000 and KV 5000 2 77F O O KEYENCE KV700 1000 01 03 TOSHIBA i i Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE _ MACHINE PLC PLC 2 77F TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini O oO connection 01 03 Standard monitor OS 01 07 MATSUSHITA Communication driver Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLC 2 73B O Oo PLC connection MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 01 00 Supporting connection to CP9200SH MP900 Standard monitor OS 01 07 YASKAWA PLC series 2 73B sia o O s Communication driver connection e Supporting connection to MP2000 MP900 series 2 73B YASKAWA MP 01 00 O O Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to MicroLogix 1000 1200 ae A 2 58L Communication driver oO O ALLEN 1500 series i AB MicroLogix 01 00
109. GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 Ts T15 75QBUSL 79 3 11 Hole for g 8 ets oer SGA installing HLS GT15 75QBUS2L GOT P GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S 56 2 20 Prohibited area Serial communication unit lt for installation GT15 RS4 TE with CF card ae 80 40 interface A drive Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 3 15 1 57 MELSECNET H communication GT15 J71LP23 25 117 4 61 Prohibited area for installation unit GT15 J71BR13 71 2 80 with an extension unit CC Link IE controller network GT15 J71GP23 SX 117 4 61 6 10 communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z Printer unit GT15 PRN Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit wi extension unit do not exist 6 3 Mounting Position 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle u When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar set the display section as shown below w When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C or less the mounting angle should be in the range 60 to 105 degrees Zz fo a GOT ae i iz cas Display section Control panel 2 etc Ee o m e The GOT will be deteriorated earlier if it is used at the mounting angle other than the above Therefore Q the temperature inside the control panel should be within 40 C D When mounting an extension unit on the upper stage of MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 G
110. GT15 QBUS2 oy 21 0 83 ee 73 5 2 89 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 a ghee GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L f 0 0 a 8 0 32 se peace 73 5 2 89 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L SABH 1 48 GT15 RS2 9P 2 PIE 123 4 84 GT15 RS4 9S 2 a 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 21 0 83 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 2 one 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 0 0 34 5 1 36 15 0 59 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 21 0 83 28 1 1 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 4 4 4 45 1 77 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 130 5 12 80 3 15 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 0 0 50 1 97 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 123 4 84 21 0 83 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD 20 0 79 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 81 3 19 123 4 84 0 0 43 1 69 21 0 83 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 30 1 18 Unit mm inch b GT1585 R Model name A B C D i bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 28 1 1 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 18 0 71 agents 73 5 2 89 8 5 0 34 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 sees eS ae ae acmaet 95 3 74 28 1 1 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L i i f 5 0 2 AFTO haa ee 73 5 2 89 8 0 32 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L ae a i SARRANT A 72 5 2 85 9 5 0 37 GT15 RS4 9S 2 or yes 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 7 18 0 71 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 2 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44
111. If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left Create new folder If touch the OK button starts creating folder ae ea N AND BATTERY g ani O W Process completed When creating folder is completed completion dialog is displayed 5 If touch the OK button closes the dialog Zz O 58 Ze 25 it oa Zz O wg 2g E se zw Seu 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 79 13 8 4 Logging information operation 13 8 5 Precautions Precautions for create delete 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in memory card for GT15 2 characters 1 character E xtension 4 characters Drive name 1 character SEO Eat Max 78 characters Remark f folder is assigned the hierarchy a The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 e LPT1
112. Joa s ino thet Dak 2758 Extended function OS Fl o upporting the trigger backu oe 93 3 Backup Restore 03 09 O Z 4 2 2 Zan CNC data I O Function to copy or delete data of the 263R Extended function OS function CNC that is connected to the GOT CNC Data I O 03 07 O x x Q Extended function OS Z Sree GOT Platform Library 03 12 D E nction to display sequence programs SFC monitor fa ap th upet in th nes o77F Option os ae written in the in the function di ton the GOT SFC Monitor 03 12 O x x w 2 AAS GOT Function Expansion Library Z S 03 12 z Standard monitor OS 02 02 Communication driver ii Multi channel Function to monitor multiple controllers a O i 2 18U Use the communication driver O x x Ed function with a single unit of GOT eS 02 02 or later for each u A connection res OPE Option OS res lt lt Function for monitoring each controller Gateway function Mail from one GOT PC or sending a mail from 2 09K 01 02 Oo x x GOT Gateway function Server Client Gateway function 01 02 N S ting the FTP functi 2 18U Opio oS o upporting the server function oe Gateway functionFTP 02 02 O x x a wW Enables transfer of binary data by the FTP Option OS a 2 32J O x x lt x server function Gateway FTP 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 Function to display document on the GOT 2 32J Option OS oO O x Documentidisplay Document Display 03 00 function Image
113. LED on the GOT front face Fit the cover to each GOT corner a Spread the protective cover for oil so that it covers the rubber packing part on the GOT rear face For keeping liquids and others out of the control panel make sure that the rubber packing part is completely covered 3y intl Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front 5 Mount the GOT onto the control panel When the control panel is dirty clean the control panel The panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are the same as those without the cover Mount the GOT onto the control panel by referring to GT15 User s manual P rotectivecover Panel cut for oil dimensions Mounting metal fixture Control panel 8 52 8 13 Protective cover for oil 8 13 2 Installation procedure Point gt Precautions for protective cover for oil e The protective cover for oil is a consumable product Check the cover for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replace with new one if necessary e Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover e Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches thinners organic solvents corrosive chemicals and others Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover e When the protective cover for oil
114. M S ERR Red or station No or station No ae Other than control station in MANAGER Green Control station in operation i operation Sub control station in Other than sub control station S MANAGER Green operation in operation Other than normal station in NORMAL Green Normal station in operation operation 14 25 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display No LED Item R Lit Not lit Blink color PARAM ERR Red Parameter error No parameter error F LOOP ERR Red IN side error No IN side error SD Green Sending data Not sending data RD Green Receiving data Not receiving data TOKEN PASS Green Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed Data link being executed 9 Data link being executed DATA LINK Green Cyclic transmission exe Data link not executed N a Cyclic transmission stopped cuted Offline or hardware test self loopback test internal as Online or circuit test being GOT R W Green self loopback test or i executed station to station test being executed R LOOP ERR Red OUT side error No OUT side error For monochrome display it is displayed as W lit or O not lit 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 26 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY me FILE DISPLAY AND
115. MAINTENANCE SETTING G1P file create operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is created When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance 13 58 indName Size Date Time R PROJECT 1 03 16 05 15 45 ES Ly m OF ile IP Copy Move Create Execute BIPSTXT Del Rename feate vanced Recipe Name ecipe No 2 R ecipe No 3 Next Path Name AAN File Name ARPOOGOR OUT a Continued to next page 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Touch the Create G1P button 2 The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed Select the advanced recipe setting to be used for new file After selecting touch the Next button As the input key window is displayed input the file name for new file By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Target file A ARPO0001 G1P 4 If touch the Enter button the dialog 5 Do you want to create the file shown left is displayed S Touch the OK button T Zz O au Se ie Target file A ARPO0001 G1P When the file whose name is the same SE m H
116. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION D w Fae ha mE one DANGER e Connect the battery correctly a Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire oe These may cause the buttery to burst or fire E 2 Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Jag Doing so can cause an electric shock lt z Before starting cleaning or retightening the terminal screws always switch off the external power sup Zee plies used in the system in all phases 9 Cleaning or retightening the terminal screws while the power is on may cause an electric shock Before changing the backlight always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases when the GOT is connected to the bus the PLC CPU power must also be switched off externally in all phases and remove the GOT from the control panel Not switching off the power in all phases may cause an electric shock Not removing the unit from the control panel can cause injury due to a drop VANALINN E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the GOT directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunctio
117. Memory check operation s 14 5 Memory information c ceccseeeeeesnteeeeeeenaes 13 82 Multi color display board cece 2 17 8 59 Applicable multi color display board 8 59 Installing procedure of the multi color display board AAA EEST 8 60 0 Operation of system alarm esseeseeeeee eneee 14 33 Display operation of system alarm 65 14 32 System Alarm Display ccccceseeeeerees 14 32 System alarm display function 00c c 14 32 Operation SettinGS ccceceseeeeeereeeeseeeeeees 11 14 Display operation of display setting 11 15 Operation setting functions cece 11 14 Setting operation of operation 0ceee 11 16 Operator Information Management 0 14 36 OPON ise cde heen ee ee 2 7 Option function board cceeeesteeeeeeenees 2 16 8 45 Applicable option function board e 8 45 Installing procedure of the option function board litte nail Miata iam eed 8 45 OS Information Display operation of OS information 13 9 OS information cceecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesetaeeeeneeees 13 8 Function of OS information eceeeeeeees 13 8 Operation of OS information cce 13 11 Overall configuration cccceeeeeesteeeeteeeeenteeteees 2 1 P Packing listscirte E E E E T A 27 Part names and settings of the GT1565 4 9 Part names
118. Message System Alarm 20 25 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 26 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage The interface where the channel CH No 1 to 4 is set does ae not have a communication unit installed Communication unit not a 1 Install a communication unit to the interface where the 1 481 mounted to the slot of O channel CH No 1 to 4 is set active channel 2 Change assignment of the channel CH No 1 to 4 in the Communication Setting Too many same units are Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum P 482 mounted Confirm the no number of mountable units O of units Check the number of units and remove unnecessary units f Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT Simultaneous mounting of 1 483 simultaneously are mounted O the units are not allowed f Check the mounted units and remove unnecessary units Unit mounted incorrectly g y The unit is not mounted on the GOT in the correct position 484 Move the unit to correct i i A D Confirm the mounting position of the unit O position l Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum Too many units mounted 1 485 i number of mountable units O on GOT Reduce units Check the number of units and remo
119. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an electric shock Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or control panel to drop resulting in an injury BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GO
120. O x x O Q173HCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 Supporting connection to FX3U series 2 18U Communication driver u I l l a PEAN MELSEC FX 02 02 O O x o ee Communication driver Supporting automatic system switching 232 WOnA OCPU QU71C24 n A for QCPU redundant system O O x O MELDAS C6 03 00 Peer gt Communication driver Communication driver name has been 2AN A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 n changed O x x O 03 01 Direct connection F p Supporting connection to Universal model Gry QCPU Communication driver 2 63R A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU a Q O O 2 O MELDASC6 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 Communication driver Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 A QnA QCPU QU71C24 O x Oo 03 09 2 73B Communication driver Supporting settings for the number of A QnA QGPU QJ71C24 retries the timeout time and delay time 03 09 O x x O MELSEC FX 03 09 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K O x x O Q173HCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 ae Communication driver Communication driver name has been shanced 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 03 01 O x x O ot AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver 3 2 63R A QnA QCPU QU71C24 O O x O PO Supporting connection to CNC C70 MELDASC6 03 07 P Supporting the redundant system with the connection D redundant type extensio
121. OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 12 Backup Restore Settings 1 1 41 11 12 2 Display operation of backup restoration setting 11 12 3 Backup restoration setting operation Drive for backup setting drive for backup data Touch a setting item and then the setting is changed Touch the OK button and then the setting is reflected Touch the Sx button without touching the With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed OK button and then the dialog box value will be canceled OK shown left is displayed After all settings in the backup restoration setting are completed end the backup restoration setting and GOT setup with touching the lt lt button and then the settings are reflected Trigger backup setting For operations of the trigger backup setting refer to the following 3 11 13 Trigger backup setting 1 1 42 11 12 Backup Restore Settings 11 12 3 Backup restoration setting operation Max number of backup data z 8 Touch the setting item and then a P Drive for backup setting A Bui Id in CF card gt Drive for backup data Aebui lin OF card keyboard appears 5 Tria baw setting Setting Input values with the keyboard test oN fito E 1 Setting range 0 to 50 Default 10 When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be E 50
122. OPTION 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant 5 17 Product 5 4 2 Processing connection cables Process the cable used with the GOT with the following method When processing the cable ferrite core cable clamp and shielding material are required The cable clamp used by Mitsubishi Electric for the EMC specification compatibility test is shown below e TDK corporation brand ZCAT3035 1330 Ferrite Core e Mitsubishi Electric Model AD75CK cable clamp e Japan Zipper Tubing Co Ltd Zipper tube SHNJ type 1 BUS connection cable a For GT15 QCOB GT15 QCOIBS e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side PLC GOT side 360 or less 40 360 or less 7 14 17 1 57 14 17 Unit mm inch b For GT15 COBS e Cut the connection wire protruding from both ends of the cable to the lengths shown below e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the ground wire into the ferrite core e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side Ferrite Core os ZCAT3035 1330 a PLC GOT side
123. OS Communications driver Required other OS 2 Special data 3 Project data lt Precaution gt Remove all units connected to extension I F slot before CoreOS installation Boot0S will be installed together with Core0S GOT Type GT15 V 640 480 Boot OS Version Transfer size 16417 kbyte Memory card g Empty area size 29210720 kbyte Install 2 After confirming that the GOT is powered off install the CF card in the GOT After installing switch the CF card access switch on a Powering the GOT on displays the following screen To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the CF card py ustali Ver 02 01 00 E S iain yi N Amen CREB AMCE Ze tSoBeit CRA F YS AA te pd aa SES 0 OFFST St 4 JL BA SELAGI E d E Do you execute the CorelS installation The internal memory is initialized and return to the state before factory shipment Turn off the CF card access switch before installation If you do not install the Core0S turn off the GOT and remove a CF card 1 12 18 5 CoreOS 8 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 4 Turning the CF card access switch off executes Core OS installation Core0S Install Ver 02 01 00 E e BREMNSRITCES I Warnin Uy hRELT CEE E Do not turn off the power supply Do not push the reset button ADDITION TIMES Pee RESET FOR fee MAINTENANCE BEUshes Writing data Phase Progress as Zz ta oe lt x Og Fz Oz OH an Q When the insta
124. Property Displays the property of special data 13 89 Data check Copies a file 13 90 Downloads the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Card B drive Download oe 13 91 Extended memory card to the C drive Built in flash memory Point P Precautions for operating special data When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card deleting and downloading special data are not available 1 3 84 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 1 Special data information function 13 10 2 Special data information display operation Zz O E Main menu Program Data control 2 lt gt 9 3 Utility Display gt a Touch Program Data control FA Touch Special data 0 information E Be SF Kb OSN OZ select drive K ame A Built in CF card 2 PROJECTI G1 RMIGISPC ICIRDAT a Zz s g zZEzZ a No Ww DON Operate Project data file n oO gt B gt S 505KB Ti Ping Property Data check a O ie Delete Download 5 gt lt otb FSN N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 85 13 10 2 Special data information display operation 13 10 3 Special data information display example Program Data control Special data information elect drive Name ate e A Built in CF card PROJECT 1 03 08 i i G1SPC 154K 02 27 CIR
125. Reference page Enables adding editing deleting importing and exporting the Operator management i 14 36 operator information ow Zao Enables changing passwords to be used for login and logout in out of 2 Z Password change 14 48 Suk the GOT 95y lt Enables setting the automatic logout time and password expiration Function setting 14 51 date 14 11 1 Operator management Zz E A p o0n Operator management function The function enables adding editing and deleting the operator information to be used for the operator authentication 8 l Z gt The function also enables importing and exporting the operator information as the backup data to from a a memory card oF F 538 99g Function Description Reference page Be Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT 14 41 Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT 14 43 2 lt Delete operation Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT 14 44 z ES Return operation Restores the current operator information to the previous saved one 14 45 2 oa f Imports the operator information that is already exported to a memory S Import operation 14 46 card to the GOT 14 Export operation Exports the operator information stored in the GOT to a memory card 14 47 x m I u a W Yn O Z O 58 ZS z3 Bio oa Zz fe wg 2g E fog Zu z SEY 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 36 14 11 1 Operator management D
126. STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 8 3 Example of logging information display rogram Data Control Belect Drive Size Date Time IK 06 05 01 13 36 2K 06 05 01 13 36 2K HO6 05 01_ 13 36 01 13 12 06 05 01 13 35 A Built_in CF card 7768KB 1563248 IL c Copy Move Fo IS 1L TX Del Rename eate Ider Number Item Description 1 Drive The target drive can be selected Even if CF card is not installed this message appears i Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 2 Kind In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the R ename button etc 3 Name C 13 8 4 Ga Rename operation After confirmation touch the C ancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each
127. Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity Hite SE D The key response speed corresponding to Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms IO the Key sensitivity setting is displayed Touching the button determines the setting GOT SELF CHECK Ka CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION Touch panel adjustment Refer to the following for touch panel adjustment operation K gt 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 11 3 Operation settings 1 1 17 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer2 Security level setting 00 C GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 5 8 Security function Password Setting cccccccees c gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 5 Set Password Point gt Restrictions on screen display The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT 11 4 2 Displaying the security level change Bee GOT setup Operation settings S 9 3 Utility Display p g Touch Touch N Touch RY ene
128. Status Disconnect Other In cut off status due to other causes Testing Line Line test being executed Testing Pram Setup Parameter setting test being executed from master station Auto Reconnecting Return processing being executed automatically Reset in prgr CC Link communication unit being reset GOT reset status Displays the status of the current error Normal Normal status Invalid TransPath Transmission path error detected Invalid Parameter Parameter error detected CRC Error Reception data error detected c Error Status Time Out Error Timeout error detected in data reception Abort Error Error detected in data communication Invalid station number station type Invalid Setup transmission speed or mode setting detected Other Abnormality Error due to some other cause detected 1 4 31 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 9 System Alarm Display Zz O o 14 9 1 System alarm display function 5 System alarm display is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT 5 controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual Z LC GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM ae 226 14 9 2 Displaying the system alarm display SmE 828 Main menu Debug
129. Utility Display 9 7 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu Point gt 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses on the GT1595 X a In the case of using a GT1595 X do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point 2 When setting menu call key to 1 point When having set Pressing time of the menu call key setting screen to other than 0 s keep pressing the touch panel for the period set to Pressing time or more before leaving the finger from the touch panel For menu call key setting refer to the following lt 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 3 When touching special function switch utility If you touch the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The special function switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created screen by GT Designer2 Main menu _ cus Bre EA 7 ma S pecial function switch Utility For the details of the special function switch refer to the following K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual a Remark Locking the utility display by password a nema Ro When you try to display the utility main menu while the password is set to the GOT by GT Designer2 the display for password input will be appeared The password setting of GT Designer2 is in the common menu Please inp
130. When the bus connection is used do not power the GOT ON again OFF gt ON while the power of the PLC is ON When powering the GOT ON again OFF gt ON power OFF the PLC before that 3 By powering OFF the GOT an error occurs in the control station when the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 connection is used or in the master station when the CC Link connection intelligent device station is used 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 5 MAINTENANCE ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 5 Troubled product investigation When malfunction of the GOT is not improved please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Depending on the problem details we may ask you to return the troubled product to us In that case please attach the GOT status check sheet GOT installation status check sheet and the system configuration check sheet filled out with details of your system 20 e 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items 1 to 7 When the measure described in the lower column is needed take the measure for the current status When the measure is taken check the result Effective or Ineffective 1 Panel inside wiring
131. Zz 14 7 1 I O check function 2 The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other 5 If I O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardwares are normal To execute I O check the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designer2 Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the communication driver Z C gt gt GT Designer2 Versiong Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual S w 8 TRANSFERRING DATA FE En O2n 1 Communication drivers inapplicable to I O check When the following communication drivers are used the I O check cannot be executed 2z Connection type Communication driver 2 2 TaZ MELSECNET H Toe MELSECNET H Sa connection AOO MELSECNET 10 gt 2 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Connection Connection 8 p 2 gt 3 t CC Link IE troll te E i 5 a CC Link IE controller network Eui S MITSUBISHI network connection e E F a5 PLC CC Link connection So lt Intelligent device CC Link ID CC Link Ver 2 ID RER station Ethernet connection QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC CRnD 700 9 lt Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Ethernet YASKAWA amp Connection to YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Ethernet YOKOGAWA i Connection to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC EtherNet IP AB 365 Connection to SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7 200 SIEMENS S7 300 400 1 4 Microcomputer connection Computer Inv
132. a 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale E P p9 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Function to collect data only when displa Bar graph f E pay 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 7 sa 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale P i 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O Oo Oo value number Function to collect data only when displa Statistics graph E Ro 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to 3 ae 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O Oo enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale P pe 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 o o o value number Scatter graph uendien Function to collect data only when displa i y pay 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O Oo Oo trigger is met is added Historical Trend Function to display the data collected b oe i 3P 4 A 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 01 O O x Graph the logging function in trend graph format Second specification and external control Time Action P 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O oO are possible Standard monitor OS 02 02 Function to collect and accumulate device 2 18U Option OS O O x val
133. an MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES INDEX 18 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location rae Built in flash memory Requied for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT i C G1BOOT Installed at factory shipment BootOS can be installed from GT Designer2 or the CF card When installed BootOS S CF card that stores data from GT Designer2 or the CF card GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment r f with the OS boot drive status Standard monitor OS must be pre installed in the GOT when installing the BootOS again set to the A drive oe A G1BOOT Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT installation and Required for display and deletion of the OS file or project data touch operation of the user created A key control or display function of the screen screen and utility screen Bullt in fash memory CAG1SYS and guidance Not installed in GOT at factory Standard F emeni monitor ystem Screen data P ke CF card that stores data os System screen management information file Stall it from GT Designer2 or ith the OS boot drive the memory card TrueType numerical font i e set to the A drive At installation select Mincho 12 dot standard font
134. and settings of the GT1575 4 6 PC connection Cable cccccccccceeeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 2 20 Performance specifications 3 2 Periodic INSPECTION eeeeteeeeeeetteeeeeeettteeeeetens 19 2 Power supply specifications 3 14 Power supply wiring GOUGING P se eats geet EA Se ene 7 6 Printer unit Installing PrOC CUIC c ceeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeee 8 19 Printer Unit tyP aa a 8 19 Program data Control ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeesteeeeeetees 13 1 Project infomation sarriena 13 16 Display operation of project information 13 17 Function of OS information c ceeeeee 13 16 Operation of project information 06 13 19 Protective cover fOr Oil ccecceeeeesteeeeeeeeteteeeeeees 8 51 Applicable protective cover for Oil ee 8 51 Installation procedure 8 51 Protective SNECL ccceecccceceesseeeeeeeseneees 2 18 8 49 Applicable protective sheet eee 8 49 Installing PrOCCCUIE eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeentteeeeettee 8 50 Q Q extension Cable ccccceeseecsseceeseeesesseeeeees 2 8 Q long distance connection cable cce 2 8 Q QnA ladder monitor setting 11 26 QCPU Q mode bus connection cable 2 8 QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus Connection Cable c cccecceeeeeeeeeeeseesteneeeaeees 2 8 R RFID Controller ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 16 Rough pre operation procedure
135. attachment 0 0 00 eae 8 58 8 16 2 Installing procedure aa a a e a wade ak REE ede ATA 8 58 8 17 Multi Color Display Board 8 59 8 17 1 Applicable multi color display board 0 0 ae 8 59 8 17 2 Installing procedure accs smsan eae 8 60 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1to9 12 9 1 Utility Execution 9 1 9 2 Utility Function List 9 2 9 3 Utility Display 9 5 9 3 1 Display operation of main Menu 2 1 eee 9 7 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 0 0 eae 9 10 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 0 cece eee 9 11 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 to 10 16 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 000 60 10 1 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation s sssaaa eaea 10 1 10 1 3 Communication setting contents sssaaa aeaaea 10 2 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 0000 c cece 10 6 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 11 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions 00 00 cee 10 11 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation 0 0c eee eee 10 11 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 0c eee ee eee 10 13 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1to 11 46 11 1 Display Settings 11 2 11 1 1 Display setting functions 20 0 e E a tee tees 11 2 11 1 2 Display operation of display settin
136. available range O range 2 Set the device in the GOT monitor available range The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system 1 Check the PLC CPU to know if the path has been switched 2 Check the cable connection status the communication unit installation status and the PLC CPU status Path has changed or i 3 This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU 450 timeout occurred in O becomes heavier when accessing other stations In such redundant system a case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host 4 Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long COM instruction Extension of END processing Setting of the number of processing times for general data Data update batch processing Q redundant system n Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual 451 settings and current O Q redundant CPU system config do not match ae 1 Reset the power of the GOT 460 Communication unit error O 2 Replace the unit Channel CH No 1 to 4 to communicate with a controller is er not set Communication channel a 1 After setting the Communication Settings on the GT i 480 not set Set channel O number on Utility Designer2 download it to the GOT 2 Change the channel assignment in the Communication Setting on the utility 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error
137. been turned OFF 2 Sw Zg a Q Zz seg TaZ oa i Biwi e 258 Eug WE a x n O ee Sea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 1 13 11 5 Precautions 3 ee 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13 12 1 GOT data package acquisition function The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the memory card OS Boot OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS e Special data e Project data The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data For installation function of the GOT refer to the following lt 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 13 12 2 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition Main menu Program data control lt lt gt gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program data control Touch GOT data GOT dati package acquisition ata package acquisition Program Data contro GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data special data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive A Built in CF card 1 3 110 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13 12 1 GOT data package acquisition function
138. brightness and contrast O x O x Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer O O O Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed O O x Setting the touch detection mode Applicable to only GT1595 A 5 7 GOT Operation X setup Changing security levels O O O x Setting the utility call keys O O O Adjusting the touch panel Applicable to only GT1595 X O x x Setting the data storage location for the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and O z x O GT1550 Q Q QnA ladder monitor Transparent f or Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for mode the FA transparent function O x 2 settings Video RGB Setting the video display and RGB display Applicable to only Setting GT1585V S and GT1575V S O x Q Backup restoration Setting the storage locations for backups and backup settings O x O setting Continued to next page App 16 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Refe Item Functions overview GT15 SoftGOT GT11 rence 1000 Selecting a base clock O O Time setting amp display Displaying and setting the clock current time O O Displaying the battery status O Q OS Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property checking O x O x information OS data Project Downloading uploading deleting copying pr
139. cable Grounding for power system Grounding for power system Connection cable a Fs GOT Panel grounding als Eeke Panel grounding The FG cables of the control equipment such as PLC and O Connected O Not connected the power equipment such as servo amplifier are connected as shown by a Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Fig A Independent grounding can O Effective O Ineffective reduce the influence of noise If independent grounding is not allowed be sure to perform shared grounding as shown in Fig B 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 9 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma p 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 6 Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed Connection Ground cable led from the A single ground cable is led from Current panel having the control the panel having the control O Led equipmen status equipment such as PLC to the O Not led panel having the GOT Connection cable Fig A i Ground cable Connecting the ground cable to Use a short and Ground te the panel having the GOT as ie as he panel shown in Fig A to red
140. channels or the driver set with the Communication Setting of GT Designer2 is displayed For details of drivers to be displayed refer to the following manual Gz C gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting ee Communication Settings lt a T Display None in the driver display BOX in case of the followings e The communication driver is not installed gt 37 13 2 OS Information e In channel number specification menu BOX 0 is set The communication unit type and the communication driver are mutually not corresponding at Z the extend interface side amp When set the channel number to 9 the communication driver Host PC is automatically i s gt assigned yi O x O W ani O S D O 0 Zz fej 5G ZS Za Ho oa Zz fe 20 BOS z m E SEH 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 3 10 1 3 Communication setting contents Point gt Precautions for communications between GOT and controller 1 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The followings below are required for the communication interface to communicate with the controller 1 Installing communication drivers Up to 4 communication drivers 2 Assigning the channel number and communication driver for the communication interface 3 Downloading the contents project data assigned in 2 Perform1 2 3 by GT designer2 Extend I F Settings Extend F 1 CHNo Driver Le 1 gt Bus 4 Qn4
141. display settings Q Select a video channel No to be displayed The video image for the selected channel No is previewed To change the captive area or image quality touch the display section of each item Captive Area Refer to to O Image Quality Refer to to The captive area horizontal direction vertical direction for the selected channel No can be changed Left isht s al Horizont 14000 Eja g g Up Down Vertical 000 pja i 2 h h h h ome Z N Moves the Moves the Moves the captive areaa captive area captive area certain to the a certain distance in the touched distance in direction position the direction Touching Default returns to the default status 4 When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined 5 If you touch the button without r ys touching the Confirm button the dialog box Do you want to proceed on the left is displayed O After completing all the items to set if you touch the X button the display returns to the preview screen 1 1 36 11 10 Video Display Settings 11 10 3 Operating the video display settings D The image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No can be changed UTILITY FUNCTION B Channel Image Quality k __ Color Tone 000 Ej sds i Contrast 000 Bj F h h h h Br ightnss 000 Ej
142. distortion rate 10 9 External power supply fluctuation immunity Test for checking if the unit becomes faulty with a transient voltage of the internal and external input sides of the power supply unit or unit power supply AC power type 47Hz 85V 63Hz 264V DC power type 19 2V 30V The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value The above test items are conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP 40dBUV m 10m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 47dBUV m 10m in measurement range 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 1 EMC directive OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol w w gt OE TO Bw all o gt oO INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 1 2 Control panel The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 2 Control panel a The control panel must be conductive b When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts do not coat the plat
143. drive c Se Dae Tie Install a CF card in the GOT PS bullt in ce card ee 134K i i i Refer to the following for inserting y C Flash Henory removing method of CF card a at C 8 4 Video RGB Unit 2 a ep Touch A Standard CF Card in Select 5 0 drive u ETAD ERE Te BS Property Data check o aa Delete Download z gt z3 to Ho L a Continued to next page Zz O wg 2e Zu Ze HQ zw le SEY 13 3 Project Information 1 3 23 13 3 4 Operation of project information 13 24 Project data download now Same named project data has already downloaded Current Target Built Version 215R 215R Built Date 06 03 01 07 28 05 Built Time 11 48 19 14 50 50 Author f Downloading continue Setup is completed Restart now 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information If touch the Download button the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes downloading If any project data with the same name exists in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting downloading In this case the project data of the C drive is overwritten with the project data of the A drive when downloaded Touching the Cancel button cancels the downloading 5 When the downloading is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT 2 Setup op
144. driver i Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 43V y O x x oO connection HITACHI S10mini S10V 03 01 FUJI FA PLC s i tion to FUJI FA PLC 243V Communication driver upporting connection to connection re FUJI MICREX F 03 01 O x x f Communication driver Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLC 2 09K MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP O x x oO 01 02 Communication driver Supporting connection to FP 2 2 18U MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP O x x O 02 02 MATSUSHITA Supporting connection to FP X O x x O PLC connection The device range applicable to monitoring Communication driver is extended 2 58L MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP Up to 991F for R and up to 911 for WR 03 03 O x x O can be set Communication driver Supporting settings for the timeout time j 2 73B MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP O x x O and the delay time 03 09 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 27 ADDITION TIMES INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM RESET FOR MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Version of GT11 ae F GT GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS 15 GoTtoco Designer2 Bus Serial Communication driver Supporting connection to MP2000 and MP3000 2 47Z YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H O x x O CP9300MS 03 02 C
145. e i O Al Major error in Conveyand ou 0 re quipment B failire eno E E Zz O au Be a 1 Q2u TORO 11 10 11 40 12 10 12 40 13 10 13 40 14 10 ju ej e Displays the generated time confirmed time m and restored O time of each alarm e Displays the time scales by 30 minutes interval in the bottom of the graph Ms The alarms generated in the order of registering alarm are displayed 25 2 gt E e By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Hgg 7 5 Q Designer2 are displayed with up to 12 characters of full size character up to 24 half size almir characters The 13th of full size character and after the 25th and after for half size character are not displayed 8 The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen Fas wea N One 2 Tally graph display aze Program data control Alarm information Total graph x ine A sE A failure ES 3 ine A stop laterial shortage in Ta A ee eae AND BATTERY x O W ani 7 2 5 10 15 20 2 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 Bi m ja m ay He e Displays the generated frequency of each alarm by the sideways bar chart 3 e By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Designer2 are displayed with up to 12 characters of full size character up to 24 half size Zz characters e wh The 13th of full size character and after the 25t
146. eee 13 45 13 7 2 Operation of advanced recipe information display s sasaaa eaaa 13 46 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display 0 0 c eee eee 13 47 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 0 0 assa cee tees 13 49 132725 Precautions esa esate a enced wate encent E a ANEA ERE A EEEE E aomte a at and 13 66 13 8 Logging Information 13 68 13 8 1 Function of logging information 0 000 eae 13 68 13 8 2 Display operation of logging information 0 0 0 ee 13 69 13 8 3 Example of logging information display 0 0 00 cece eee 13 70 13 8 4 Logging information operation 1 0 sssaaa aaea aeaa 13 71 13 28 95 Precautions eea aaa a s a e ea a a a a taal O a seas 13 80 13 9 Memory Information 13 82 13 9 1 Memory information functions lt iosa seinni tenuti dasane a a a aT 13 82 13 9 2 Memory information display operation 1 0 2 0 00 eae 13 82 13 9 3 Memory information display example 0 00 c eee eae 13 83 13 10 Special Data Information 13 84 13 10 1 Special data information function 0 000 e eee 13 84 13 10 2 Special data information display operation eaaa cee eee 13 85 13 10 3 Special data information display example a anana aaea 13 86 13 10 4 Special data information operation sssaaa aeaaaee 13 87 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 93 13 11 1 Function of
147. error H M error seconds parameter setting error When the dialog shown right appears check the following Restart e Check if the pins of the connector for self loopback check are incorrectly shorted e Check if the channel number for the RS 232 interface is set to 0 None in the communication setting of the GOT utility C gt 10 2 Communication Detail Settings e Check if the hardware has no problems C gt 20 TROUBLESHOOTING During check the dialog shown right is displayed RS232 communication check Executing now P 14 7 I O Check 1 4 i 14 7 3 VO Check Operation 4 When the all checks ended normally the dialog shown right is displayed And the GOT restarts in five seconds RS232 aa al ion check oO error Restart UTILITY FUNCTION When an error occurs the dialog that shows the GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the error appears RS232 e a ion check and then the GOT restarts in five seconds Verify 4 BYTE When the dialog shown right appears check the following Restart e Check if the hardware has no problems lt gt 20 TROUBLESHOOTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY a Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 7 I O Check 1 4 2 14 7 3 I O Check Operation g 14 8 NET
148. file 1 3 86 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 3 Special data information display example 13 10 4 Special data information operation Zz fe o Z Special data information display operation T z control Special data information If touch a drive in Select drive the special data elect drive G r m A Built in OF card DIRI PROECTT in the drive is displayed a G1 FXIGISPC 6 DIR CIRDAT Refer to the following for operation of delete Sw 520 property data check and download ee Delete l 820 e Property a e Data check S058KB File Property Data check e Download dp Delete punted O N z IE 2 ace Touching the A lt button closes the screen aban aov 8 Fab 2e O98 DEAT ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 87 13 10 4 Special data information operation 13 88 Delete operation Deletes the selected file Program Data control Special data information Size Date Time elect drive i Kind Name A Built in CF card 03 08 04 04 57 G1 FxIGISPC 154K 02 27 04 06 29 ICIRDAT 02 27 04 21 09 15058KB lFile Property Data check Delete Download Delete special data G1SPC Do you want to delete Delete is completed 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 4 Spe
149. fixing screw IP67 The following shows how to install the CF card cover fixing screw D Open the CF card cover and remove the dustproof rubber in the direction of the arrow 2 Insert the CF card cover fixing screw into the hole of the CF card cover and install the washer in the direction of the arrows Close the CF card cover and tighten the CF card cover fixing screw with a tightening torque of 0 11 to 0 48N m Point P Precautions when the CF card cover is opened The environmental protective structure of the CF card extension unit is IP2X when the CF card cover is opened 8 34 8 7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8 7 4 Protective structure for CF card extension unit 8 8 CF Card The CF card is used to transfer the OS or project data and to save data of the alarm history function or other functions Refer to the following for details gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 8 8 1 Applicable CF card The following CF cards are applicable for GT1500 Mode Description GT05 MEM 16MC Flash ROM 16MB GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Commercially available CF card 1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available
150. flash memory re L i a The GOT monitors C drive data 5 This item explains using the A drive 5 Point gt Special data to be stored in a CF card z fe When storing the project data from GT Designer2 to CF card select C Built in flash z memory for Project Data in Boot Drive Z29 She Pewee 9z Communicate with Memory Card Of n Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Untitled Project GOT Type GT15 V 640x480 x C Common settings C Communication Settings Boot Drive Standard via Project Data a i a 22 Option 0S gt F O Inteligent unit monitor data ase g CA motion monitor data a E Servo amplifier monitor data Oo ty d aon 2 3 Install a CF card on the GOT ae Refer to the following for inserting D G G Flash Henory removing method of CF card 8 g O lt c 8 8 CF Card 3 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select ae ea N AND BATTERY drive Ti a Property Data check Download x g W ani O Continued to next page a ep O 0 Zz O 58 Ze z3 to 4D oa Zz fe wk Qo ae lS mo zw le lt x SEG 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 91 13 10 4 Special data information operation 13 92 Special data download now The special data has already downloade Current Target Built Version 215R 215R Built Date f Built Time f Author i Downloading continue Cancel Download is completed Restart
151. font is added Option OS 2 58L O x x Stroke Font JPN Stroke Font JPN 03 03 Standard monitor OS 02 02 KANJI Region Supporting Chinese Traditional 2 18U apne l u I ttl i ere Standard Font China Big5 O O x 02 02 System alarm information printer status information and GT SoftGOT1000 end 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O Oo GOT internal device are added device f Standard monitor OS 03 02 The devices for the trigger buffer of the 2 47Z Option OS O x x MES interface are added MES Interface 03 02 Supporting vertical installation type GOT Type displa 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x x O isplay Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 33 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES INDEX ee Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Screen switching ON and OFF can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O Oo Oo function Station No Designation of the channel No for which 2 Ee i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x Switching Function station No is switched is possible Language 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x eal F L
152. function cannot be used for the initial installation of BootOS standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods 1 GT Designer2 2 Installing when starting the GOT Operation procedure D Power OFF the GOT After CF card access LED is off install the CF card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT 1 8 6 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Display the program data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS from the CF card to GOT ADDITION TIMES Ped RESET FOR fee MAINTENANCE as Z lt A oe lt Og 52 of an Touch Install Q 4 CF card access LED is lit during install execution a Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access card is lit om go ZE E Install now W oO Bs gt EZ W lt lt O GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed Reboot APPENDICES O After confirming that GOT restarted normaly switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT Confirm the CF card access LED is not lit remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT INDEX 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 1 8 7 18 3 2 Install
153. gt fae Ootn ja zZ lt x z a 7p m Ww WL x O W ani O S W ep O 0 Zz fej 58 Ze z3 Bio oa Zz O wg 2e E EE zZ EB le Seo 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 55 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 56 J Rename operation File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed elect Drive PROJECT I L0G00001 indName Ix Size Date Time DIR GIL LOGO0001 GIL LOGO0001_ 0000 GIL eee 001 CSV LOG00001_0001 GIL LOGO0001_0002 CSV LOGO0001_0002 LLI2KB 4 mi OF il GIL gt CSV Copy GIL TXT Del Create Folder Path Name A PROJECT1I RECIPE1 File Name LINE A_REC IPH Before ARPO0001 G1P After LINE A_RECIPE G1P Change fi lename on Process completed 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation D Select the file to be renamed by touching If touch the Rename button displays the screen shown left then input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left 4 If touch the OK renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen button starts When renaming is completed com
154. has completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen l Fara Remark Estimation of processing time T F The process may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file tobe 299 operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder file lz 2 3 ETA Reference value m 5 Direct connection to QCPU and CPU device point 32767 points setting 5 transmission speed 115200bps a e When the block setting number to1 about 17 seconds 3 e When the block setting number to 2048 about 4 minutes 3 For executing the saving loading of device value with advanced recipe file which has been moved or whose name has been changed Adjust Recipe File setting of advanced recipe setting with GT Designer2 to file which has been moved or whose name has been changed After the setting has been changed download the advanced recipe setting to GOT ee eae AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 67 13 7 5 Precautions 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 1 Function of logging information Logging files created with the logging function can be copied deleted or renamed etc Without using a personal computer you can manage logging files on the GOT For details of the logging function
155. insert the angle adjustment fitting s fixing hook into the hook insertion section on the bottom of the stand ae Securely tighten the fixing screw ae Insert the GOT from the front of Stand and install it to Stand Refer to the GT15 User s Manual for details on installing the GOT After the installation perform wiring etc 8 15 Stand 8 15 2 Installing procedure 8 57 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 16 Attachment The attachment is used to replace A960GOT AC97OGOT to GT1560 8 4 If use attachment when replace A960GOT or AC97OGOT to GT1560 there is no need of additional processing as mounting hole of the inside control panel etc which is used for A960GOT A97OGOT 8 16 1 Applicable attachment The following attachments are applicable for GT1560 Description GT15 60ATT 96 A960GOT gt GT1560 Attachment for 8 4 GT15 70ATT 97 A97OGOT gt GT1560 8 16 2 Installing procedure Q Hang the two upper hooks on the upper part over the mounting holes in x the control panel While lifting the attachment upward hang the two lower hooks on the lower part of the control panel Fix the attachment to the control panel with four clamp screws in the torque range of 0 82 to 1 10N m 4 Place the GOT into the attachment from the front and fix it by t
156. language and the installed fonts are not matched The following screen will be displayed Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one 9 3 Utility Display 9 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu Zz O The following three types of operation can display the main menu B Display the main menu after installing the basic OS from GT Designer2 to the GOT built in flash memory c E 1 When project data is undownloaded If the power supply of GOT turns ON the main menu is displayed automatically after title display gt Main menu Zz fo au sre GOT power supply ON Sur OZO 2 When touching menu call key a If you touch the menu call key while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed ZFS The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or GT Designer2 aE The menu call key is set in the position as described below at factory shipment mee Model name Default setting at factory shipment GT1595 1 point press on the GOT screen upper left corner 6 Zz Simultaneous 2 point presses on the GOT screen upper E z GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 ji DES right and left corners g zd B ome Menu call key 1 point touch on the upper left corner T Z z 5 Az E TO Main menu G O W Ac 35 Ww a a ep EG Menu call key G Simultaneous 2 point touch Zz 5G ZS Zz Wo oa Zz a wg 2g Zu Zu z SEH 9 3
157. later GT1575 STBD 2 17T or later GT1575 VTBA 2 04E or later GT1575 VTBD 2 17T or later 2 17T or later 4 2 3 4 5 6 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards GT1575 GT1575 STBA Function version GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment For using multiple extension units a bar code reader or a RFID controller the total current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller must be with
158. normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 8 48 8 11 Battery 8 11 4 Battery life 8 12 Protective Sheet The protection sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated 8 12 1 Applicable protective sheet The following protective sheets are applicable for GT1500 When giving priority to brightness select the clear protective sheet when giving priority to preventing glare select the anti glare protective sheet Product name Protective sheet 4 Model GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW 15 protective sheet Description Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW Protection sheet for 12 1 Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW Protection sheet for 10 4 Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW Protection sheet for 8 4 Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5
159. of 25 C Type Matrix resistive film Number of touch keys 1 900 objects screen 38 lines x 50 columns Touch Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots 16 x 8 dots for the last line only per key panel Number of objects that can be simultaneously Maximum of 2 objects touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length 1 39 37 m inch Human Detection range Left Right Top Bottom 70 degrees Sensor Detection delay time 0 to 4s Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air 4 C or higher C drive Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for storing project data and OS Meron erent F 100 000 times Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S Specifications Item GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 15 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 232 6 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B OVERVIEW ae USB Built in Application For connecting a personal computer Project data upload download interface OS in
160. operation log information 0 0 0 aeaaea 13 93 13 11 2 Display operation of operation log information 0 00 eee ee 13 94 13 11 38 Example of operation log information display 0 c cee eee 13 95 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 000 cee 13 96 TSTS Precautions s s5 43 8a fi aT eds Pee cide E AA E Genii pis aa 13 108 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13 110 13 12 1 GOT data package acquisition function 2 00 c cee 13 110 13 12 2 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition 200 eee eee 13 110 13 12 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition 0 20 cases 13 111 13 12 4 GOT data package acquisition operation 000 cece eee 13 112 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK 14 1 to 14 53 14 1 Debug 14 1 14 1 1 The Debug function 0 00 0 14 1 14 1 2 Display operation of Debug 0 2 tees 14 2 14 2 Self check 14 3 14 2 1 Self check function 0 00 ccna 14 3 14 3 Memory Check 14 4 14 3 1 Memory check function 0 0 e ee ee ee 14 4 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check 0 00 ce eee 14 4 14 4 Drawing Check 14 7 14 4 1 Drawing check function 00000 eee 14 7 14 4 2 Display operation of drawing check 1 1 2 0 0c cee 14 7 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 0 06 eee 14 8 14 5 Font Check 14 12 14 5 1 Font check function 0 0 2c sasia reper ren er Eeke
161. or later Sep 2006 Version B or later Mar 2005 The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when it is used with the following unit Product name Model name MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z CC Link communication unit 5 12 G15 75J61BT13 Z 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used 5 3 4 When the option unit is used The following shows EMC Directive compliance of option units Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive Hardware version Product name Model name EMC Directive Production year and month Printer unit GT15 PRN O Version B or later Feb 2006 Video input unit GT15V 75V4R1 O Version D or later Feb 2007 RGB input unit GT15V 75V4 O Version D or later Feb 2007 Video RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 O Version D or later Feb 2007 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT O Version C or later Feb 2007 CF card unit GT15 CFCD O Version C or later Jul 2007 CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET O Version B or later Jul 2007 External I O unit GT15 DIO O Version B or later May 2007 Sound output unit GT15 SOUT O Version B or later May 2007 Re printer as requested by the printer manufacturer 5 3 5 When the option is used For the printer to be connected configure the system in accordance with the EMC Directive specifications for the The following
162. password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the Operator information management screen in displayed For operating operation switches refer to the following Addii gt this section 1 o lt gt this section 2 Delete lt gt this section 3 Return I this section 4 IMpoOrt e lt gt this section 5 Export lt gt this section 6 4 After all settings are completed touch the Save button and then the settings are saved If you close the screen before Touch the X button without touching the tea wilt rege Ach the changed Save button and then the dialog box Do you want to proceed shown left is displayed UTILITY FUNCTION 0K Cancel COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY a Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 40 14 11 1 Operator management 14 41 1 Add operation Add operator information to the GOT Brive W Operatortane OR
163. pes If touch the Rename button displays the FE Path Name wf A PROJECT 1 LOGO0001 screen shown left then input the file 2 n m Fi le Name name to be renamed LINE A_LO By touching the following button input text type is changed a z Zz i A z English capital Fas QJWJEJRITIYJUJIJOJP AZ English cap TE AISIDIFIGIHIJIKIL 0 9 Numeric Symbol xol 808 LIXICIVIBINJM Enter gz If touch the Enter button displays the Before L0G00001_0001 G1L After LINE A_LOG GIL dialog shown left Change fi lename D If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen ae ea ee AND BATTERY Cancel x O W ani O i a Pr cass conp leted When renaming is completed D completion dialog is displayed 3 If touch the OK button closes the dialog Zz fej 58 Ze 25 to 4D oa Zz O wg 20 gr ZS oO woz zw Ed SEG 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 103 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Folder create operation An operation log folder is created elect Drive PROJECT 1 LOG00001 indName Size Date Time Ar DIR t G1L LOG00001 1K 01 04 01 09 59 i G1L LOG00001_0000 1K 01 04 01 09 59 GIL LOG00001_0001 1K 01 04 01 09 59 CSV LOGO0001_0001 1K 01 03 01 00 10 GIL L 002 1K_01 00 10 csv Kaiia a 16KB7499672KB SiL gt csv Copy Move E GI
164. screen data 535 Cannot open image file Confirm whether any file exists in the memory card x 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No code storage 1 Confirm whether the image file in the memory card is Image file error or invalid 536 normal x file format i n 2 Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored Error occurred while executing the auto repeat function of the touch switch object Confirm the followings Auto repeat error Confirm i 540 1 Confirm that the other system error has not occurred x system information i during auto repeat 2 Confirm that any error information is not stored in the system information GS during auto repeat The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non target key code set in the key code storage device 550 Invalid key code f x Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs f Switched language specifying KANJI other than Japanese Language switch failure 560 without the option OS installed x Install optional functions Install the option OS Switched language specifying a KANJI region other than Language switch failure i f Japanese without the option function board with add on 561 Load expansion memory i x nee memory installed i Install the option function board with add on memor
165. shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
166. sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW 5 7 protective sheet Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Because the frame section is white use this when making the GOT front face other than the display section white 8 12 Protective Sheet 8 49 8 12 1 Applicable protective sheet OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 12 2 Installing procedure Q Remove the old protective sheet from the GOT and clean the GOT surface Peel the release paper from the back of the new protective sheet and attach its adhesive side to the GOT display section When attaching the protective sheet make sure to fit it on the display section closely without leaving any clearance between them Peel the protective film off the protective sheet Remark Replacement time of protective sheet Roo Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly 8 50 8 12 Protective Sheet 8 12 2 Installing procedure 8 13 Protective cover for oil Use of the protective cover for oil imp
167. shows EMC Directive compliance of option Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive Product name Option function board Model name GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB Option function board with add on memory GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M EMC Directive Hardware version Production year and month Version A or later Mar 2005 GT15 MESB48M 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration Version C or later Jun 2006 5 13 5 3 4 When the option unit is used OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol wi O W 7 Q VOLTAGE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 6 Cables 1 Cables used a For the MELSECNET H connection coaxial cable MELSECNET 10 connection coaxial cable and video connection use double shield coaxial cables The 5C 2V connector plug is applicable to double shielded coaxial cable Connect the 5C 2V connector plug to the coaxial cable inside a double shielded coaxial cable Ground the shielded part outside a double shielded coaxial cable as shown in the following figure Double shielded coaxial cable Mitsubishi Cable 5C 2V CCY a lt Grounding Enlarged view Sheath of cable rerererererere mage PISIS S222 04 lt gt lt gt oe Se 0 0 OOo Internal A conducter Insulation External External material conductor con
168. special register GS262 to 264 For details of the system information and GOT special register refer to the following manual c gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 20 3 1 Error Contents Display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT i Popup displaying the error code and error message Advanced alarm popup display System alarm If an error occurs the error code and error message can be popup displayed on the front of the monitor screen As alarms are popup displayed regardless of the screen type the error occurred will not be overlooked A1254 By 348 mM AD 04 6 1 13 20 Power mod Pop up generated alarms regardless of the screen Displaying error code and error message in a list Advanced system alarm display If error has occurred error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen Multiple errors can be displayed or the history of display can be recorded Occurred Message Restore Check y 04 6 1 10 25 Temp error paei 8 05 Fuse error 11 25 10 45 Create a screen to display alarms and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 1 Error Contents Display 20 17 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INST
169. the message fae ate ma i f N pete gee Please select a destination is displayed C Flash Memory in the left bottom of the screen If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists ul o RE O2250KE ae Select other folders a destination ina Exec Cancel Copy file name 6 If touch Next button the dialog aan mentioned left is displayed Copy destination A PROJECT2 Copy now 0 k Cance 1 3 20 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Delete special data Touch OK button the property is displayed as shown left In property display the following information is displayed G1SPC If there is no file of the same name in the 6 COE eels t copy destination folder starts to copy Z When there is a file of the same name in Pa e the copy destination folder the dialog z mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is z overwritten to the project data in the copy E destination folder 29 If touch OK button starts to copy zr Z If touch Cancel button cancels to copy am Copy is completed 8 When copying completes the dialog of completion i
170. the rubber holder that fixes if the backlight with a minus driver to unfasten it 8 Expanded figure of part Ain a lt x x lt a z 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 7 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight Pull the upper backlight out through the hole for backlight replacement on the upper part of the GOT In the same way pull the lower backlight out through the hole for backlight replacement on the lower part of the GOT Hole for backlight replacement Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight through the hole for backlight replacement of the GOT main unit take care not to damage the sheath of the cable And push the backlight in securely until the projection part of the rubber holder is fixed Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT For GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN Backlight replacement varies with the hardware version of the applicable GOT Before replacement please confirm the hardware version lt gt Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards Type Hardware version Reference GT1585V STBA March 2006 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1585V STBD 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1585 STBA Ma
171. the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face Install the communication unit on the extension interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit 8 6 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 42 After the installation to 0 57N m MAIAYSAO NOILVYNDISANOO WALSAS Paste the provided stickers after tightening the mounting screws in order to avoid receiving electrostatic SNOILVOISIOSdS Serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit SONILLAS ANY AWVN Lavd Unit installation The following explanation uses the Ethernet communication units as an example The serial communication unit can be installed with the same procedure 1 Power OFF the GOT MOI ANY OWS Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT Fit the communication unit in the GOT case N 0 0 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure Fasten the communication unit by tightening its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m When installing an extension unit on the outer layer refer to the following C7 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer c
172. to LPT9 e AUX CON e NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used e The folder name which begins with G1 e Folder name and file name which begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods 2 For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the logging information screen the files other than logging files are not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer etc 1 3 80 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 5 Precautions Precautions for operation 1 Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the logging is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other f
173. to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively For three or more ground cables connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 13 7 6 1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE es INSTALLATION OPTION 7 44 1 When using GT15 COEXSS 1 2SQ cables to FG terminals O N 28cm or less y Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable Use the GT15 C BS s FG cable of 28cm or less Do not connect the GT15 EXCNB s FG ground cable Connect the GT15 C BS s FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power s terminal block Connect the GT15 C BS s FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC s power supply module Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable 2 When using GT15 CO1BS For the both side GOTs connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 6 1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable 7 6 2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable The following explains wiring the FG cable when t
174. transferred between GOT and memory card r 2 The format of the memory card is also possible E x ow CI 2 oO 13 1 Data Storage Location FE SE Sgr 13 1 1 Drive name allocation For the GOT built in flash memory or standard CF card the following drive names A drive B drive C drive 9 are allocated ZS gt O TaZ z Joe Drive name Allocation D Hi z A drive Standard CF card See B drive Extended memory card C drive Built in flash memory oO 9 z 2 gt 3 Foro pug DES lt o 5 PAE 325 13 m zZ lt z a D Q i L x oO W a a oO a o oO Zz O 58 Za Ho oa Zz w 2g Zu Zw E SEH 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 1 13 1 1 Drive name allocation 13 1 2 Datatype and the storage location System The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below HEGOT main unit O S Is fo n Project data Install Download C drive Built in flash memory E PC Install gata GT Designer2 Download Project data Project data A drive B drive Q Copy files on Windows Write Standard CF card pia when installed in GOT CF card unit ata Project CF card extension unit data 0S Inserting R emoving 9 Standard CF card when installed in PC 1 3 2 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 2 Data type and the storage location At maintenance Z exes o E
175. units in layers 4 When installing another extension unit on the unit that has been installed implement the above operations of to When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid receiving electrostatic stick accessory stickers to cover the top of mounting screws Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the sticker stuck as it is Accessory stickers connector N Cor Sticker Point f 1 Installation position for a communication unit that occupies two extend I Fs Install a communication unit that occupies two extend I Fs such as the following directly to the GOT main unit It cannot be installed on the back stage of another communication unit If a video RGB unit has been installed install the communication unit on the back stage of that video RGB unit e Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUS2L only lt s 8 1 2 E Bus connection unit e MELSECNET 10 communication unit L77 8 1 2 B MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link communication unit e CC Link communication unit 37 8 1 2 g MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link communication unit e MELSECNET H communication unit p 8 1 2 EA MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 e CC Link IE controller network communication unit lt 3 8 1 2 EA MELSECNET H communication unit
176. v Detail Setting and fo fous A 0n 0 CPU QJ71C24 MELDAS CE a o x arac etail Se 0QJ71E7124J71 Q E71 IPA PA JA TAMOT I eke Refer to the following for details C gt e GT Designer2Version Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings e GT Designer2Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 3 1 Downloading project data PC to GOT 2 When Communication Setting has not been downloaded The GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver in the order of 1 to 4 as follows Only the extend interface is assigned automatically Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channel Driver assign ChNo RS232 5Y supply ChNo USB 9 Host PC L 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend I Extend F 2 N oN one 0 None nhie None ChNo None 0 None Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection 1 ChNo 1 CCommunication driver installed at 1st 2 ChNo 2 CCommunication driver installed at 2nd 3 ChNo 3 CCommunication driver installed at 3rd 4 ChNo 4 CCommunication driver installed at 4th a After communication driver is assigned automatically When saving the settings to the GOT with OK button after the automatic assignment of communication driver automatic assignment will not be performed at the ne
177. wg Ee E G9 peal oe ZwE zzu ZEO 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 52 14 11 3 Function setting E 1 2 3 4 5 6 718 910 PARgARREASAT Jy Ltt Ye Bater The function setting editing process is completed If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 1 4 53 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 3 Function setting b Touch Password expiration date and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is displayed Input the expiration 4 Touch the date When the input is completed touch the Enter key OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input setting is saved Q Touch the gt lt button without touching the shown left is displayed OK button and then the dialog box 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN UTILITY FUNCTION In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes Refer to the below for the cleaning procedure K gt 19 3 Cleaning Method 15 1 Clean COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 15 1 1 Display operation of Clean Main menu _ 9 3 Utility Display DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY Even if touch points other than the upper lef
178. when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a hardware om failure g2 Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative Eg 2 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS Ww 0 KEREN Bs Before installing the CoreOS go icp 1 Installing procedureThe CoreOS can be installed only when using a memory card Gog Installation via USB RS 232 Ethernet is not available j a 2 Memory card to be used Memory card of 32MB or more is required 3 Boot OS if When installing the CoreOS the latest BootOS is also installed automatically S Operation by the user is not required g lt zs a z 18 5 CoreOS 1 8 11 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS Installing the CoreOS Write the CoreOS from GT Designer2 to the CF card For details of GT Designer2 operation refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Communicate with Memory Card Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Points of caution Install CoreOS to a Memory card lt How to Install gt 1 Tum OFF GOT and insert CoreOS installed Memory card into the GOT 2 Tum ON GOT 3 it will take a few minutes to start Core0S installation Do not tum OFF or reset GOT during CoreQS installation to avoid failing jin restarting After aren of installation restart GOT after tuming OFF and removing Memory card Reinstall a istic the followings after GOT is restarted 1 Basic
179. 0 2 8 16 1 8 16 2 13 7 2 13 8 2 14 7 1 14 7 3 19 6 2 Appendix 3 Partial additions Section 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 3 1 9 2 10 1 3 Chapter 11 11 12 1 11 12 2 11 12 3 13 2 1 13 3 1 13 10 2 Chapter 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 1 Additions Section 11 13 Print Date Manual Number Feb 2007 SH NA 080528ENG M The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Partial corrections Section 1 2 Partial additions Section 20 3 2 Appendix 1 3 Revision Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 77F SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 2 3 2 5 3 6 3 8 1 9 2 Chapter 14 Japanese Manual Version SH 080507 Q This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION A 11 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS i nenien 4 eri dd a a aa aa he hte Ohl a a beets geal S A 1 REVISIONS diee aa en eh eg ead A Ae a he aa A 8 INTRODUCTION ecaht hc ete eat Pe coe te e
180. 00R40201 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P Cable length 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40202 14P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40202 14P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable RS 422 cable Model name GT09 C30R20301 9P Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable GT09 C30R20302 9P GT09 C30R20304 9S GT09 C30R40301 6T Cable length 3m Cable length 3m Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40301 6T Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40302 6T GT09 C100R40302 6T Cable length 3m Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40302 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA converter ML2 O For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R40303 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40303 6T GT09 C300R40303 6T Cable length 20m Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller GREEN series GT09 C30R40304 6T Cable length 3m GT09
181. 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and
182. 1 Oat 100 MSCS ODT 18 18 outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists a z Z Select other folders F T HEG lt S 2 Ose oes 7 Oa BPOKB TSSS2KE File 1 3 Please select destination Execute Cancel Zz lt z m e D Q wW Wwe message appears on the screen 5 W ani oO S W ep 5 0 Target file ARPOO001 G1P If there is a file of the same name in the Do you want to Overwrite the file copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy og E n If touch the OK button overwrites the Zz file 35 If touch Cancel button cancels to copy Ss Zz fe wg SRS Zu Continued to next page 5o Haz ou SEY 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 53 Process completed Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved x elect Drive 2 PROJECT 1 LOG00001 indName Size Date Time DIR E GIL 1 1K 01 04 01 i GIL 1 1K_01 04 01 GIL 0001 1K_01 04 01 CSV 1_000 1K 01 03 01 GIL LOG0000 1_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 10 CSV LOG0000 1_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 M ha 104KB 74906 72KB Eid BILSCY Copy Nove Jde BIL gt TXT Del Renane rmat i at ALO ion 600001 Name Size Date Time EY 600001 1K 01 0
183. 13 87 5 3 44 45 5 1 79 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 45 1 77 35 1 38 36 5 1 44 15 0 59 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 5 0 2 23 0 91 28 1 1 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 4 4 4 42 1 65 47 1 85 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 80 3 15 38 1 5 _ J 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 52 2 05 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 45 1 77 7 0 28 23 0 91 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD 22 0 87 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 120 4 72 45 1 77 75 2 95 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 81 3 19 36 1 42 43 1 69 45 1 77 23 0 91 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 0 0 30 1 18 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 9 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX e GT155 0 R Model name A B C D P bending radius of the cable Aa 95 3 74 79 3 11 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 i i ent 23 0 91 Aa 73 5 2 89 57 5 2 26 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 oe nae anaa 95 3 74 79 3 11 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 344 ott en 10 0 39 pani 73 5 2 89 57 5 2 26 36 1 42 GT15 75ABUS2L 2 88 16 0 63 97 91 26 wee ee 72 5 2 85 56 5 2 22 GT15 RS4 9S 2 _ Big 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 17 5 0 69 23 0 91 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 22 0 87 a 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 3 3 a GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 71 5 2 81 30 1 18 GT15 J71GP23 SX 80 3 15 16 2 0 64 63 8 2 51 36 5 1 44 15 0 59 GT
184. 15 J61BT13 47 1 85 31 1 22 28 1 1 16 0 63 _ _ 23 0 91 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 36 1 42 18 0 71 GT15 CFCD 22 0 87 GT15 CFEX C08SET 120 4 72 16 0 63 104 4 09 55 2 17 GT15 DIO 81 3 19 65 2 56 43 1 69 16 0 63 23 0 91 GT15 SOUT 44 1 73 28 1 10 30 1 18 1 The depth dimension is as follows when units allowing multiple stages are installed When CF card is installed the dimensions are reduced by 1mm Unit mm inch App 10 Units other than CC Link IE controller CC Link IE controller network GOT model name network communication unit communication unit 2 stage 3 stage 2 stage 3 stage GT1595 42 5 1 67 64 5 2 54 56 2 20 78 3 07 GT1585 39 5 1 56 61 5 2 42 53 2 09 75 2 95 GT157 O 42 5 1 67 64 5 2 54 56 2 20 78 3 07 GT156 O 44 5 1 75 66 5 2 62 58 2 28 80 3 15 GT155 O 44 5 1 75 66 5 2 62 58 2 28 80 3 15 2 For cables prepaired by the user the dimensions are different Unit mm inch 3 This dimension is applied when the external dimension of cable connector is 21 5mm Refer to the following fig ure The dimension varies depending on the connector used GT15 71E 71 100 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Cable connector 4 5 6 7 For cable details of GT15 75J71LP23 Z Optical loop unit consult the local office of Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd GT1585V S GT1575V S If cable bending rad
185. 16 dots per key Touch last line only per key panel Number of objects that can be f Maximum of 2 objects simultaneously touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98 max Continued to next page 3 7 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN Specifications GT1575 VNBA Item GT1575V STBA GT1575 STBA GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VNBD z GT1575V STBD GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBD GT1572 VNBA o GT1572 VNBD m Detection length None Detection range None Human z Detection delay time None O sensor z Detection None 20 temperature ka m N Built in flash as Built in flash memory 9Mbytes memory 5Mbytes 3 C drive i F M for storing project data and OS for storing project Memory data and OS z Life Number of l z A 100 000 times Q write times O W Batery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option 5 Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C 5 RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Z6 RS 232 6 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Be Lu Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Zo Project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function USB Full Speed 12 Mbps Device 1ch USB Connector shape Mini B z Application For conne
186. 2 04 O S O 3072 alarms Function to save alarm history data to the i sche 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Oo O O Alarm history A drive standard CF card for GT11 Function to display the cursor by touching an alarm and function to output the 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O corresponding comment No to a device The comment group application 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O O O Scrolling alarm displ Be The scrolling alarm display applicable 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 x x O isplay Function for detecting alarm even at the fall of bit device with Advanced User 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x Alarm Function to display a cursor by touching Advanced Alarm an alarm and to output the corresponding 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo Oo x comment No to a device The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x external control Function for using BMP JPEG data in ai es 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Oo O x memory card as parts Settings for BMP JPEG file parts can be TRR ml 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x made on each object Parts Display ae When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Parts Movement S na i 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O Oo enable Hold Display can be selected Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02
187. 2 Mbps Device 1ch Built in USB Connector shape Mini B interface Application For connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation and FA transparent function Compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector shape TYPE 1 Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 1ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Protective structure Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions Excluding USB environmental 167 6 6 W x 135 5 3 H x 56 2 2 D mm inch protective cover Panel cutting dimensions 153 6 0 W x 121 4 8 H mm inch Weight 1 1 kg 2 4lb mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package p a P j 2 58L or later 2 32J or later GT Designer2 Version 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots and flickers appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight lif
188. 2J a O x x o connection Supporting interrupt extension Computer 03 00 F Communication driver Supporting connection to OMRON 2 18U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL O x x oO OMRON temperature controller NEO 02 02 temperature The functions to automatically sto controller ese ae i P Communication driver monitoring faulty stations and to connection 9 4 ae i 2 58L OMRON THERMAC INPANEL O x x O disconnect communications with NEO 03 03 controllers are added Supporting connection to SHINKO Communication driver eto 2 43V l O x x O SHINKO indicating controller Shinko Technos Controller 03 01 indicating The functions to automatically stop controller monitoring faulty stations and to Communication driver l ae 2 58L O x x O connection disconnect communications with App 28 controllers are added Shinko Technos Controller 03 03 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page Version of GT1 GT Soft GT11 0 Item Description GT Version of OS 5 GoTi000 Designer2 Bus Serial Supporting connection to CHINO controller CHINO controller Communication driver j The functions to automatically stop 2 58L CHINO Controllers MODBUS o x o connection monitoring faulty stations and to 03 03 disconnect communications with controllers are added Supporting connection to FUJI SYS Communicati
189. 3 28 Attachments ads ai aaien ata 2 19 8 58 Applicable attachment 8 58 Installing procedure asssseesssrresessrreserrrrresrenna 8 58 B Backlight sasen 2 18 19 6 Backlight replacement eeeeeeeenn 19 6 Backlight shutoff detection and replacement 19 5 Backup Restore Settings ccecceseeeeeeees 11 40 Drive for backup data 11 40 Drive for backup Setting eeeneeeeeeeeen 11 40 Max of backup data 11 40 Trigger backup setting 0 ee 11 44 Bar code reader ecccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeentaneeeeeeeeees 2 16 Basic operation of settings change 9 11 Bast OS nen aa AEO A E A 9 1 Battery auc lt c ceeveshc betieen e nie taadaa aae ia ie 2 17 8 47 Applicable battery cee ceeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 8 47 Battery ME erderea anar Eaa AREPA AAAA TARAA 8 48 Battery replacement procedure 0 00 8 47 Battery specifications ceececeeseeeeeeeeeees 8 47 Battery voltage low detection and battery replacement ceire eeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenentees 19 4 Battery status display eee eeseeeeeeennteeeeeeenaes 12 1 GOT internal battery status display 12 6 Boot S anae a a e Medals 9 1 Brightness contrast adjustment eee 11 12 Brightness adjustment function c eee 11 12 Display operation of brightness contrast 11 12 Buffer circuit Cable ccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 9 Bus Connection Unit
190. 3 8 2 13 8 3 13 9 2 13 10 2 13 10 3 14 3 2 14 4 2 14 5 2 14 6 2 14 7 2 14 9 18 3 1 18 4 18 5 2 Partial additions Chapter 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 3 2 5 3 2 5 3 3 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 4 8 1 2 8 3 1 8 7 8 8 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 9 2 9 3 1 10 1 3 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 5 1 11 7 1 11 8 1 Chapter 14 Section 14 1 1 14 2 1 19 6 1 20 2 Appendix 1 3 5 Additions Section 3 2 5 4 5 5 3 4 8 6 11 9 11 11 13 11 14 8 Sep 2006 SH NA 080528ENG G Partial corrections Section 5 1 1 5 2 4 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 6 5 4 2 Nov 2006 SH NA 080528ENG H Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 43V Partial corrections SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 4 2 4 3 4 5 Chapter 7 Section 8 18 6 8 28 7 8 3 8 8 8 48 14 8 58 3 8 68 4 Section 8 6 2 8 78 1 8 7 2 8 7 3 8 88 2 10 1 3 11 2 1 11 3 1 11 7 1 11 7 2 11 8 1 12 1 3 14 9 2 14 9 3 18 4 Chapter 20 Section 20 2 Partial additions Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 5 3 1 5 3 4 6 3 9 2 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 1 11 1 3 11 3 3 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 1 5 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 4 13 4 1 13 4 2 13 4 3 13 5 2 13 5 3 13 6 2 13 7 2 13 8 2 13 9 2 13 9 3 13 10 1 13 10 2 13 10 3 13 10 4 13 11 2 13 12 3 14 3 1 14 3 3 Chapter 17 Section 17 1 3 18 3 18 3 1 19 6 2 Appendix 1 3 5 Additions Section 8 5 13 12 Print Date
191. 330 90mm or less w W gt OE TLO Bw all o gt oO INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant 5 15 Product 5 16 Connections other than above GOT power supply section J aao LN LN Z Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 A7 j GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 and GT1560 weyr LY LA Nbc LG FG 90mm or less b 24VDC GOT power section aA i f w Sen 6 Ferrite core 5 ZCAT3035 1330 jo fey y NN e GT1550 Protective grounding INPUT 24VDC X FO IRI Be sure to ground the protective ground terminal and the FG terminal respectively 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product e When CC Link IE controller network communication unit is mounted on GT155 0O Protective grounding INPUT G9 24VDC i I ja I OVERVIEW 90mm or less CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol wi O W 7 Q VOLTAGE INSTALLATION WIRING
192. 4 01 08 57 la L0G00001_0000 1K 01 04 01 08 57 tL LOGOO001_0001 1K 01 04 01 08 57 LOGOO001_0001 1K 01 03 01 00 10 LOGOO001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 10 LOGOO001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 M 104KB 499672KB OF ile Please select destination Execute ai Vv Continued to next page 13 54 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation O When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch button closes the dialog Select the file to be moved by touching it Touch the button Move Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive Target file ARPOOOO1 GIP 4 If touch the Execute button the dialog Do you want to move the file shown left is displayed S Touch the OK button T While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 Zz O lt 22 L zZ Target file ARPO0001 G1P When any file with the same name 2 i Do you want to Overwrite the file exists in the destination folder the dialog ae shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the button overwrites the file 22 7 If touch the Cancel button cancels 2 amp 2 moving PrE aon Easececonnleted O When moving is completed completion dialog is displayed 6 z Z gt If touch the OK button closes the Foo dialog abo 57
193. 4 1to4 12 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 1 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 4 3 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 4 6 A 12 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156 4 9 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155 4 11 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5 1to5 24 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 Belial EMC directive a2 avecBaniacantenk tind Sadie itunide tere tant dale a ie A 5 2 5 1 2 Control panel aiaiai na ge ass die nea ace ee ee ee eS 5 4 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter 0 ae 5 5 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 6 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 0 0 eee eee 5 6 5i2 2 Power Supply seria hase cae fe he nie areca eel as ane ea Geom de peace ee deh igs Saget andes 5 6 5 2 8 Control panel si sestarweci copie dien a uated ets TOE EEEE bent Paina d eet aed 5 7 5 24 Grounding ssie anaa haa Ate n Gat Pacts Bornes niacin anid ate Ai Ana aateans 5 7 5 25 Extrnal Winni asee vanes arena York Sue dee yowa ay Sa EAE Gai Que wet 5 8 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 9 SSe GOT Aaen tpl s aa agains peta A EN Dar aa teeth ahold od 5 9 5 3 2 Connection method 600 tenets 5 10 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used 0 2 0 eee 5 11 5 3 4 When the option unit is used 0 0 teas 5 13 5 3 5 When the option is used 0 eee eae 5 13 53 6 Gablesi
194. 5 Q and GT1550 Q O x x x Memory check O x O x Drawing check O x O x Font check O x O x Self check Touch panel check O x O x I O check O x O x Network unit status display O O x System alarm Displaying or resetting GOT errors display Displaying CPU errors and network errors O a A GOT start Displaying the GOT start date and time current time and f O x O x time accumulated operating hours A Adding editing deleting operator information changing Operator info passwords O O x x management i a Setting the automatic logout time and password expiration date Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display O x O x Continued to next page App 18 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT n Refi W Item Functions overview GT15 SoftGOT GT11 Ge rence sod 1000 OG Fis Setting the maintenance notification times for the backlight and ug L1 Maintenance timing display setting Setting the number of maintenance notifications for touch keys 2 E x z and the built in flash memory m icp a Resetting accumulated hours and counts for maintenance time 6 9G Addition times reset ok O x x aoe notifications 48 lt tke ae 1 The screen saving time cannot be set 8 2 The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT11 e Chinese Traditional cannot be displayed e Japanese and Chinese Simplified cannot be selected on the GOT s
195. 536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB GT1575 VNBA 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 5MB GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC Memory size 5MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 5MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 24VDC Memory size 5MB GT1565 VTBA 2 2 Component List 2 2 1 GOT 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB Continued to next page GOT Product name Model name GT1565 VTBD Specifications 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB GT1562 VNBA 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 5MB GT1562 VNBD 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 24VDC Memory size 5MB GT1555 VTBD GT1555 QTBD 5 7 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB GT1555 QSBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 4096 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB
196. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Monitoring time s 0 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 a 0 Z E Ww 7 3 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual z O lt am W Q gt GT Designer2 Version g Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters e gt 2 gt 3 Era E 5 Point gt 1 Display setting by GT Designer2 va Z E Set title display period screen save time and screen save backlight at GOT set Sok up in System Environment of GT Designer2 an When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT 9 lt L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual amp 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup G gt 2 Screen save time 35 Using the system information function can compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility 5 W L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 5 3 6 Setting System Information mi He 3 Screen save backlight 2 When Screen save backlight is set to ON using the system information function Backlight OFF output signal can switch the backlight OFF from the controller When Screen save backlight is set
197. 7 Video RGB connection a Video input e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below GOT side Ferrite Core Camcorder vision a ZCAT3035 1330 sensor side H 130 or less 5 12 230 or less 40 40 400 or less 9 06 1 57 1 57 15 75 T gate tain inch b RGB input output e Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material with the length shown below e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below Ferrite Core Vision sensor GOT side ZCAT3035 1330 personal computer a external display side 130 or less Grounding braided wire or less 130 or less 5 12 50mm 1 57 5 12 Unit mm inch 8 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier or CNC connection Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Point gt Configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected _ device when connecting the GOT to a
198. 71 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Ethernet Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU connection Supporting connection to CNC C70 Communication driver 9 Supporting the redundant system with the 2 63R AJ71F71 AJ71 Q F71 O x x redundant type extension base unit Q17nNC 03 07 Supporting the redundant system with the remote I O station of the MELSECNET H x network system The communication driver name is a changed Communication driver O x x x l 2 73B QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 A17nNC Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 and CRnD 700 03 09 O o x CRnD 700 Supporting connection to the JR Communication driver MODPUST YGE MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP 03 09 O a 2 Extended device range monitored Communication driver The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095 2 09K OMRON SYSMAC O O x O etc 01 02 OMRON PLC Communication driver connection Supporting delay time setting 2 27D OMRON SYSMAC O x x O 02 04 Supporting the settings of Retry and Communication driver i 2 43V O x x O Timeout Time OMRON SYSMAC 03 01 App 26 For GOT1000 Series Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade Continued to next page Version of GT11 ae GT GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS 15 GoTto0 Designer2 Bus Serial A i Communication driver Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 18U O x x Oo KEYENCE PLC KEYENCE KV700 1000 02 02
199. 9 3 Cleaning Method Use GOT always in a clean condition m To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol Bs as n Clean fog wW lt 5 M o Q Ze W T lt x is Q Z Point f Precautions for cleaning Do not use solvents such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 19 3 Cleaning Method 1 9 3 19 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement The battery is used for backing up the present time or the maintenance time notification data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the following for the replacement procedure C7 8 11 Battery The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility and system alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility lt 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the following message on system alarm set Battery alarm display to ON C gt 11 1 1 Display setting functions System alarm 500
200. 9 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight O Disconnect the cable connector of the upper H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 backlight from the GOT side connectors A Ee Expanded figure of part Ain 2 5 a Phe aus qos w O 596 FE When the GOTs with the following hardware versions are used remove the cables from the insulation z amp 9 sheets for protecting cables 2 e GT1565 VTBA Hardwear version W or later o e GT1565 VTBD Hardwear version N or later VANSANT E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION Insulation sheets for protecting cables W Remove the cables of the upper connector H01 from the 2 slits black z Similarly remove the cables of the upper connector H02 from the 2 slits black GE icp Expanded figure of part B in Gog Q g ia zZ gt Press the upper backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left Similarly press the lower backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left x lt a Z 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 13 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When the GOT with the insulation sheets for protecting cables is used place the cables between the insulation sheet and the insulati
201. A ladder monitor setting function s sasssa aaaea 11 26 11 7 2 Display operation of Q QnA ladder monitor sasssa saaana 11 27 11 7 3 Q QnA ladder monitor setting operation 0 0 0000 eee 11 28 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 11 29 11 8 1 Function of the transparent mode 0 cee eae 11 29 11 8 2 Displaying the transparent mode 0 ee ee 11 29 11 8 3 Operation the transparent mode 0 000 cee eee 11 30 11 9 Video Unit Settings 11 31 11 9 1 Functions of the video unit settings n a 0 0 cee eae 11 31 11 9 2 Displaying the video unit settings 0 cece eee 11 32 11 9 3 Operating the video unit settings 0000s cette 11 33 11 10 Video Display Settings 11 34 11 10 1 Functions of the video display settings 0 c eee eee 11 34 11 10 2 Displaying the video display settingS 0 0 cece es 11 35 11 10 3 Operating the video display settings 0 0 6 cece eee 11 36 11 11 RGB Display Settings 11 38 11 11 1 Functions of the RGB display settings 00 00 cece eee 11 38 11 11 2 Displaying the RGB display settings 000 cece eee 11 38 11 11 3 Operating the RGB display settings 00 0 c ccc 11 39 11 12 Backup Restore Settings 11 40 1121 Backup restore function icc ts dake nn ehia awed Cent eee deb hdawee ee nan de edna 11 40 11 12 2 Display operation of backup restoration setting 0 0 c
202. A85OGOT GT1550 GT1150 9 The GP2500 and GP2600 manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation can also be replaced with the 10 4 GOT1000 Drawing software Sold separately Model name SW gO D5C GTD2 J Product name GT Designer2 C indicates the y 710 version 10 The O is assigned with an integer 2 or more 2 19 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Description Drawing software for GOT1000 GOT900 series PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Project data transfer cable Model name GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female and PC D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female and PC D sub 25 pin male GT09 C20USB 5P Cable length 2m For connecting GOT USB mini and PC USB GT09 C30USB 5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT USB mini and PC USB 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 2 2 Option 9 be OVERVIEW z O z o Ww Z ie 0 W Yn gt n SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specifications Item Specifications Operating Display section 0 to 50 C ambient Other than the 4 f __ 0 to 55 C temperature display section Stora
203. ALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION i pa 2 ae a Zi lt lt APPENDICES INDEX Checking error messages with the utility Utility The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not set 20 18 c gt 14 9 System Alarm Display seeesee0000000 Error code and reference manual Channel NSh No storage Error source Error code Description E Reference destination 1 0 to 99 User s manual of the ACPU Error code of CPU for ACPU Value of D9008 connected with GOT Error code of the following controllers User s manual of the Controller FXCPU 2 GS263 controller connected with the 100 to 299 e Third party PLC GOT e Temperature controller Deal with errors according to OMRON temperature the error messages controller only Error code of the GOT main unit 300 to 399 function E Error code of the GOT 4 GOT 400 to 499 Song GS262 20 3 2 List of Error communication function E Message System Alarm Error code of the GOT main unit 500 to 699 function Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264 User s manual of the QCPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU CPU and QnACPU connected Value of SD0 for QCPU QnACPU GS263 with GOT Servo User s manual of the servo 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier amplifier amplifier connected to GOT 1 For details of GOT
204. Advanced Recipe The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x external control Standard monitor OS 03 03 The number of records that can be set is 2 58L Option OS Oo Oo x changed to 2000 Advanced Recipe 03 03 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Report function Function to print the colleted data 2 27D Extended function OS O O x Report 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Compatible with the printer output 2 27D Extended function OS O x x Hard copy function Printer 02 04 Thumbnail Output can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x i Extended function OS Operation panel ineiiad Enables setting the operation panel 2 58L External I O Operation Panel O x x uncti 03 03 Sound output Extended function OS Enables setting the sound output 2 58L O O x function Sound Output 03 03 Function for loading the data read with bar 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 00 O x O cord reader to PLC CPU Number of settable devices is extended Barcode 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x Oo from 32 to 1024 points Space 0x20 or NULL 0x00 can be 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O selected for blank device Function to write in the devices which data Extended function OS RFID function i 2 73B O x O are read by the RFID reader writer RFID 03 09 Bie aaticaioel eno Standard monitor OS 03 00 unction to displa
205. BUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE controller network communication GT15 J71GP23 SX unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z9 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 751F900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set A 22 w Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15 PRN Video input unit GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT CF card unit GT15 CFCD CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET External 1 O unit GT15 DIO Sound output unit GT15 SOUT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set m Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 64MC Memory card CF card Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC eee GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M Perey ences GT15 QFNB48M GT 15 MESB48M GT11 50FNB Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT Protectiv
206. C100R40304 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40304 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40304 6T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller UT2000 series 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 14 be OVERVIEW Zz z oc D o LL Zz ro oO W j N gt ep SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name Description GT09 C30R20701 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name Description GT09 C30R20801 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter RS 422 conversion unit Sold separately Product name RS 422 conversion unit Model name Description GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 side connector 9 pins GT15 RS2T4 25P conversion unit RS 422 side connector 25 pins Bus extension connector box Sold separately Product name Bus extension connector box Model name Description For QCPU Q Mode Motion controller CPU Q series long distance A9GT QCNB 13 2m or longer bus connection Bus connector conversion box Sold separately Product name Bus connector conversion box CF card Sold separately Product name Model name
207. Copy Download Up load n ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 3 Project Information 1 3 17 13 3 2 Display operation of project information 13 3 3 Display example of project information Belect drive A C Flash Memory Program Data control Project information Built in CF card Name Size Date Time PROJECT 3K_03 08 04 04 51 a Ro 02 27 04 21 09 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Y 5058KB Property Data check Delete Copy Download Upload Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected 1 Select drive When the CF card is not connected A Built in CF card and B Memory card are not displayed The project data Project Folder in the selected drive is displayed 2 Name When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 3 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 4 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 5 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by 6 The size of drive i Daan Kaa drive selection Only the size in use is displayed w
208. D aag Number of folders and S 9 fi Displays the total number of the files and folders displayed 2 iles gt Display of the creation date and time Point Display N The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated oe and while displaying the hardcopy OAN gE To display the updated creation date and time close the screen currently displayed oa by moving to the upper hierarchy folder etc and display the screen again Zz A O Remark Displayed folders and files 5 For the folders and files displayed refer to the following E o zz lt gt 13 1 5 Display file zut Eeim ZAV 13 5 Hard Copy Information 1 3 37 13 5 3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information Display operation of hardcopy information Program Data control Hard copy informatio A sleek deive indiane Size Date Tine A Built in CF card DIR CIRDAT 07 25 06 11 59 IES DIR PROJECT1 01 31 00 05 23 i v IS590KB OFile Del Copy Rename 13 38 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information D If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information in the touched folder is displayed If touch a name of the folder of the information in the folder of one higher hierarchy is displayed 2 If touch A
209. D SETTINGS Ol Ww O W 7 Q INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network and MELSECNET 10 connction PLC to PLC network a For coaxial cable Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the outer braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below GOT side Ferrite Core ZCAT3035 1330 cma a if 130 or 130 or less less 5 12 5 12 230 or less A 40 400 or less pe t 9 06 1 57 15 75 i Unit mm inch b For optical fiber cable e Processing of the cable is not required 4 CC Link connection Intelligent device station Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 4 4 3 e Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below e CC Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and PLC Ferrite Core ZCAT3035 1330 __ i 130 5 12 5 12 230 or less 40 400 or less 9 06 15 75 Unit mm inch e CC Link dedicated cable for connectin
210. DAT 02 27 C Flash Memory L Property Data check Download Number Item Description 1 seiacean The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected elect drive When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF card and B Memory card are not displayed Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 2 Kind In the case of file displays the extension in the case of folder displays DIR Displays the name of special data in the selected drive 3 Name When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The special data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed 7 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive Displays switch of each function executable in the Special data information download upload 8 Operation switch 7 etc Number of folders and 9 fi Displays the total number of displayed files and folders iles a Remark Folders and files displayed Qs For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 13 1 5 Display
211. Description For QnA ACPU Motion controller CPU A series long distance bus A7GT CNB connection For conversion from large type connector to small type connector Model name Description GT05 MEM 16MC Flash ROM 16MB GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB CF card GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Commercially available CF card 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html 2 15 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Bar code reader Sold separately Product name Model name Description Bar code reader fe Commercially available bar code reader 3 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html RFID controller Sold separat
212. Designer2 SHE ca m Note the available capacity of the memory card rz The available capacity of BootOS and standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of GT Designer2 Communicate with Memory Card C Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Q Q GOT Type GT15 V 640x480 fa a Boot Drive a Project Data lt C Built in Flash Memory 0 Intelligent module monitor data EBU Fiash Memo z C A motion monitor data Servo amplifier monitor data Project Data 0 kbyte Capacity of standard monitor OS fa Attention Q 0 kbyte zZz Project data Special data is only valid for the supporting OS therefore it is recommend to write the correct version of the 0 kbyte 68816012 kbyte 18 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 1 8 3 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card There are the following two types for the BootOS standard monitor OS installation 1 Installing when starting the GOT 18 3 1 All the OS and project data stored in the memory card are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT This installing method is effective in the following cases e The GOT utility cannot be displayed e The standard monitor OS is not installed 2 Installing using the Program Data control function Utility lt 18 3 1 By operating the utility select OS or project data stored in the memory card and transfer them to the GOT Point
213. E unction for displaying sequence program ee prog 2 09K Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q oO x x loaded to CPU on GOT QnA 01 02 x Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX a 01 02 Ladder monitoring Option OS function aaach erase Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q upporting display of Chinese Simplifie ee Simp 2 27D QnA 02 04 O x x Traditional German Korean Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 02 04 Supporting language switching Option OS Japanese Korean for displaying file 2 27D Ladder monitor for MELSEC Oo x x name and title of the sequence program Q QnA 02 04 Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade App 41 For GOT1000 Series ee Version of GT 3 GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 i Option OS Supporting the read of programs y 2 43V Ladder monitor for MELSEC Oo x x comments Q QnA 03 01 Supporting reading comments from CF Option OS 2 58L O x x cards Ladder monitor for MELSEC Supporting monitoring local devices 2 58L Q QnA 03 03 O x x Supporti tion to Universal model option 9S orting connection to Universal mode aie 2 63R Ladder monitor for MELSEC o x x ee QCPU Ladder monitoring Q QnA 03 07 function In searching multiple file programs the backward search display is possible Option OS With ieee ladder monitor me 2 738 Ladder monit
214. E multi communication unit GT09 C30R21103 3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R41101 5T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41101 5T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C200R41101 5T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T Cable length 30m Connection cables for SHARP PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R20601 15P Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C30R20602 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC RS 422 cable 2 11 GT09 C30R40601 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40601 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40601 15P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C30R40602 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40602 15P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40602 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40602 15P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C30R40603 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40603 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40603 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40603 6T 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs Sold separately Product ey Model name Description name RS 232 ene GT09 C30R21201 25P Cablelength3m_
215. ENANCE mounting status and status of the PLC Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Communication timeout Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in 402 Confirm communication error pathway or modules c GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Description of INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS Checking for normal monitoring of each connection type 2 This error may occur when the load of PLC CPU becomes heavier while accessing other stations In such case transfer the data of the other station to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host 3 Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received Confirm the cable omission the communication module mounting status status of the PLC and the transmission SIO status error Confirm speed of the computer link 403 communication pathway Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message O ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt or modules in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in error c gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Description of APPENDICES Checking for normal monitoring of each c
216. ENANCE AND INSPECTION n procedure ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM the CF card access switch of GOT APPENDICES ation switch INDEX Simultaneous 2 point touch 000000000880 S For GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT155 For GT1595 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 1 8 5 18 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 4 BootOS standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory The CF card access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access LED is lit Now installing BootOS GOT restarts automatically after installation is completed When standard monitor OS is already installed GOT restarts by touching button Reboot O After confirming normal restart switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT When it is confirmed that CF card access LED is not lit remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility For details of program data control function refer to the following C gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Point gt Precautions on executing program data control function When execute program data control function standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Thus this
217. Environmental Protection Cover 8 55 8 14 2 Installing procedure 8 15 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 15 1 Applicable stand The following stand is applicable for GT1500 Product name Model Description GT15 90STAND Stand for 15 GT15 80STAND Stand for 12 1 Stand GT15 70STAND Stand for 8 4 10 4 GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 8 15 2 Installing procedure 1 GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND Set the stand so that the front side of the GOT to be mounted faces the front For GT15 70STAND the surface to be used to set the GOT changes according to the GOT mounted Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting screw of the stand Put the GOT into the Stand from the front side and fix it using the fixtures For the GOT mounting method refer to the following L377 6 5 Installation Procedure For GT15 90 STAND GT15 80 STAND For GT15 70 STAND 8 56 8 15 Stand 8 15 1 Applicable stand 2 GT05 50STAND Determine the angle for installing the GOT Slide the angle adjustment fitting as shown below to determine the angle The angle can be adjusted to 75 65 55 or 45 When installing multiple units to the GOT use the stand with 75 or 65 degrees for securing lead in allowances for cables at the bottom of the GOT T Once the angle is determined
218. F card into the GOT Turn on the CF card access switch and then install or download the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and project data l Turn on the CF card access switch Turn on the CF card access switch Mount units to GOT Refer to Chapter 8 OPTION Check the Communication settings Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Connect the GOT and controller with a cable Turn on the power supply of GOT and the system of the connection destination Start the monitor End 1 z5 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 Project data can be also downloaded uploaded via Ethernet 1 For download upload of project data via Ethernet BootOS and standard monitor OS should be installed in the GOT in advance so that the GOT and PC can communicate with each other via Ethernet by setting Communication Settings Refer to the following manual for details lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 The B drive cannot be set as the OS boot drive OVERVIEW Zz Point P Precautions for setting OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card 1 GOT startup time a When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card the GOT startup time with E m i l O the A drive takes longer than that with the C drive Do The GOT startup time with the A drive differs depending on th
219. F card inserting removing method with CF card extension unit 8 42 8 9 Memory Card Adaptor 8 44 8 9 1 Applicable memory card adaptor 0 0 eee 8 44 8 9 2 Installing proc dUre vie cutout Steeda eteee beet veeewhnte eae dean a ced 8 44 8 10 Option Function Board 8 45 8 10 1 Applicable option function board 0 eee 8 45 8 10 2 Installing procedure 0 eee 8 45 8 11 Battery 8 47 Bld Applicable battery i dk aaa bate bE ee ee ate he eee bate hae ee es 8 47 8 11 2 Battery specifications 0 OSE EREA EEA teens 8 47 8 11 3 Battery replacement procedure 000 ees 8 47 8 11 4 Battery life oven ede tiie eee oa eee De bead hee Dae 8 48 8 12 Protective Sheet 8 49 8 12 1 Applicable protective sheet 0 0 2 0 eee 8 49 A 14 8212 2 Installing procedUrens eteina ari Pet aaeth bee een eaud ete he ellotet agai Pes 8 50 8 13 Protective cover for oil 8 51 8 13 1 Applicable protective cover for Oil 2 1 eae 8 51 8 13 2 Installation procedure ssa ea rE EN a ete E EER ATIII 8 51 8 14 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 54 8 14 1 Applicable USB environmental protecton Cover s s s sasaaa aasan 8 54 8 14 2 Installing procedure aa a A S teens 8 54 8 15 Stand 8 56 8 15 1 Applicable stand 0 eee 8 56 8 15 2 Installing procedure Eaa ea REE ete teens 8 56 8 16 Attachment 8 58 8 16 1 Applicable
220. FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION i 2 ae a Za lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection and the cause is not clear in 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm execute the following troubleshooting Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection 20 2 1 K gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Locating error positions Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part Please refer to User s Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register 20 14 1 How to locate error positions a Use of peripheral devices Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and based on the error message on the PLC CPU check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses b Error timing Check the timing of errors 1 An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU In this case because the faulty module may not be identified use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed the module may be causing
221. For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC GT09 C30R41201 6C Cable length 3 m RS 422 GT09 C100R41201 6C Cable length 10 m f For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable GT09 C200R41201 6C Cable length 20 m GT09 C300R41201 6C Connection cables for SHINKO Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R21401 4T Cable length 30 m Cable length 3m indicating controller Sold separately Description For connecting GOT to SHINKO indicating controller FCR 100 FCD100 FCR 23A PC FIR series Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs Sold separately Product ee Model name Description name RS 232 GT09 C30R20501 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C30R20502 15P Cablelength3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C30R40501 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40501 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C200R40501 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40501 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40502 6C Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40502 6C Cable length 10m r For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C200R40502 6C Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40502 6C Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40503 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40503 15P Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40503 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40503 15P Connection cables for HITACHI Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC IES PLCs Sold separately
222. GOT Continued to next page Product name RS 422 cable Product name RS 232 cable FXCPU direct connection cable FX communication function extension board connection Model name GT01 C10R4 8P Cable length 1m Description GT01 C30R4 8P Cable length 3m For connecting FXCPU MINI DIN 8 pins GT01 C100R4 8P Cable length 10m connector and GOT For connecting FXCPU communication be OVERVIEW GT01 C200R4 8P Cable length 20m function extension board MINI DIN 8 pins connector and GOT 6 cable GT01 C300R4 8P Cable length 30m 3 DZ 26 VES GT01 C30R4 25P Cable length 3m QnA A FXCPU For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller a direct connection G101 C100R4 25P Cable length 10m CPU A series FX FX1 FX2 FX2c and GOT cable computer For connecting FA CNV O CBL and GOT 3 link connection GT01 C200R4 25P Cable length 20m For connecting computer link module serial 5 cable communication module and GOT 5 GT01 C300R4 25P Cable length 30m S GT09 C30R4 6C Cable length 3 m a 26 ZZ GT09 C100R4 6C Cable length 10 m Ee Computer link For connecting computer link module serial au connection cable communication module and GOT GT09 C200R4 6C Cable length 20 m GT09 C300R4 6C Cable length 30 m z 2 w ow gt Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Sor Model name Description For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial icati GT09
223. GOT main unit Z m gt E C drive 6 Built in flash memory m is Piece opy opy P foe i E i Ozo Hard copy Hard copy GT Designer2 A drive B drive a Zz amp O 2 Standard CF card qaz when installed in GOT CF card unit Logging Copy files on Windows a Wi CF card extension unit D00 Hard cop 6 gt Inserting R emoving Q Z 3 Logging x D Hard copy fe lt Standard CF card SD when installed in PC 3 Install Download Write Upload Read 2 The data of the build in flash memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes low ee eae 4 AND BATTERY Item Data type Storage location x BootOS BootOS 9 E Standard monitor OS R PLC communication driver Built in flash memory C drive mi S Extended function OS G Option OS Porad Standard CF card A drive Project roject data a z Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup Fxrendedimemary card 3 grive fe Q Built in flash memory C drive hn do N S On Alarm data Z Extended alarm log file and alarm log file 5 a oa Recipe data Advanced recipe file Recipe file Standard CF card A drive Logging Logging Logging file z wk Hard copy Image file Hard copy function ug Fa re An 1 When using the project data stored in the Standard CF Card A drive or extended memory card B drive withthe 4 O 3 GOT hold the CF card installed to
224. GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual Describes how to use the GT MES Interface Function 1 1 Features 1 1 Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices Using of TFT color liquid crystal display high intensity wide angle view and high definition type provides clear full color display and displays small characters clearly Displays digital images of BMP and other formats in 65536 colors e Provides multi language display function based on Unicode2 1 True Type font and high speed OVERVIEW drawing of beautiful text Z e High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115 2kbps 7 e High speed display and high speed touch switch response z 3 LL 2 More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and 26 maintenance works e 9MB user memory is included as standard Memory capacity can be expanded up to 57MB by increasing the option memory Q e CF card interface is included as standard o e Font installation is available to increase the system fonts S Combined use of 4 types of alarms system alarm user alarm alarm history alarm popup 9 display realizes more efficient alarm notification 5 e Maintenance timing report function is available that measures the backlight energization time and notifies of maintenance time e The USB connector is positioned on the GOT front This enables the system startup to be z performed more efficiently
225. GT15 RS4 9S no 80 40 Serial communication unit GT15 RS4 TE E 8 15 1 57 Prohibited area for installation Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 with an extension unit Q GT15 J71LP23 25 91 3 58 2 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 46 1 85 3 m MELSECNET 10 communication GT15 75J71LP23 Z 91 3 58 9 r Bs unit GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 oO CC Link IE controller network Sa GT15 J71GP23 SX 91 3 58 communication unit Q CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z F 2 Printer unit GT15 PRN i Zo EAO zz Prohibited areas for installing the control panel side installation unit with the EE uw extension unit do not exist To z fe 2 ow 24E ERAT ohuW soe wu gt a ez z O z l z A 2 WIRING OPTION 6 3 Mounting Position 6 9 e For GT1550 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the CF card interface of the GOT A drive is used the unit cannot be installed in the area of 100mm wide by 68mm long on the right side of the hole for installing the GOT in the rear view A CF card cannot be inserted and ejected When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure x Extension unit Model Unit mm inch GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 57 2 24 100 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L 3 94 Bus connection unit
226. Gothic or Gothic for the 16 dot A GISYS 16 dot standard font Mincho standard font 16 dot standard font Gothic 1 8 2 18 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation 18 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS For the installation using GOT the memory card storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the memory card the following three methods are available 1 To Memory Card from GT Designer2 ADDITION TIMES Peed RESET FOR fee MAINTENANCE GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 9 Transferring Data Using a Memory Card PC memory card gt GOT as Zz ta T He Og 52 of an 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed 713 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Q Z N Y i lt 3 Using CF card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive wW ZZ A A A A lt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual ZE E 2a A E Point P Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in memory card When writing BootOS standard monitor OS etc in the memory card be sure to M aga i execute by the utility of other GOT or GT Designer2 Ds The installation is not executed properly with the memory card to which uploaded if oy ei icp from the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than GT
227. IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 8 1 Communication Unit 8 17 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 2 RS 422 Conversion Unit The RS 422 conversion unit is inserted to the GOT RS 232 connector to enable the RS 422 communication by RS 232 RS 422 conversion Refer to the following for the details of connection statuses GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 8 2 1 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit The following RS 422 conversion units are applicable for GT1500 Model name Description RS 422 side connector 9 pins RS 232 RS 422 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 conversion unit RS 422 side connector 25 pins 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Point gt Notes on using the RS 422 conversion unit 1 Use GT15 RS2T4 25P when you switched to use from the GOT A900 series Use GT15 RS2T4 9P when you newly use the GOT1000 series 2 Set to ON by 5V supply at Communication settings of the utility C gt 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 8 2 2 Installing procedure D Power OFF the GOT 2 While sliding the hook of the RS 422 conversion unit along the RS 422 conversion unit mounting rail of the GOT install the RS 422 conversion unit to the RS 232 interfa
228. IMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION i pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 28 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached the set count number or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times Warning Touch panel i 508 reset function after replacing the touch key The GOT can also x needs replacement amar be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The dedicated GS is notifying that the built in flash memory S writing times have reached the set times or more Warning Built in Flash The GOT must be replaced In that case Data backup and re 509 ROM needs replacement x setting are needed The GOT can also be restored by turning Change the GOT oe off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range Clock data input out of 510 In this case the input value is not accepted x range g Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in t
229. L LOGO0001_0000 1K 01 04 01 08 31 m F 104KB 499672KB SFilg BIL CV Copy Move groate GILSTXT Del Rename x elect Drive PROJECT 1 L0G00001 indName Size Date Time DIR ES GIL LOGO0001 1K 01 04 01 08 40 i GIL LOG00001_0001 1K 01 04 01 08 40 CSV LOG00001_0001 1K 01 08 01 00 10 GIL LOGO0001_0002 1K 01 08 01 00 10 CSV LOG00001_0002 1K 01 08 01 00 11 kd F LO96KB 4996 72KB File Please select destination AR feel File conversion from GIP to CSV Source file ARPOOOO1 G1P Change to ARPOOOO1 CSV Change file format Example Dialog if the G 1P gt CSV Vv Continued to next page 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information button is touched 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Touch and select the G1P file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unidcode text file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type e CSV file button Unicode text file G 1p sTXxT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive 4 If touch the Excute button the dialog shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen File conversion from GIP to CSV When the file whose name
230. L TXT Del Rename x Path Name A PROJECT 1 LOG00001 Folder Name LINE Create new folder OK Cancel Process completed 1 3 104 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation D Touch the Create Folder button 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog 8 List display z Displays operation logs in an operation log file in a list S re Se ANNPROAECTI Touch and select a file for displaying the z indName Size Date Time Rouen Cr card i ca z list G10 JOPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 i x B10 OPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 G10 JOPELOG_20060310_0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 p O E ZQo 2 ke 82H m F P4KB 15600KB 4Fild GIDC Copy Move greate swn Del Rename List a Ss LOV RE File Mime A PRDJECT TVOPELOSAOPELO 210S0 10 000 810 6 List Touching the List butt
231. LIST After unpacking confirm that the following parts are included Model Product GT1595 X GOT Quantity Installation fitting GT15 General Description GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1565 V GT1562 VN GT1555 V GT1555 Q GT1550 Q GOT Installation fitting a GT15 General Description The following products are included a spare for the plastic fixing screw of the GOT Apr 2005 Apr 2005 Apr 2005 Apr 2005 GT1585 S Hardware Version B or earlier GT1575 S Hardware Version B or earlier GT1575 V Hardware Version D or earlier GT1565 V Hardware Version D or earlier annan A 27 1 OVERVIEW About GOT GOT is installed on the panel surface of control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC in the control panel GOT carries out PLC switch operation lamp display data display and message display etc Connector for For display screen two kinds of display screens user created screen program and utility screen are available 1 User created Screen User screen is a screen drawn by GT Designer2 GOT The objects of Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numeric display can be laid out arbitrarily to be displayed Moreover the multiple screens created by GT Designer2 can be overlapped and switched to be displayed For details refer to the following C gt GT D
232. M and it is in a protected status O memory cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device 1o ected bvk d The key word is set in PLC CPU 5 rotecte eyword p aie Cancel the key word Remove keyword ae ASCII code is selected in Ethernet operations of the PLC E71 specification is i 420 ASCII side setting O l Select Binary code 401 E71 is set as read only The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read only O Clear setting Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write enabled oo PLC CPU error Communication between PLC CPU and the Not communicating 422 bet CPU and E71 PLC side Ethernet module impossible 0 etween Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer Confirm CPU error etc Confirm buffer memory The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 1 Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 2 When using the station No switching function check the Insufficient network table data of the switching station No device 423 information Add station When the station number specified in the switching station O no No device is not set in the Ethernet setting add the station number to the Ethernet setting When the station number does not exist in the system change the data of the switching s
233. MELSEC A series please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 2 Connection method 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used Use the following communication unit with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when connected with other than followings Connection method Bus connection Communication unit used GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Hardware version of the communication unit Production year and month Version D or later Oct 2005 Version C or later Oct 2005 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Version G or later Mar 2005 Direct connection to CPU Computer link connection MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version D or later Jan 2006 Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 Version D or later Jan 2006 Version C or later Sep 2006 CC Link IE controller network connection GT15 J71GP23 SX Version A or later CC Link connection GT15 J61BT13 Version C or later Intelligent device station Sep 2006 Version B or later Ethernet connecti
234. MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Toop GT15 Users Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION I D AN G ER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I conditions resulting in death or severe injury I Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I I I J UN CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during moni
235. NANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX OS version confirmation 13 4 FONUCHOGK iniaiaiai a iaa 14 12 Display operation of font check 14 12 Font check function ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 12 Font check operation ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 14 13 G General Specifications cccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 1 GOT data package acquisition 0 eeee 13 110 GOT Self Check ia cccnianiecuiien adletasiaiay 14 1 GOT Set UD steecsis vice a aea 11 1 GOT Start Time reciente 14 34 Display of GOT start time ee 14 35 Display operation of GOT start time 14 34 GOT start time function s s s 14 34 GOT to GOT connection cable 2 8 GOT to GOT long distance connection cable 2 8 GT Designer niii i ie os 2 19 H Hard copy information seenen 13 36 The display operation of hardcopy information adbaidi sd sadaduaaavsh ands cdvsdediedadiaa ataguielstaaaaneesduadenasdenned 13 36 The function of hardcopy information 13 36 The operation of hardcopy information 13 38 I DEE E EE EE A EE E A 14 16 Display operation of I O check seeee 14 17 VO Check FUNCTION eroii iaieiiea 14 16 VO check operation ccccceeeereeees 14 18 14 22 Installation of boot OS and standard OS 18 1 Boot OS and standard OS installation using CF card PPE ET T EA E E EO EE 18 4 Boot OS and standard OS required for installation AAE A
236. NANCE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION UTILITY FUNCTION SETTINGS STATUS DISPLAY x Oo Ww S LL w Ww 1p O 0 DISPLAY SECTION CC Link IE controller network communication unit lt LED status gt RUN PC ONLINE TEST LJ OFFLINE M RR PARAM ERR F LOOP ERR OW I CCL EE lt Host line sts gt Connet ion Disconnect CIN cable disconnection OUT cable disconnect ion NORMAL Loop Info gt Loop Sts Normal LoopBK Sta IN LoopBK factor MANAGER No LoopBK Sta S MANAGER OUT Loop Info gt OUT Loop Sts Normal QUT LoopBK Sta OUT LoopBK factor N K Sta TOKEN PASS DATA LINK ink Info gt GOT RAW Pink Info gt R LOOP ERR Com Status B Pass ee Cause of Ssp Cable disconnection 1 Cause of Stop Param not revd J lt Transient Status gt rrlode ew wo 10 1 LED status Displays the operation status of the CC Link IE controller network communication unit LED F No Item Lit Not lit Blink color Hardware failure or WDT RUN Green Operating normally error With communication error PC Green Data link being executed Data link not executed stations or duplicated station numbers ONLINE Green Online mode Other than online mode TEST Green Test mode Other than test mode 4 OFFLINE Green Offline mode Other than offline mode Duplicated control station No duplicated control station
237. NANCE AND INSPECTION ma p 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 30 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage ee An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading Advanced recipe file i 585 Do not pull the memory card out while the Advanced Recipe x upload error is operating Specified Advanced The advanced recipe of non existing number is about to be 586 recipe number does not executed x exist Execute advanced recipe of existing number p The advanced record of non existing number is about to be Specified record number 587 executed x does not exist a Execute record of existing number Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value cannot be edited Cannot save recipe data 588 Make the recipe device value of the record editable with x to read only record Advanced Recipe Setting of GT Designer2 or specify the record of which recipe device value can be edited Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe Recipe device save error 589 SA setting that is set for not using file x Recipe file does not exist Specify the advanced recipe setting that uses file Recipe device upload Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which 590 error Recipe device value recipe device value is not set x does not exist Specify the record of whi
238. No Name POWER LED Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in red Screen saving Blinks in red Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen Touch key For operating touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen USB interface For connecting a personal computer Connector type MINI B RS 232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Connector type D sub 9 pin Power terminal Power input terminal FG terminal Extension interface For installing an extension unit CF card interface For installing a CF card 10 CF card access LED CF card access switch Lit Not lit CF card not accessed CF card accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited 11 12 Optional function board interface Reset switch For installing the optional function board Hardware reset switch Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 13 14 15 l 4 12 is Hole for unit installation fitting Battery holder Protective ground terminal Remark Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting Houses the battery Fo
239. Not doing so can cause a unit corruption MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When loading the communication unit or printer unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When mounting the multi color display board onto the GOT tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Loose tightening may cause the unit and or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact Overtightening may damage the screws unit and or GOT they might malfunction Push the option function board onto the corresponding connector until it clicks so that it will be secured firmly Push the multi color display board onto the corresponding connector so that it will be secured firmly When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into th
240. Number of touch keys Matrix structure of 30 lines 300 objects screen Matrix structure of 15 lines x 20 columns x 40 columns Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots per key Number of objects Mat canbe Maximum of 2 objects XIMU Touch panel simultaneously touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length None Human Detection range None sensor Detection delay time None Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 12 3 2 5 GT1555 V GT1555 Q GT1550 Q EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM n 7 Z O q o L O W oa 7 PART NAME AND SETTINGS DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Specifications tem GT1555 VTBD GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD Human Detection None sensor temperature C drive Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for string project data and OS Memory Life Number of write 3 i 100 000 times times Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 232 5 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation and FA transparent function USB Full Speed 1
241. O Ineffective o rom the same Mairi ireuitpower e equipment and power Z system is used 6 gt an equipment reduces the influence D iz Z of noise Es 2 ED Zo 2 ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 11 System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit module name 1 System configuration of the GOT a GOT main unit b Option function board O Used O Not used c Communication interface a relia O GOT built in interface d Option unit O Used O Not used e Cable between the PLC and GOT f Cable length m g If any other unit etc is used please describe it 2 System configuration of the PLC a Power supply module b CPU module c Serial communication module O Used computer link module Ol Not used d Network module O Used O Not used e Interrupt module O Used O Not used f Positioning module O Used O Not used g Number of extension stages stages h If any other module etc is used please describe it Continued to next page 20 12 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet Entry area for recurrence when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken 3 Describe the operation situation when freezing of the screen or faulty display of the GOT has reocurred 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 13 ADDITION TIMES RESET
242. ONI OperatorID Operator name input oPoooy bao ealo AC DE AIVVEIRI TIT OI TO P AISIDIFIGIHI IIRL LJZICIYIBININ Eater Operator ID input 1008 ee 8 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 1 Operator management Touch the button The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a OperatorName b OperatorID c d Password e Make a permanent password a Touch the OperatorName and lt then the Operator name input dialog box is displayed Input an operator name Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key Touch the OperatorID and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed Input an operator ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key c Touch the level and then the Operator level input dialog box is 6 displayed Input an operator 2 level When the input is completed z touch the Enter key When the level of the operator z being login is changed during E ve r 7 ow editing the operator information a Z29 new level is not reflected until you th E log out of the GOT once and log 828 in the GOT again d For changing passwords during editing
243. OS When the GOTs with the following hardware versions are used remove the cable from an insulation sheet for protecting cables e GT1562 VNBA Hardware version S or later e GT1562 VNBD Hardware version K or later W 0 i afa Insulation sheet a for protecting cables On coed Hee Remove the cables from the 2 slits black Expanded figure of part B in 6 AN pit j o u 2 Ze le z a i lt x is Q z 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 17 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When the GOT with the insulation sheets for protecting cables is used place the cable between the insulation sheet and an insulation sheet for protecting cables When connecting the cable connector of the backlight to the GOT side connector connect it as shown below The following figure shows an example with the insulation sheets for protecting cables Also attach the case in the reverse procedure of removal Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m When attaching the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 1 9 18 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 20 TROUBLESHOOTING D w Fae Ze This chapter explains the GOT restoration
244. Oo Oo x figure Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x Panelmeter A Up to 101 points can be set for scale i P a 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Meter Attribute and Core can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O Oo O When Bit Trigger is not met whether to Level ha 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale P a 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O Oo value number Trend graph Function to collect data only when displa j a i 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Oo O O trigger is met is added Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 37 ADDITION TIMES INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM RESET FOR MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX It D inti Version of GT vara iOS GT GT Soft GT em escription ersion o P Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Up to 101 points can be set for scale P poi 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Function to collect data only when displa Line graph AE y Ra 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 o o o trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to E
245. P 16 0 63 50 1 97 3000 118 1 35 1 38 GT01 C 16 0 67 R4 25P 50 1 97 Lannannnn K4 o A i i j o 35 1 38 Unit mm inch 10000 118 1 20000 787 4 30000 1181 1 GT01 C Unit mm inch 40 1 57 13 0 51 25 0 98 X 33 1 30 0 24 Spam n m L Unit mm inch 10 1000 39 4 30 3000 118 1 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300 30000 1181 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards Rating plate The GOT hardware version function version and the standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear face Aa MITSUBISHI ps GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL AA MODEL GT1575 VTBA x IN 100 240VAC 50 60Hz Hardware version POWER_MAX 90V __ pe SERIAL 0000470 AA0000 B lt B J Function version SS oem lp ean aa re a L Conformed standard MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN BACKLIGHT GT15 70VLTT 1 Back light model ea applicable back light model pra ari is described Packing box The standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed by the label on the packing box Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or shipment date ea
246. SOMy9ISeVS S BEO 1 4 241 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display Cause of Stop 0 z O 5 5 MELSENCNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 a Deb f ct Self check NETWK unit x GT15 J71LP23 25 NETWK No 1 STE 2 lt LED status gt lt Loop Info gt Z ale 1 9 Ta FLoopBK Sta 2 ZQg RLoopBK Sta 3 Sra Loop Back 4 u 5 824 lt D Link Info gt 0 Com Status d 8 h a A D Link in prog 10 D Cause of sp e 11 Normal Comm e K 9 Eee A Stop f i TE orma zZ E F L00P R LOOP 16 ont aon 7p gt 2 za Fug JES oO GT15 J71BR13 one lt ozb Deb f ct f check NETWK unit x GT 15 J 7 1BR13 NETWK No 1 STE 2 lt LED status gt lt Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt a Z F loop Rloop z FLoopBK Sta 2 a RLoopBK Sta 3 a Loop Back 4 ft 5 lt D Link Info gt 6 T9 Com Status 8 o 14 Cause of Ssp 1 e 2 3 4 5 6 x O Ww I LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 1 4 22 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 1 LED status Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit operation status LED No Item 8 Lit Not lit c
247. STNP server 2 Check the network to the SNTP server Refer to explanations of SB0020 on the applicable network 800 Abnormal module status O manual 801 Abnormal baton passing Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network status manual 802 Abnormal cyclic Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network o transmission status manual f Refer to explanations of SBOOEE on the applicable network 803 Transient error O manual The cable on the IN side ae Refer to explanations of SB0067 on the applicable network 804 is disconnected or is not O manual connected The cable on the OUT o Refer to explanations of SB0068 on the applicable network 805 side is disconnected or is O manual not connected 1 Check if the switch settings have no error 850 CC Link switch setting 2 Check error codes stored in SWOO6A 5 error 3 Refer to explanations of SBOO6A on the applicable network manual 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 31 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 32 Channel 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Error Error message Action No code storage 1 Check if terminating resistors are connected 2 Check error co
248. Section 15 1 to 15 2 15 1 Section 16 1 to 16 2 16 1 Chapter 18 Section 18 6 18 3 18 3 to 18 5 18 4 to 18 6 Section 19 1 19 2 Partial additions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 1 2 2 2 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 4 2 4 3 Section 5 3 Section 7 3 1 7 5 1 7 5 2 Section 8 3 Appendix 1 2 4 Additions Section 10 6 Section 12 6 Section 13 2 Apr 2005 Sep 2005 SH NA 080528ENG C SH NA 080528ENG D Partial corrections Section 4 1 4 2 4 3 7 1 2 7 5 2 18 6 Appendix 1 Chapter 5 to 19 6 to 20 Appendix 2 to 4 gt 3 to 5 Additions Chapter 5 Appendix 2 Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 18U Partial corrections Chapter 1 Section 1 1 1 2 Section 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 Section 4 1 to 4 4 Section 5 1 5 1 3 5 2 5 5 4 2 Section 6 3 Section 7 7 4 Section 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 2 8 2 8 3 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 6 2 8 7 3 8 7 4 8 11 8 11 1 Section 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 1 to 9 3 3 Section 10 10 1 2 to 10 1 4 10 2 2 10 2 3 Chapter 11 11 1 11 1 1 to 11 1 3 11 2 2 11 2 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 4 2 11 5 1 to 11 5 3 Section 12 1 1 to 12 1 3 Section 13 13 1 2 13 1 3 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 4 13 3 2 to 13 3 4 13 4 2 13 5 2 13 6 1 to 13 6 3 13 7 13 7 1 13 7 2 13 7 4 13 7 5 Chapter 14 14 1 2 14 2 1 14 3 1 to 14 3 3 14 4 2 14 5 2 14 6 2 14 7 1 14 7 2 Section 15 1 2 Section 16 1 3 Section 17 1 3 Chapter 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 3 1
249. Sound Output Unit 8 6 2 Installation procedure 8 7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit When an additional drive is used the CF card unit or CF card extension unit can be used as the B drive of z the GOT The CF card extension unit is a set of the control panel side installation unit GT15 CFEX and the GOT side u installation unit GT15 CFEXIF When the CF card extension unit is used the control panel side installation unit on the control panel has the CF card interface Therefore when the CF card is inserted or ejected there is no need to open the control panel s door z For using the CF card unit and the CF card extension unit set the communication settings 7 f 8 7 1 Applicable CF card unit and CF card extension unit A cas The following CF card unit and the CF card extension unit are applicable to GT1500 2 Model name Description g GT15 CFCD CF card unit S GT15 CFEX CO8SET CF card extension unit g wn 8 7 2 Installing on GOT Qa Z The section explains how to install the CF card unit or the CF card extension unit on the GOT we The following is an example of installing the CF card unit Ee For installing the CF card extension unit install the GOT side installation unit on the GOT with the same BIE procedure Eo Q Power off the GOT 2 Remove one extension unit covers of the GOT and fit the CF card unit in the GOT case z cE LILO 23a wu gt a Zz fe z Fasten the CF card unit by tighteni
250. Sticker Zz z 2 o Z a Zz O E 8 3 Printer Unit 8 21 8 3 2 Installing procedure Point P 1 Precautions for connecting the dedicated printer connection cable USB cable e Wait 5s or more between the connection and disconnection of the dedicated printer connection cable If connecting or disconnecting the dedicated printer connection cable shortly after disconnecting or connecting the cable the GOT may not operate normally e Do not connect or disconnect the dedicated printer connection cable during printing Doing so can cause the GOT operate incorrectly e Connected printer may not be recognized in rare cases When printer is not recognized disconnect the dedicated printer connection cable once and connect it again e When the printer has been connected to a personal computer and used before it is connected to GOT power on the printer again and connect it to GOT e Any printer cannot be connected to GOT via USB hub e Do not connect any device to the printer while GOT is connected to it e Do not connect any device other than printer to the printer unit 2 Cable connection disconnection When connecting and disconnecting the dedicated printer connection cable leave an interval of at least 3 seconds 3 Printer unit removal To remove the printer unit detach it from specified direction APULL so as not to break the connector 4 Cable clamp e Pulling out the cable clamp band The cable clamp band can b
251. T color liquid mes view crystal Screen size 10 4 Resolution 800 x 600dots 640 x 480dots Display size 211 8 31 W x 158 6 22 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 50 characters x 37 lines 2byte character 12 dot standard font 66 characters x 50 lines 2byte character 16 dot standard font 40 characters 30 lines 2byte character 12 dot standard font 53 characters 40 lines 2byte character GT1575 VN Display aa 256color isplay color section eg GT1572 VN 16color Left Right 45 Left Right Top Left Right Top Display angle Bottom Bottom epaiese p f Top 30 degrees 85 degrees 85 degrees Bottom 20 degrees Intensity of LCD only 400 cd m 380 cd m 200 cd m 4 level Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment i adjustment Lif Approx 50 000 h Approx 41 000 h ife Operating ambient temparature 25 C Operating ambient temparature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set ay Approx 40 000 h or longer Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the Lite operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Matrix resistive film 1 900 objects screen 1 200 objects screen Number of touch keys 38 lines x 50 columns 30 lines x 40 columns Minimum 16 x 16 dots 16 x 8 dots forthe Key size Minimum 16 x
252. T with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an injury Before replacing a backlight allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regurated units Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation REVISIONS Print Date Oct 2004 Manual Number SH NA 080528ENG A The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision First edition Mar 2005 SH NA 080528ENG B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 09K Partial corrections Chapter 6 Section 7 3 2 8 2 to 8 6 8 2 to 8 4 8 4 3 Section 9 1 to 9 3 gt 9 1 to 9 2 Section 10 1 to 10 6 10 1 to 10 5 Section 12 1 to 12 6 12 1 to 12 5 Section 13 1 13 2 to 13 6 gt 13 3 to 13 7 Section 14 1 to 14 2 gt 14 1
253. T15 J71BR13 or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5 C against the maximum values described in general specifications Z 23 1 ZZ 6 5 Installation Procedure o The GOT mounting procedure is as follows For the panel cutting dimensions of each GOT refer to the following 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions z lt a g Q Insert the GOT into the panel opening from the front side COE s58 Soe wu gt a ez GOT z O z l z A 2 D Aha opening WIRING OPTION 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 11 Place the mounting fixtures included with GOT on the mounting fixture attaching part of the GOT and fix them by tightening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the protective sheet Magnified figure Magnified figure For GT1595 X Fix the GOT with 8 mounting fixtures For other than GT1595 X Fix the GOT with 4 mounting fixtures A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is compelted 6 12 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING a gt lt DANGER 2 Before starting wiring always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases Not doing so may cause an electric shock product damage or malfunction a CAUTION 25 Pleas
254. The display example of alarm information Zz Q o Program Data control Alarm information 5 Select drive e A Built in CF card R IPROJECT 1 ESI 5 IGISPC CIRDAT A gt C Flash Memory Zz O 5 Sw 2 3 6 ZOW DiS ZME E Szo 9 i 7 E OF ile a 1A gt CSVB1A gt TXT LOW gt F O Del Copy A Fs ont Vow aT aon Number Item Description The drive which displays file or folder can be selected 1 Select drive When CF card is not installed A Built in CF card and B Memory card are o gt f 2 gt 3 not displayed 5 Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder n F 2 Kind eed ene aii 57 gt In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR oak Ize Displays the file name or folder name ae For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button etc c 13 4 4 EI Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation a eae AND BATTERY 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed e f Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by f 7 The size of drive i Tan f S drive s
255. V Hardware version D April 2005 or earlier Push the CF card eject button of the GOT to lift the CF card and remove it When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 Point P Precautions for removing the CF card 1 While the CF card access LED is on do not install remove the CF card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the CF card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card 3 Do not install remove the CF card while downloading the monitor data or other data by the RS 232 transmission To do so may cause a faulty communication of the GT Designer2 and the data cannot be downloaded normally 8 8 CF Card 8 39 8 8 2 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 8 3 CF card inserting removing method with CF card unit Install remove a CF card while the GOT power or the CF card access switch is OFF Installation Open the CF card cover and turn off the CF card access switch of the unit y A Insert the CF card into the CF card connector with the face out f A Turn on the CF card access switch 8 40 8 8 CF Card 8 8 3 CF card inserting r
256. WK Unit Status Display 14 8 1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display The network unit status display is a function that uses the communication units below to monitor the network status e MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 e CC Link IE controller network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 The LED status or error status of a network module can be checked For the corrective actions for errors that occur on the network refer to the following manual lt gt The Reference Manual of the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network system PLC to PLC network to be used CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual The User s Manual of the CC Link system master local module to be used 14 8 2 Displaying the NETWK unit status display Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt 9 3 Utility Display Touch Touch NETWK unit status Debug amp self check display NETWK unit status display Debug self check Self check NETWK unit GT15 J71LP23 25 NETWK No 1 STL 2 lt LED status gt lt Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt RUN E Op Normal Transmission Err 0 Normal ErrCode RLoopBK Sta No per Loop Back No per lt D Link Info gt Com Status D Link in prog Dovodom n DODD m Cause of Ssp Normal Comm OOA i o o a caer Sz mo 5 G HAD OR Cause of Stop Norma SAESHI
257. Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display C GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Point gt Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for 14 days after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that 8 11 4 Battery life 1 9 4 19 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight When replace the backlight refer to 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT GOT set up Refer to the following for details C gt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 Replacement time of backlight The backlight replacement time can be set by the utility of GOT Maintenance timing setting with reference to the life of backlight Refer to the following for details lt 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING Moreover when system alarm is u
258. a E J j x E decent zi E A i N ke Changes the 3 i number a number to number a 2 Q o certain the touched certain 2 ae Zz amountin the position amountinthe a E direction direction Oo2Zn 11 Touching Default returns to the default status When touching Copy CH1 the image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No is matched with the image quality settings zZ Ovn EO s wE oO W On for Channel No 1 CH1 n o When touching the Confirm button the ae setting contents are determined vo 8 Sok E If you touch the X button without touching the button the dialog box 9 on the left is displayed gt z A gt 48 TO After completing all the items to set if you e ae aae aS touch the X button the display returns to Do you want to proceed the preview screen O ani O Gh After completing the settings for all the ep items you want to change in the video 5 O0 an a display settings wnan closing Video Display Preview with the X button the display returns to Video RGB Setting Z 58 po On H pa P tions for settin z recau Point g Eas j Incorrect settings may disrupt or stop the video image oa If this happens returning the settings to their default values restores normal display This phenomenon depends on the video camera or other device
259. ace USB Full Speed 12 Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function CF card Compact flash slot 1ch Connector shape TYPE 1 Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Multi color display board 1 For multi color display board mounting Cannot be used Even installed 65536 ch colors will not be displayed Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP67 Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions Excluding USB environmental 241 9 49 W x190 7 48 H x52 2 05 D mm inch protective cover Panel cutting dimensions 227 8 94 W x176 6 93 H mm inch Weight 1 9 kg 4 2lb mounting fixtures are not included oe lee ee 4 2 3 4 5 6 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colo
260. advance Failure to do so disables the backup setting with Rise set 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 11 13 3 Trigger backup setting operation 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY The clock display setting items and the time when displayed the setting screen are displayed While displaying clock and the seting screen the display time does not change The voltage status of the built in battery is also displayed 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible en Reference Function Description page f Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock Clock setting 12 3 data of controller connected to the GOT Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data 12 5 GOT internal battery voltage g Displays GOT internal battery voltage status 12 6 status Point gt Changing times When the time is changed on the Time setting amp display screen the changed time is written in a programmable controller even though Adjust or Broadcast is set for Clock setting As a result the time of the programmable controller can be changed on the GOT even though Adjust is set for Clock setting The clock data of the controller set as Adjust CH No of Clock data GOT is matched to clock data External Adjust in System Environment
261. ae y S elf check Touch z Touch Touch panel check Rea Debug amp self check Z 9 ZHE toh ep 2 Eug HES Starts Touch panel check Sap lt ob When touch Touch panel check of Display check Touch panel check starts Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY Point P Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure x Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 14 14 6 1 Touch panel check function 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations If touch Touch panel check of self check a black filled screen is displayed over the entire screen area Touch a part of the screen The touched part becomes a yellow filled display I Black filled screen 2 If touch the upper left part returns to the self check Upper left touch position Remark Checking the upper left part of the screen Ro Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returnes to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 4 15 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations 14 7 V O Check Zz O o
262. al judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT Standard applied to GOT EN61131 2 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests EN60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment 5 2 2 Power supply The insulation specification of the GOT was designed assuming installation category Il Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the GOT The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by lightning strike Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest durability lt 4 gt lt gt lt 4 gt lt 4 gt Category IV Category III Category II Category Installation Category Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution 5 6 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 5 2 3 Control panel Because the GOT is open type equipment device designed to be stored within another device be sure to use it only when installed in a control panel 1 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control panel a Store the GOT within the control panel locked and allow onl
263. al I O interface module correctly firmly installed Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD BIN value is 345 BCD BIN conversion error being displayed input O Correct data 1 Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value 2 Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal ee 1 Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the memory Recipe file error Confirm 351 ae card x content of recipe file f re 2 Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the memory card format Recipe file make error aor Failed to generate recipe file 352 Reboot GOT after x j Reboot the GOT after installing the memory card inserting memory card Failed to write in the recipe file Unable to write Recipe i f 1 Confirm the write protection of the memory card 353 file Confirm memory card i X He id 2 Confirm the contents of the memory card is inserted 3 Do not pull out the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error ahs x Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file Ne 1 Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating 355 Recipe file read error f ee x 2 Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the memory card Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function
264. amp If touch mg PEC SGOT button the screen z m Process 1 settini shown left is displayed u For changing the record comment of i Si aZ lt r gt AC hi saving destination input the record 112431 4 516 7 8 910 comment i x By touching the following button input 9 A ani A SIDIEN GTH JKE A CBIN titer Ez Eros cee He a z English minuscule 3 0 9 Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol z can not be inputted uE a O If record comment is not changed it is g a i Z gt not need to input Zz n Wi oa Continued to next page Zz O wg E Zu l iQ zw le lt x SEO 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 61 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 62 Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Do you want to save record Process completed 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation B If touch the O If touch the record Enter button the dialog shown left is displayed OK button starts saving 6 When saving is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the dialog OK button closes the Record match operation Z Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller S After executing loading saving with ad
265. and select the drive to format by E drive selection ZQg L Z 2a SE ui If touch Format button the password O20 input screen is displayed a Fara s g tez 8 Zz i Caution 4 Type 1 1 1 1 and touch the Enter EiS If execute format operation all data key The dialog box shown on the left will a G on the CF card will be initialized o fi boa Please do rot remove CF card appeal The password is Kes to 1111 3 while formatting Confirm the contents of the dialog asa Format the CF card When execute the memory card format 3 touch OK button When cancel the memory card format ok cance touch Cancel button eee ea N AND BATTERY 6 If touch OK button by the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm Format now xe O O Reconfirm whether to format the memory T card i If touch OK button starts formatting 2 O If touch Cancel button cancels OK Cancel formatting Zz O 38 2 Za wo oa O wg 2g E se Zu le SEB 13 6 Memory Card Format 1 3 43 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format Format is complete Remark Restrictions on formatting QBs e When use an unformatted memory card in GOT format the memory card by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted memory card e The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 of the memory card and inherits the file system b
266. and touch switches O O Added common settings object functions ie Version of GT Item Description i Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 Corresponding to the overlap window displa Window screen p 9 p pay 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 Oo Oo and the superimpose display Figure Supporting piping 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 00 Oo Oo The clock data storage to the GD device is Clock function p 3 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O O possible Numerical Display Format String setting is possible 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O O Numerical input ASCII input The ASCII input can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 O Comment F Disol The simple comment is added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O O isplay Lamp Display Comment Group can be used 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 Oo Oo Auto repeat can be used 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O Oo Touch switch Comment Group can be used 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O O The statistics bar graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 O Graph The statistics pie graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 O Enables selecting whether to set the scrolling Alarm history comment display suitable for the message 2 63R Standard monitor OS 01 06 O O display display area Comment group can be used 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O O Scrolling alarm S The scrolling alarm display applicable 2 73B Standard monito
267. anguage switching device can be used Switching Device 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O Password can be set for the connection of f 7 Password Setting i D 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo x Oo motion controller and servo amplifier System information of report function and F 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 x x O print are added System D drive automatic recovery status A 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x x Oo information notification signal is added System information regarding B drive has 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x been added The name Password is changed to f p ae 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 Oo Oo x Security in the system environment Security Enables setting the operator Extended function OS ses 2 58L ee O O x authentication Operator authentication 03 03 In clock management both adjust and 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo x Oo broadcast can be set Data save device of MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor data can be set at GT 2 18U O x x Designer2 Automatic program read at the start of ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 2 43V O x x Priority Level Comment can be set Time setting for call key ON until the start up of utility can be set for 1 point 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x pressing SOT Sep Alarm can be set to be displayed in system language switching or battery 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O Oo drops Enables the backu
268. ase turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times 505 Warning Built in Flash ROM needs replacement soon The dedicated GS is notifying that the built in flash memory writing times have reached 80 or more of the set times The GOT must be replaced In that case Data backup and re setting are needed The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times 506 Warning Backlight needs replacement The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached the set time or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time 507 Warning Display section needs replacement The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached the set time or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 27 ADDITION T
269. at the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item In this manual with a few special exceptions explanations are given primarily using the GT1575 V screens 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility or system alarms When touching the Languag button the Select Language screen is displayed gt aa English PM ie PECA Hz Deutsch Q Touch the button of a language to be displayed and then The gt mark moves OK button and the language is selected a 9 3 Utility Display 9 5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTING CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING z O O Z Ww gt SETTINGS STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Touching the X button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one 1 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters Point gt When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected
270. ata Control nformation ECT e Touch and select the file to copy pt tay TEFA gt er pi m 1K 06 05 01 15 6 Touch the Copy button Zz O au 226 Ele 820 M iz 1SKB 15632KB File piL gt cs Copy Move Ersate BIL TXT Del Rerane Sz dae ata C nformatio Eeg i LECT EE Select the target folder 43 Z a L co0001 1K 06 05 01 15 26 A Selecting a folder is not needed for Gay GIL LOGO0002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 on TE O90000 tat MOST Tae outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists B gt Select other folders Fe z WEG lt a 2 Sak IZE T Ootn I2OKB ISGG2KE File 1 3 Please select destination ce lescenl o Z gt If touch Excute button the followin 5 Target file LOGO0001_0001 61L oe g D Do you want to copy the file dialog shown left is displayed O Touch OK button iz While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 W ani oO S W ep 5 0 If there is a file of the same name in the Target file LOGOO001_0001 61L O pan Do you want to overwrite the fi le copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the ae O copy GH If touch the OK button overwrites the aa to file w y oa If touch Cancel button cancels to copy Zz fe wg SRS SE l HOL Continued to next page pal Eal ZEM 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 75 13 8 4 Logging information operatio
271. ation check confirm the e peiaa UES following ee ee anar TE e No misconnection with CPU Seo aZ amp gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3 3 6 Verifying GOT recognizes controllers T e No missettings of parameter z C 10 2 Communication Detail Settings amp e No hardware error i L 20 TROUBLESHOOTING u TO If touch OK button in the dialog After confirming the result returns to I O check 14 x Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 7 I O Check 1 4 1 14 7 3 I O Check Operation i Self loopback If touch Self the hardware check of RS 232 interface is carried out For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check Customer purchased shown in the diagram right in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins and 4 and 6 pins respectively Display unit rear face In the communication setting of the GOT utility set the channel number for the RS 232 interface to 0 None RS 232 interface After selecting Self the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback connector When the RS232 communication check GOT cannot receive the data during the data transmission Error the dialog shown right appears and the GOT restarts in five The following cause e g g pp Connection
272. ation method using the program data control function 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS 1 BootOS installation When installing BootOS GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which is already installed If the major version of BootOS to be installed is old execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten When installing from GT Designer2 a message is displayed on the personal computer screen Follow the instructions in that message a When only BootOS is stored in the CF card The message indicating disabled installation is displayed Boot OS has been already installed Existing OS Ver 01 01 B Expected OS Ver 01 00 A Because of version down GOT aborts installing ox Touch the OK button to cancel installation After canceling installation restart the GOT b When BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS are stored in the CF card Skip the BootOS installation and install standard monitor OS and other OS If the standard monitor OS is already stored on the GOT the following message is displayed Boot OS has been already installed Exsisting 0S Ver 01 01 B Expected 0 Ver 01 01 B Exsisting basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install ok Cancel Touching the OK button executes installation Touching the Cancel butto
273. ation of OS information 0 00 02 13 11 13 3 Project Information 13 16 13 3 1 Functions of the project information 0 ete 13 16 13 3 2 Display operation of project information 00000 cee eee 13 17 13 3 3 Display example of project information 0 0 eee 13 18 13 3 4 Operation of project information 0 0 cee 13 19 13 4 Alarm Information 13 28 13 41 Function of alarm information 0 aus er oa e Ea eee 13 28 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information 00000 eee eee eee 13 28 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 00000 0c eee eee eee 13 29 13 4 4 Alarm information operation auaa auaa aeaaea 13 30 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 36 13 5 1 The function of hardcopy information 00 0 cee eee eee 13 36 13 5 2 The display operation of hardcopy information 0 0000 eee 13 36 13 5 3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information 0000 00 e eee eee eee eee 13 37 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information 0 0000 eee eee 13 38 13 6 Memory Card Format 13 42 13 6 1 Function of the memory card format 0 0 0 eee 13 42 13 6 2 Display operation of memory card format 00000 cee eee 13 42 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format 00 00 cece eee eee 13 43 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 45 13 7 1 Function of advanced recipe information aaua c cee
274. ay area of ChNo 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 1 1 29 11 8 1 Function of the transparent mode COMMUNICATION Py INTERFACE PF SETTING Zz On EO s wi E oO W On CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 8 3 Operation the transparent mode GOT setup Transparent mode With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Touching the transparent ChNo numerical part on the left the keyboard is displayed Input numerical value by the keyboard Touching the OK button reflects the selected setting Touching the DX button without touching the OK button displays the dialog mentioned left is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with P lt button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 1 1 30 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 11 8 3 Operation the transparent mode 11 9 Video Unit Settings Zz amp 5 j m gt i i i GT1585 GT1575 S 11 9 1 Functions of the video unit settings 5 The video input signal and resolution can be selected 6 z Item Description Setting range 7 w EgO Input
275. ayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared Point P To display correct time JAS Remark Set the clock of GOT 12 1 Time Setting and Display When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change 1 4 35 14 10 GOT Start Time 14 10 3 Display of GOT start time 14 11 Operator Information Management Zz fe o The operator information management is a function to display a list of the operator information and add 5 change or delete the operator information to be used for the operator authentication a For details of the operator authentication refer to the following manual lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 3 5 Set Password Items Description
276. ays the size of the file displayed in Name z 6 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive x O 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 8 9 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders 4 D gt 8 Point gt About the displayed file The files other than that for advanced recipe are not displayed on the advanced recipe information screen 55 O Lu Remark 2 Remark Folders and files displayed 25 A r Z W m For the folders and files displayed refer to the following ag 13 1 5 Display file z fe wg E an Ze oO wz Zu z lt x SEG 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display 13 47 Advanced recipe record list screen Touching the Excute button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the advanced recipe file this screen appears Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved loaded rogram Data Control Advanced Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Record List A PROJECT 1 REC I PE 1 ARPO0001 G1P 1 File Name Setting No Name Recipe No 1 Leste rocess 3 setting a Process 4 setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 k i Load r
277. begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods 2 For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the advanced recipe information screen the file other than that for advanced recipe is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer etc 1 3 66 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 5 Precautions Precautions for operation z 1 Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc 5 Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed s Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the 5 folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF L card access switch has been turned OFF 2 While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc ae When folder file processing for the advanced recip is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other Sti E file CF card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the Advanced Recipe 820 after the processing for other file
278. between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the memory card storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended The version of each OS installed in the GOT can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen Name 0S Name G1OSMONT OUT 1342K asic 03 03 65 01 22 07 15 33 i Standard monitor 05 GIFI6STM FON 530K asic 03 03 50 01 22 07 15 33 16dot Standard Mincho Font Japanese S G1F12STG FON 406K asic 03 03 50 01 22 07 15 33 Explanation of OS version 12dot Standard Gothic Font Japanese S10SMONT G1D 2K asic 03 03 65 01 22 07 15 33 01 00 00A System Screen Information a Ra i a f G1OSMONT GI 745K asic 03 03 65 01 22 07 15 33 L_ BootOS version System Screen Data GIF TTNMG FON 40K asic 03 03 50 01 22 07 15 33 Appears only when the property True Type Numerical Font G1 SFRISG FON 519K Option 03 03 50 01 22 07 15 33 of the BootOS is displayed Stroke Font Japanese A GLSFRBOG FON 9 Option 03 03 51 01 22 07 15 34 Minor version Stroke Font Chinese Traditional i i G1OSSTRK OUT 109K Extend 03 03 50 01 22 07 15 34 Major version Str Font Support Data G1SF FON 737K Extend 03 03 50 01 22 07 15 34 St e Standard Font Chinese Simplified G10SAU 0 207K Extend 03 03 64 01 22 07 15 34 Operator authentication G10S4U G1D 1K Extend 03 03 64 01
279. ble solderless terminal Solderess terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal screw 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 4 PART NAME AND SETTINGS OVERVIEW 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a SPECIFICATIONS ja Z lt x lw n Fao zz HE Pam Zo EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 1 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 1 POWER LED i Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen For connecting a personal computer 4 USB i
280. ble to only GT1585V S and GT1575V S Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup data 11 8 11 11 11 12 Setting the trigger backup 11 13 Time setting amp display Selecting a base clock Displaying and setting the clock current time Displaying the battery status 12 Continued to next page 9 2 Utility Function List Program data control Item Functions overview Reference OS information Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property checking OS data 13 2 Project Downloading uploading deleting copying project files displaying project 13 3 Information file property checking project file data Deleting or copying alarm log files Alarm i Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV TXT format 13 4 information Displaying graphs of alarm log files Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving advanced recipe files creating a new advanced Advanced recipe file Recipe Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders changing advanced recipe 13 7 information folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list Converting logging files in G1L format CSV TXT format Logging 13 8 information Deleting copying moving logging files changing
281. by specifying the file register name File system error occurred 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file 356 in PLC Confirm file register name x register 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 21 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 22 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the Error in specified PLC 7 357 specified PLC CPU drive XxX drive Confirm PLC drive s 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the 958 PLC file access failure specified PLC CPU drive file register name When you Confirm PLC drive specify drive 0 execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives 2 Confirm whether the memory card is wri
282. cUy Delo E e n gt 2 gt 3 E fe aE mi WEG xg 2 Sok oar hd 13 L155 72KB 0KB ile Please select destination Dak F z i pa E If touch the Excute button the dialog 5 m File conversion from G10 to CSV shown left is displayed u Source file Touch the OK button i OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Whil P Change to While executing Processing OPELOG_20060310_0002 CSV message appears on the screen Change file format S f8 W ep O 0 5 Example Dialog if the G L1O gt TXT button is touched 5 5 33 gt z3 Continued to next page 5 a 3a Zz O wg te ae ze oO Oz eur SEG 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 97 13 11 4 Operation log information operation i is th m File conversion from G10 to CSV wnan the file WHOSE name is the 3a os Source file exists in the destination folder the dialog em shown left appears without starting the ange to OPELOG_20060310_0002 CSV conversion If touch the button Do you want to overwrite the file overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels the ok Cancel conversion O The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed If touch button the dialog is closed Process completed 1 3 98 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Delete operation Folder and file to be used on operation log are deleted Progra
283. cable to GT1500 Model Description GT15 SOUT Sound output unit 8 6 2 Installation procedure The sound output unit can be installed on the GOT with other extension units For installing the sound output unit with other extension units refer to the following after implementing the steps described in this section One sound output unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers Cable connection Connect a cable of an external speaker to the sound output unit external speaker Attach the cable clamp to the unit Be sure to attach the cable clamp to section A as shown in the following figure with its band positioned outside until it clicks Put the band of the cable clamp through the hole of the cable clamp in the direction of the arrow The RST 1NB manufactured by TAKEUCHI INDUSTRY CO LTD is applicable as the cable clamp 8 28 8 6 Sound Output Unit 8 6 1 Applicable sound output unit Put the cable of the external speaker through the looped cable clamp band and pull the band for fixing the cable MAIAYSAO NOILVYNDISANOO WALSAS Cable clamp SNOILVOISIOSdS Unit installation Turn off the GOT 2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT SONILLAS ANY AWVN Lavd AAILOSYIC ASVLIOA MOI ANY OWS Fit the sound output unit in the GOT case NOILYTIYLSNI 4 Tighten two soun
284. ce of the GOT 8 18 8 2 RS 422 Conversion Unit 8 2 1 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit 8 3 Printer Unit Printer unit is used for connecting a printer to GOT z To connect the printer unit make Communication Settings gt For details of connection refer to the following manual u O L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Zz 8 3 1 Printer unit type ao 55 The following type of printer unit can be used for GT1500 Po O Model name Description HiS GT15 PRN 83g including connector holder and cable clamp 2 8 3 2 Installing procedure e T O This section describes how to install printer on GOT a A printer unit and another extension unit can be installed on a GOT together Refer to the following item after implementing the steps described in this section One printer unit can be installed at either 1st to 3rd stage of the exteded interface f 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers z 23 Cable connection 22 aa Q Connect the dedicated printer connection cable to the printer unit O Sow 25 s53 205S wWw gt Q Dedicated printer connection cable 6 2 Attach the accessory connector holder to the dedicated printer connection cable and tighten the screw z of connector holder with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48N m a o Z a OPTION 8 3 Printer Unit 19 8 3 1 Printer unit type 8 Depending on the use environment such as wh
285. ch recipe device value is set The advanced recipe setting is not correct Advanced Recipe error i 591 Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and x Check recipe data f download it to the GOT again Logging file error 595 Logging file error When collecting data again delete logging files and x management files f The logging setting specified in the historical trend graph Logging setting does not setting does not exist 596 exist or setting value i x Sirot Review the historical trend graph setting and specify a logging l setting that exists The version of OS installed in the GOT is not compatible with 600 Unsupported version of the printer unit 7 printer unit Install the extended function OS Printer with the latest GT Designer2 The printer unit is installed incorrectly The built in flash memory of the printer unit is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed 601 Printer unit error Check that the printer unit is installed correctly x When the printer unit has been installed correctly the built in flash memory is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed Replace the printer unit with new one 602 Video RGB unit not 1 Check if the video RGB input unit is installed X mounted 2 Check if the GOT used supports video RGB input 603 External I O unit error Check if the external I O unit is correctly installed x 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Er
286. character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON e NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used e The folder name which begins with G1 e Folder name and file name which begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods 2 For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the operation log information screen the file other than that for operation log is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer etc 1 3 108 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 5 Precautions Precautions for operation z E 1 Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc z Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the gt folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF L card access switch has
287. cial data information operation Touch and select the file to delete B If touch the Delete button the screen mentioned left is displayed Check if the deletion target file is specified correctly Touching the OK button deletes the file Touching the Cancel button cancels the deletion When the detection is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch the OK button the dialog is closed Property display operation z E Displays the property of selected special data Q T Program Data control Special data information Property Z Date 00 01 05 Author QD Touch the Property button after selecting a 5 rawing S W version GT Designer Version 15R E B 400 068ADV Q68AD1 064AD Op Monitor special data to display Property as shown 5 3 DV Q68AD Q64AD 1 0 Moni tor V Q68AD Q64AD Graph Mon left Q62DA 064D4 Operation Moni tor yee In Property display the following information QD62D OD62E AD62 Op Mon yt O OD62E 0062 1 0 Monitor is displayed 5D Operation Monitor x 0 Monitor 8 D Basic parameters 1 5 ao Basic parameters 2 S a 2 5D Detailed para 1 1 Su E Detailed para 1 2 OE i etai led para 2 1 Item Description O20 Jetal led para 2 2 D a bse eater Date Displays date and time of file creation 1 0 signa Status Axis monitor data Author Di
288. ck whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse r 7 EYN To a Pattern 1of 3 Move check among screens 1 4 9 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 3 Drawing check operation Move check among screens a Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal UTILITY FUNCTION Vo COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Pattern 1 b Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Yor Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY x O W E O i w W 7 O oO Pattern 2 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 4 Drawing Check 1 4 10 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 14 11 c Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlaped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed d Pattern 4 Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check scree
289. configuration check sheet checked in this A section a Please keep copies of the restoration sheets is a Zz 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 1 GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from 1 GOT status Proceed as instructed by Action 1 Status of the GOT Phenomenon Cause status Action a Frequency when the GOT does not operate an error occurs on the screen etc Occurrence frequency Example Once a month O Occurs always O Occurs sometimes Proceed to 1 b b Checking of the displayed error code system alarm Error code system alarm Example 460 Communication unit error O Can be checked O Cannot be checked Take the action for the error code system alarm or error message checked If the status does not change after the action is taken proceed to 1 c Proceed to 1 c c POWER LED O Lit in green The power is supplied normally Proceed to 1 d Screen saving is being performed O Lit in orange forced screen saving status The read device of the system information may have been turned ON when the device was set and the screen was switched to the Check the setting of the read device When no problem is found in the setting proceed to 1 d The backlight has run out O Blinks in green orange Replace the backlight If the GOT is not restored proceed to 1 d The po
290. connected z Use setting values that provide proper display tee Zw S24 11 10 Video Display Settings 1 1 37 11 10 3 Operating the video display settings 11 11 RGB Display Settings 11 11 1 Functions of the RGB display settings V S V S The RGB clock phase and screen position can be set Item Description The RGB clock phase and screen RGB Display Settings position horizontal direction and vertical direction can be set are unclear 11 11 2 Displaying the RGB display settings Setting range ClockPhase 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Display position Horizontal 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Vertical 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Adjust when a noise is displayed along the horizontal direction or characters are blotted or the contours Main Menu 9 3 Utility Display Touch GOT setup Touch Communication Settings Video RGB Setting L gt 10 1 Communication Setting y Touch RGB Display Settings Video RGB 1 1 38 11 11 RGB Display Settings 11 11 1 Functions of the RGB display settings Video RGB Setting Default Confirm Touch an item to be set 11 11 3 Operating the RGB display settings zZ O S The clock phase and screen display T i i gt position horizontal direction vertical S direction can be changed 5 ClockPhase 000 Ej E e 4 Display Position eegecnantan N Horizont 14000 Ej bai
291. connection Supporting connection to KV 3000 and Communication driver 2 77F O x x O KV 5000 KEYENCE KV700 1000 03 12 s rti tion to SHARP PLC 2 09K Communication driver upporting connection to r SHARP PLC ie SHARP JW 01 02 O i x 0 connection Supporting settings for the number of Communication driver i i 2 73B O x x o retries and the timeout time SHARP JW 03 09 Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2 09K TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O x x O 01 02 Communication driver TOSHIBA PLC Supporting settings for the number of f f 2 73B TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O x x O connection retries the timeout time and delay time 03 09 f Communication driver Supporting connection to 2 77F TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O x x O model2000 S2T 03 12 TOSHIBA i Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA o MACHINE PLC 2 77F TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini O x x O MACHINE PLC connection 03 12 JTEKT PLC i Communication driver Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2 32J x x O connection JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 03 00 Communication driver s rti tion to HITACHI PLC 209K HITACHI HIDIC H 01 02 upporting connection to Pens HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 O x x HITACHI IES PLC 01 02 connection Communication driver Supporting settings for the number of HITACHI HIDIC H 03 09 i 2 73B O x x o retries the timeout time and delay time HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 03 09 HITACHI PLC Communication
292. controller The following gives the instructions to ensure the machinery comply with the EMC Directive However the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives 5 22 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product a For RS 422 485 cable e Each signal wire excluding SG and FG should be made into a two power wires and connected then twisted SDA pone RDA a Se j ae DAS S SDA a Se p e Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect e Peel the sheath with the length shown below of the created cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side PLC side 230 or less 1 57 9 06 Unit mm inch b For RS 232 cable e Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire except SG FG with SG BD le ee sees D a E E eee ar prR 22s eee Bee DSR 1 gt DTR SG sG e Peel the sheath with the length shown below of the created cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side PLC side i 230 or less 9 06 1 57 Unit mm inch 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant 5 23 Product Ww a ar O gt
293. cording to the layout and procedures described in Section 13 3 3 Display and Operation of Drawing Check When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 1 4 7 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 1 Drawing check function 14 4 3 Drawing check operation Zz fe The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching Drawing check on the Display check menu S m r gt Before execute drawing check 5 e Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during drawing check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the 5 Display check screen ae Upper left touch Upper right touch Ere position position ZME Szi Q 2 LOV Ais Q Missing bit Color Check aon By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order black red gt purple gt green light blue gt yellow white gz Check missing bit and color visually Fu 5 PEE lt o 5 PaE SE O lt Light blue Yellow To 2 Basic figure check screen If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following 2 Basic figure check screen is displayed Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY a Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 14 4 Drawing Check 1 4 8 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 2 Basic figure check Che
294. creen o Japanese and Chinese Simplified fonts cannot be installed at the same time w 26 He 2 WwW f i afa ae CaS OF oS uct APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 19 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Appendix 4 1 Relevant models The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below Battery for GOT1000 Series GT15 BAT Lithium battery Non dangerous goods Appendix 4 2 Transportation guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company App 20 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive icp U w For using a CF card select the A or B drive according to the following TE Ot fi a 1 A drive ane The CF card interface built in the GOT is used as the A drive 2 Bdrive te The following two units can be used as the B drive z 2 CF card unit ao When an additional drive is used use the CF card unit as the B drive of the GOT 296 CF card extension unit 288 When an additional drive is used use the CF card extens
295. creen scrolls up down by one screen Touching lt lt button returns the screen to the previous screen display Data check operation z Carries out data check of the selected system file S m Dialog at data check normal Touch Data check button after selecting a Z data check target file 5 Data normal The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check Zz O 2 Touching OK button closes the dialog E She PEE Dialog at data check abnormal Q Data error som Zee aE icp AOO w FEA OK maA ok O lt ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 2 OS Information 1 3 15 13 2 4 Operation of OS information 13 3 Project Information 13 3 1 Functions of the project information The project data files stored in each drive A standard CF card B Extended memory card C memory can be displayed by lists In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc built in flash Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size the creation date and time of the file or folder 13 18 13 19 Delete Deletes project data 13 39 Copy Copies project data can copy between the A drive and B drive or in each drive 13 20 Displays the project data c
296. creen size 5 7 Resolution 640 x 480dots 320 x 240dots Display size 115 4 53 W x 86 3 39 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 40 characters x 30 lines 2byte characters 12 dot standard font 53 characters x 40 lines 16 dot standard font 20 characters x 15 lines 2byte characters 12 dot standard font 26 characters x 20 lines 2byte characters Display 2byte characters section x Display color 65536color 4096color monochrome 16 level 1 Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right 80 degrees 70 degrees 55 degrees 45 degrees Top Top Top Top Display angle 80 degrees 70 degrees 65 degrees 20 degrees Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom 70 degrees 50 degrees 70 degrees 40 degrees Intensity of LCD only 350 cd m 400 cd m 380 cd m 220 ed m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Contrast adjustment None 16 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube nonreplaceable backlight shutoff detection function is included ackli Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 58 000 h or longer Approx 75 000 h or longer Time when display Life Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient luminance reaches temperature of 25 C 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Type Matrix resistive film 1200 objects screen Touch panel
297. ct Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information g Download operation setup operation o 1 Download operation z Transfers the project data stored in the A drive Standard CF Card or B drive Extended memory card to the C drive Built in flash memory The GOT monitors using the data in the C drive z This item explains using the A drive Point P Before download operation a 1 Setup cancel Su When the project data in the A drive or B drive is set up the project data cannot Sg g LZ be downloaded to the C drive zue zZ Execute setup cancel 3 gt 2 Setup cancel before downloading the project welt data 2 Project data to be stored in a CF card When storing the project data from GT Designer2 to CF card select C Built in B flash memory for Project Data in the Boot Drive S eS BE Communicate with Memory Card O 5 a Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Untitled Project GOT Tye AE i Base Screen g Ss z C Common settings Boot Drive E fr a C Communication Settings Project Data m 2 Standard monitor OS CBuitin Flash Memoy lt n s C Communication diver 8 a R s J Extended function 0S a Z a Option 05 ORR ewl F 0 Intelligent unit monitor data p 4 C A motion monitor data 3 1 3 s C Servo amplifier monitor data C Buitin Flash Memoy I m zZ lt z a 5 m i Progran Data control Special data information petect
298. cting a personal computer Project data upload download OS 4y installation FA transparent function Ze 5 Built in p ow Soe interface Compact flash slot 1ch w gt a CF card Connector shape TYPE Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch z Cannot be used z Multi color display Even installed z For multi color display board mounting 1ch i 2 board 65536 colors will not be displayed Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 5 o Protective structure Z Inside the enclosure IP2X T External dimensions Excluding USB environmental 303 11 93 W x 214 8 43 H x 49 1 93 D mm inch protective cover Panel cutting dimensions 289 11 38 W x 200 7 87 H mm inch Continued to next page a 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 8 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 3 9 Item Specifications GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD Weight 2 3 kg 5 1Ib mounting fixtures are not included 2 4 kg 5 3lb mounting fixtures are not included 2 3 kg 5 1Ib mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package GT Designer2 Version 2 32J or later GT1575 STBA 2 04E or
299. d z On EO nS wi E oO W On CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY D If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with lt x button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 7 11 1 3 Display setting operations Language Touch the setting item to display the Select sce Language screen T Min O None OFF Stine Effect ive a When touching the button of a desired language the language is selected and the Axe g English screen returns to the Display screen PAID PICARD va O Deutsch C 5 P Ca Touching the OK button determines the ees set contents The displayed language will not be changed until is performed 1 1 8 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK Cance D If touch x button without touching OK button the dialog mentioned left is displayed If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with DX button GOT restarts and reflects the sett
300. d does not match to the device value of controller the dialog shown left is displayed Device value delete operation Z The device value of selected record is deleted without value and changed to record only for reading S The record name is not deleted re E x es E ee pe 71 Select the recipe file and touch the ARPOOOO 6 05 15 17 Excute button Zz O au 30 Piece o SER 620 nee F 1 Fil eae Copy Move Crente Execute a BIP TXT Del Rename sate 22 gt E 0 TaZ dae Data Contr d Recipe Informa st om Ga Fi l Nane A PROVECT INRECIPET ARPOOOO1 GP As the Advanced Recipe Record List ao m etting No P w Nane Meine No screen is displayed select the record Process settInE comment to be deleted 3 Process 3 setting e E 4 P Process 4 setting If the data of which attribution contains B gt P can not be deleted Ee z HEG In lt a 5 Sok oar U 13 m Load record Save record Match records Delete Device zZ GOT PLC PLC GOT GOTPLC alue lt z al 5 Delete Dvice A O Record Noi 1 If touch the Pesut button the dialog a Record Comment Process 1 setting shown left is displayed T Are you sure you want to delete 4 If touch the OK button starts deleting device value The Processing message is 5 displayed on the
301. d for these models since they do not support the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 1 Q QnA ladder monitor setting function 11 7 2 Display operation of Q QnA ladder monitor 0 9 Main menu GOT setup Z gt E Touch GOT setup Touch Q QnA ladder monitor 3 Su ZQg Sane SE ui Q QnA ladder monitor Betas Select the ladder data storage location of the Q QnA ladder monitor z E8 lt 2 wi E Q W On ep 2 3 F HEG sa 2 Sok O25 Q Z e lt P gt Point gt Restart after setting change a If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the lt lt button after the oe setting of each item is changed and touch the lt j button on the GOT setup screen TS the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings amp If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the tw setting contents are canceled without reflected T z 0 Carati If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected ks Q QnA ladder monitor Transparent mode fej Backup restoration setting 5 5 9 a 2 Bio oa Zz fe wg 2g Zu zZ EB z SEY 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 27 11 7 2 Display operation of Q QnA ladder monitor 11 7 3 Q QnA ladder monitor setting operation 11 28 With do not push OK button if you close the scr
302. d output unit mounting screws with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48N m ONIXIM oo NOILdO 8 29 8 6 Sound Output Unit 8 6 2 Installation procedure O When installing an extension unit on the outer layer refer to the following 37 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer cover the top of mounting screws 4 places with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity Keep the connector cover and sticker fixed as shown in the following figure Accessory sticker O Sticker Connector cover Point gt 1 Precautions for connecting external speakers Do not connect or disconnect the cable of the external speaker during sound outputs Do not connect any devices other than external speakers to the sound output unit 2 Removing sound output unit When removing the sound output unit tilt A PULL of the unit and remove the unit so as not to break the connector 3 Cable clamp e Removing cable clamp band The cable clamp band can be removed after the cable of the external speaker is fixed with the cable clamp Pull out the cable clamp band with the tab of the cable clamp pushed up using a tool including screwdrivers e Removing from sound output unit The cable of the external speaker can be removed even though the cable is fixed with the cable clamp Remove the cable clamp by pressing it in both directions arrow A 8 30 8 6
303. d position and the object position occurs correct the position 11 with this function Before adjustment After adjustment 7 Run pSto Run 3top gt 3 zZ On EO nS wE oO W On n i O gt The Run will operate though you The Stop button can be touched e a intended to touch the Stop button without fail m E 2 n a Lo 11 6 2 Touch panel calibration setting display operation 5a Bae rae Main menu GOT setup Operation settings Q LF 9 3 Utility Display Z gt ak a Touch Touch u GOT setup Operation Touch TO Touch panel calibration x O W ani Touch panel calibration 2 Touch panel calibration ay O O0 Zz 0 58 On Z gt Perform touch panel zs adjustment in D oa Zz O wg ge gt 27 mo Zu z SEY 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration 1 1 23 Setting 11 6 3 Touch panel calibration operation 11 24 Touch the x point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting Touch the x point displayed on the upper left Be sure to touch the center of the D lt precisely B Touch the x point displayed on the upper right Touch the x point displayed on the lower left 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting Touch the x point displayed on the lower rig
304. de angle view TFT VGA GT1565 V GT15 60VLTN For 8 4 TET VGA 1 For how to check the function version refer to the following lt gt Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight GT1562 VN For GT15 90XLTT Power off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT When extension units including bus connection units are mounted on the GOT remove the units 19 6 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 1 Applicable backlight 6 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Hone r iPr Expanded figure of part Ain Fez SOS ous qos w 2 icp Za O Ze 364 Foz 28h 19 ia Z lt x Ww O Z lt 5 lt INSPECTION O Disconnect the cable connector of the upper H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 backlight from the GOT side connectors W 0 Bs CH uct D Pull the upper backlight by pressing the projecting part of the rubber holder that fixes the backlight with a minus driver to unfasten the backlight In the same way pull the lower backlight by pressing the projection part of
305. des for the PLC CPU 3 Check the parameter for the PLC CPU on the master Abnormal cyclic 851 a station O transmission status 4 Check the error status of the master station 5 Refer to explanations of SBOO6E on the applicable network manual 1 Check if the cable is unplugged or not 852 Abnormal host line status 2 Refer to explanations of SBO090 on the applicable O network manual 1 Check the transient error occurrence status for each 853 Transient error station stored in SW0094 to SW0097 O 2 Refer to explanations of SB0094 When an error occurs FFH is stored to the channel No APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions je a 281 11 1 10 ON m e 0 39 1 GT1595 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE 397 15 6 INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS 320 12 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 296 11 7 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 320 12 6 APPENDICES oS ris 00000000000000000000 680000000000000000880 FF RO gig HN Se j 2 4 61 INDEX 382 15 0 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 2 227 8 94 10 0 39 10 0 39 App
306. ding 7 3 1 Grounding the GOT About grounding Perform the following three items for grounding e Independent grounding should be performed as possible for the GOT Perform grounding works grounding resistance 100 or less e When independent grounding cannot be performed for the GOT perform 2 Shared grounding shown below Other O Grounding Other device 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding ste Best condition Good condition Not allowed Use a cable of 2mm or more for grounding when performing 1 or 2 above Ground the cable at a point as close to the GOT as possible to make the ground cable short Grounding examples 1 Independent grounding Best Power equipment servo etc PLC Connection cable FG Hg ICN1A CN1B LG L CN2 CN3 Yo FG lt a GOT LG Ground terminal block Panel Ground grounding terminal block Grounding for control system Grounding for power system L For the control equipment ground the system at one end Especially for the control equipments communicating each other ground the system at one end 7 6 7 3 Grouding 7 3 1 Grounding the GOT 2 Shared grounding Good
307. displayed simultaneously The key board display position chanegs by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting Communic Standard I F Setting Channe I Dr iver assign RS232 5y suppl A QnA QCPU QJ 1024 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend _ F 1 Extend F 2 Cursor S 5161718191 bel lt gt Ha ato Input numeric with keyboard e 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric e Enter Key Touching the Enter key completes numeric input and closes the keyboard e Cancel Key Touching the Cancel key cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard e a gt Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side Available only if any selectable item is at the right left side of the cursor e Del Key key is used when canceling the input by 1 character e key and the key which is not mentioned do not function D If Enter key is touched numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed 9 12 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING an UTILITY FUNCTION In the communication setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers are set Moreover in the comm
308. ductor Grounding b For details of the cables used for conncetions other than the above refer to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 Adjusting a cable for the EMC Directive compliance Modify the cables including user produced cable to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive For details refer to Section 5 4 2 5 14 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 6 Cables 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product a ha Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below If the GOT1000 series equipments are wi configured in a way different from the following instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives 9 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Zz z 1 Power and ground wires wiring method a 5 Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a PE ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 within the range shown below Ferrite cores ae are not required for GT1550 Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in Section 5 1 2 2 Be sure to ground the LG cable FG cable and protective ground cable 2 O a 100 240VAC GOT power section lt e Video RGB connection a GOT power supply section a aer a al LG FG a Zz lt W n Ego 22 EE Eo 5 Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1
309. dure 8 14 Fasten the terminal block by tightening the terminal block fixing screws 2 places with the tightening torque of 0 20 to 0 25 N m Extended figure of part A Point gt When attaching or removing a communication cable When attaching or removing a communication cable to from the terminal block socket detach the terminal block socket from the connector When extension units are installed in multiple layers the units do not have to be removed from the GOT main unit 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers This section describes how to install another extension units on the extension units that has been installed on the GOT 5 When no extension units is installed on the GOT apply the steps in this section after installing an extension units gt e Printer unit lt 37 8 3 2 Installing procedure e Video RGB unit _3 8 4 2 Installing procedure F Zz e Communication unit 37 8 1 2 Installing procedure z a Remove the connector cover and sticker from the installed extension units 23 iz cas Connector cover ie zZ T o m O o wn Qa Zz lt x W Ego zz tE o Sow 25 wu gt a Zz e After installing the unit fasten it by tightening the mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 3 0 36 to 0 48N m z o zZ a OPTION 8 1 Communication Unit 8 15 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension
310. e 3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment 5 For using multiple extension units a bar code reader or a RFID controller the total current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 6 The GT1555 V can be operated with a stylus pen With a stylus pen small sized touch switches can be certainly operated Use a stylus pen that satisfies the following specifications Material Polyacetal resin Pen tip radius 0 8mm or more 3 13 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 5 GT1555 V GT1555 Q GT1550 Q 3 3 Power Supply Specifications The following describes the power supply specifications for the GT15 CF 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply gt 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply Remark Operation at momentary failure 6 e If an instantaneous power failure occurs in the power supply and continues as for more than the permissible pe
311. e Enter key and the registration completes Up to 8 characters can be set for keyword with using A to F and 0 to 9 Keyword x Please input keyword lt lt stration conclition 2nd M All Protect A B CDI PELE Enter Setting BEES EEE PLC connected When registering keyword and 2nd keyword When registering keyword only FX CPU compatible with Registration condition 1 can be selected 2nd keyword Registration condition 1 cannot be selected FX CPU not compatible with 2nd keyword 1 Registration condition The access restriction can be selected from Read Write Protect Write Protect and All Protect For access restriction on each setting refer to the following manual cS The User s Manual of the FX series PLC you are using 1 0 14 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Point P 1 How to select a keyword protection level For equipments that are allowed to operate the FX PLC on line 3 levels of protection level can be set When performing monitoring or changing settings with any on line equipment is required set password with referring to the following a UTILITY FUNCTION a When setting keyword only Select a protection level by the initial letter of keyword All operation protect Set a keyword with initial letter of A D to F or O to 9 Read Incorrect write p
312. e ZE Kb OSN OZo OS information E a control 0S formation pelect drive KindName Size Date Time A Built in CF card IG BOOT 03 02 42 02 49 D IG1SYS 02 27 04 06 33 Q Zz 2g z2 PEE No Ww D00 Operate BootOS and OS file n oO gt B gt S g Eug G25 525 Ke 5058kB i Q lt Install Upload Property Data check oO n eee ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 2 OS Information 1 3 9 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information 13 2 3 Display example of OS information eo Remark ea 13 10 Program Data control 0 information Belect drive UC G1SYS Size Date Time 1 Cn 31 31 31 31 33 33 31 5058KB Install Upload Property Data check Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected 1 Select drive When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF Card B Memory card are not displayed 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character or after are not displayed 4 Path name The path name of the curren
313. e steps described in this section One external I O unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers Turn off the GOT Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT 8 26 8 5 External I O Unit 8 5 1 Applicable external I O unit 4 Tighten two external I O unit mounting screws with a torque of 0 36 to 0 48N m W lt o W gt fo Zz fo 5 For installing an extension unit on the external I O unit refer to the following o A L37 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers ae When an extension unit is not installed on the unit stick accessory stickers over two mounting screws so as not to damage the unit by static electricity Keep the connector cover and sticker fixed as shown in the following figure 2 amp o Ee O Accessory sticker m i Connector cover je Sticker Q Zz lt x W Ego zz i Eo fe a W 25 See Soe wu gt a Zz O ie 2 o Z a OPTION 8 5 External I O Unit 8 27 8 5 2 Installation procedure 8 6 Sound Output Unit The sound output unit is used for connecting to external speakers For connecting the sound output unit set the communication settings For connection details refer to the following manual c GOTI 000 Series Connection Manual 8 6 1 Applicable sound output unit The following sound output unit is appli
314. e CF card type the numbers of extended function OSs and option OSs and project data size 2 Handling CF card during booting OS 2 Do not remove the CF card and do not turn off the CF card access switch during E o booting the OS E Doing so causes the boot to fail As a result the GOT does not start correctly a 3 Corrective actions when OS cannot be booted The OS cannot be booted in the following conditions Take the following corrective actions and then boot the OS again a a W an Condition Corrective action Ee Select the same GOT type as the GOT to be used in tc E The type of the GOT to be used differs from the j E T f the Communicate with Memory Card screen Select GOT type data set with GT Designer2 stored in OSs and project data to be downloaded and then the CF card download the selected data to the CF card Mount an option function board with add on memory on the GOT or delete unnecessary data g w The GOT has insufficient memory For details refer to the following manual z O lt gt GT Designer2 Version J Basic Operation 3 E Data Transfer Manual The CF card access switch is off Turn on the CF card access switch Zz O ie 2 o Z T zZ O e ja O 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 6 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following
315. e Sheet GT15 90PSCB GT15 80PSCB GT15 70PSCB GT15 60PSCB GT15 50PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11H 50PSC GT10 30PSCB GT10 20PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 80PSGB GT15 70PSGB GT15 60PSGB GT15 50PSGB GT11 50PSGB GT10 30PSGB GT10 20PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 80PSCW GT15 70PSCW GT15 60PSCW GT15 50PSCW GT11 50PSCW GT10 30PSCW GT10 20PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSGW GT11 50PSGW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSGW GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO Protective cover for oil GT05 50PCO USB environmental protection cover GT15 UCOV GT11 50UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND an GT05 50STAND Attach i GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 ee GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT Backlight GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H 50ESCOV Memory loader GT10 LDR A 23 m Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works2 Version Description SWOIDSC GTWkK2 E SWOD5C GTWK2 EV GT Designer2 VersionO SWOIDSC GTD2 E SWO D5C GTD2 EV GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900
316. e and bolt surfaces so that they will come into contact And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency c When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible d Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency e The diameter of cable holes in the control panel must be 10cm 3 94in In order to reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is small as possible Attach some EMI gaskets to fill up the space and suppress the leakage of radio waves Out test have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB max and 30dB mean measured by 3m method with 30 to 300MHz Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below a Provide a grounding point near the GOT Short circuit the LG and FG terminals of the GOT LG line ground FG frame ground and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 18in or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible mu
317. e insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions CAUTION Always ground the FG terminal LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT power to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
318. e length 3m S2 PAT elise CAPRA Cable C10 and general purpose interface module NC1L RS2 FFU120B GT09 C30R41001 6T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41001 6T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to FUJI FA RS 232C 485 interface capsule FFK120A C10 and general purpose interface Cable GT09 C200R41001 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41001 6T Cable length 30m module NC1L RS4 FFU120B Connection cables for MATSUSHITA PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable 2 13 Model name GT09 C30R20901 25P Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to MATSUSHITA RS422 232C conversion adapter GT09 C30R20902 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of MATSUSHITA PLC computer communication unit GT09 C30R20903 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA PLC GT09 C30R20904 3C 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA PLC Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product name Model name GT09 C30R20201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P Cable length 3m Description RS 232 For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC Pape GT09 C30R20203 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20204 14P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20205 25P Cablelength3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C30R40201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C1
319. e make sure to ground FG terminal LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying Class D Grounding Class 3 Grounding Method or higher which is 2 used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction E W Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal Z arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure 2 Zz i i igi lt Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range o Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT lt u Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction Sow This section describes wiring to the GOT power supply section one For the connection to a controller refer to the following manual one L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual ae For external dimensions of connection cable refer to the following lt gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions Z z z 2 7 OPTION a Remark General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of nois
320. e pulled out after cable treatment Pull out the band with pressing the tab of the cable clamp outward using a driver etc e Removing from the printer unit The dedicated printer connection cable can be removed from the unit with the cable clamp attached Remove the cable clamp by pressing it in both directions arrow A i EX as 5 Screw of the connector holder Do not remove the screw attached to the connector holder In the case the screw is removed do not use any other screw Doing so may damage the unit 8 22 8 3 Printer Unit 8 3 2 Installing procedure 8 4 Video RGB Unit The video RGB unit is used to connect a video camera personal computer or commercially available z display to a GOT gt To connect video RGB unit make Communication Settings m For details of connection refer to the following manual Q L7 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e Video RGB unit Images taken with a video camera and a personal computer display can be displayed on the GOT lt e Video input unit o Images taken with a video camera can be displayed on the GOT eo RGB input unit as A personal computer display can be displayed on the GOT e RGB output unit A GOT display can be displayed on a commercially available display zZ F 8 4 1 Video RGB unit types S g There are the following types of video RGB units 2 Model name Description GT15V 75V4 For NTSC PAL input 4 channels z GT15V 75R1 For analog RGB i
321. e tle ieee ht i ed ee a eet A 12 CONTENTS ksenia tinaaa ade he bod Sond a chigteial suceandads a age bs ded a a a Dale Sng E aa A 12 ABOU TMANUWALS Sci te Meets Alte Sanit aoB ace oe se a a a lara heen bos neem aces debts det A 21 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS 0000 cece eee ene eens A 22 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL aa aa eee ee een een e a ees A 26 PACKING WIS Tri tiaara aana na re tet a ar ine ease hy lot ees nce vente Deh hate at ah hast A 27 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 6 1 1 Features 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 20 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 1 2 2 Component List 2 2 DM 2G os e UE deh bo Masse eae Stan ea ad arctica oats ac ahh da Eaa Ea ant ahaa anda TAA NE aAa aad T 2 5 2 2 2 gt OPUN 22 ted veins arden a wet dhe Mi peed pine oie ce bees thereat 2 7 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 15 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 EERE E A a Koe La Cee a E OR CRT A ne eee cE RAL Re Ree ee 3 2 32 2 GTT585VES GT1585 S 4s val ieee ee le Bk ly ial oe a Eee ee 3 5 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 0 0 ee eee 3 7 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN ce ee eee een eens 3 10 3 2 5 GT1555 V GT1555 Q GT1550 Q s emi tte 3 12 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 14 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply 000e eee 3 14 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 00200 cece eee eee 3 15 PART NAME AND SETTINGS
322. each object x Review conditions 2 Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of objects to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set do not occur simultaneously 320 Specified object does not The part file does not exist 7 exist or out of range Create the part file and download to GOT roe The monitored device No is out of the permissible area of the Dedicated device is out of targeted PLC CPU 322 range Confirm device x Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the range 2 monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings Available memory of the memory card is insufficient Confirm Insufficient memory media the available memory of the memory card 330 capacity Confirm M card The available memory can be confirmed by system x capacity information screen which is described in GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual The memory card is not installed or in the drive access switch 331 Memory card not installed is OFF in drive s or M CARD switched OFF 1 Install the memory card in the specified drive 2 Turn ON the access switch 390 Memory media is not Memory card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly formatted Format the memory card Unable to overwrite f j Memory card is write protected 333 Memory card is write x Cancel the write protection of memory card protected 334 Memory media error Memory card is faulty z Replace memory media
323. ecord Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLO GOT GOTSPLO Value Number Item Description 1 No Record No of advanced recipe file is displayed Attribution of record is displayed Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer2 V Record can be loaded saved Record whose value is selected 2 Atti VP Record only for loading Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blanc Record only for saving Record whose value is deleted or not selected P Record unusable reserved area Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed 3 Record Comment Record Comment is displayed File Name Path and name of recipe file are displayed 4 Setting No Recipe No is displayed Name Recipe name is displayed 5 Date and time Date and time when record comment is updated are displayed 6 Operating switch Execution switch of each function 1 3 48 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Zz o 5 Display operation of advanced recipe information T s x y N APROECT SSNS Ts If touch a drive of select drive the DIR RECIPE 03 15 05 11 36 tl information of the touched drive is DIR REC IPE2 03 15 05 11 36 GIP ARO000 1 1K 05 15 05 11 30 displayed a csv al 1 1K_03 15 05 11 37 oO TXT E 1K_03 15 05 11 37 T If to
324. ect data exists in the A drive the screen shown left is deleted Do you want to execute is displayed without starting uploading In this case touching the OK button overwrites the project data of the A drive with the project data with the same name of the A drive Cance Touching the Cancel button cancels uploading When the uploading is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the button restarts the GOT Upload is completed 1 3 26 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information 2 Setup cancel operation By setup cancel setup is canceled 6 This item explains using the A drive Z E Si sable set p Q Touch A Standard CF Card in Select 2 Execute now drive If touch the Upload button the screen 6 mentioned left is displayed Sw Si Sat If touch the OK button setup cancel is sir Cancel executed gee Disable setup is completed 4 When the setup cancel is completed the 22 Restart now dialog mentioned left is displayed gt ES Touching the OK button restarts the TEE GOT S00 After restart the GOT monitors with the project data in the C drive a Oo 2 Zi HE HEE x N 898 ora ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 3 Project Information 1 3 27 13 3 4 Operation of project inf
325. ected If both Common comment and Each program comment are set for the same device in a sequence program select either of the comments to be displayed in the ladder monitor YES NO lt Default YES gt Common comment Each program comment lt Default Common comment gt Local device monitor Select if monitoring local devices are executed or not when monitoring devices with the ladder monitor Applicable to only the MELSEC Q series ladder monitor YES NO lt Default NO gt Drive for device comment Select the drive to be used for reading comment data for the ladder monitor Point gt 1 Ladder data to be saved _ a The ladder data to be saved is used by the GOT to execute ladder 11 26 monitoring A Built in CF card B Memory card lt Default A Built in CF card gt The ladder data can be saved in the CF card with this function however it cannot be copied in the PC to be referred edited with GX Developer etc The name of the ladder data to be stored can be checked with the project information For how to check the name of ladder data refer to the following 18 3 2 Display operation of project information The ladder data saved in the built in flash memory and memory card file name CIRDAT can be deleted by selecting Project information of Program Data control 13 3 4 Operation of project information 2 For the GT1555 Q GT1550 Q This setting is not provide
326. ective ground terminal For connecting the ground cables each flat side of the two solderless terminals must be faced L NLG FG Terminal Solderless sc termin Ground cable o Y of connection cable A shortin SRRY Got bar 9 For the ground cable of the connection cable use the following solderless terminals Applicable solderless i RAV1 25 3 V1 25 B3A FV1 25 B3A terminal For grounding the GOT refer to the following K 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 16 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 6 2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable 8 OPTION w gt 8 1 Communication Unit gt The communication unit is used to relate the GOT extension interfaces to the system at the connection destination z To connect the communication unit make Communication Settings for communications with a PLC For details of connection refer to the following manual gt ao GOT1000 Series Connection Manual BZ nO 8 1 1 Applicable communication unit ie S The following communication units are applicable for GT1500 z iL Product name Model Description Q oO esaeonuet For last GOT 2 i For QCPU Q mode motion Number of IN side connectors 1 controller CPU Q series For intermediary and last GOT GT15 QBUS2 connection standard model Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side Z6 EE For last GOT T E i For A QnACPU mot
327. ed Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation D Select the recipe file and touch the Excute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to which you want to load the device value If touch the esre button the dialog shown left is displayed 2 If touch the OK record button starts loading O When loading is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog Record save operation z Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record S T me ESET DEEUIPE SE E TE Select the recipe file and touch the 4 d Ed ARPOQ00 Excute button Zz O au 50 Sge o SE ui Ozo m ha IFild 1P i Copy Move poate Execute BIP TXT Del Rename Ga Sz ata Contr pe Informa x 2 amp 2 6 Ei l Nane A PROJECTINRECIPEI ARPOO001 G1P As the Advanced Recipe Record List Heg etting No i P i a Nae Reeipe te screen is displayed select the record g a ui EEE i comment for saving the device value Process 3 setting P Process 4 setting n gt 2a ETA DES oO E G 57 gt Odd T ozb 13 Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLC GOT GOTPLC Value a zZ lt x z Save record A eor
328. ed operator information is deleted Touch the Cancel button and then the delete operation is canceled When the delete operation is completed a completion dialog box is displayed Touch the OK button and then the dialog box is closed 14 44 14 11 1 Operator management COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION SETTINGS STATUS DISPLAY a O Ww 1S LL w Ww 2 O 0 DISPLAY SECTION 4 14 45 Return operation Restore the current operator information to the previous saved one Touch the button Add Edit Delete Return Drive in use Inport Export Save Do you want to restore previously The dialog box shown left is displayed and saved operator information then touch the button The Admin password authentication screen ord authentication is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the current operator information is restored to the previous saved one bdd Edit De
329. ee eee 11 41 11 12 83 Backup restoration setting operation 0 c eee eee 11 42 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 11 44 WAS Trigger backupsettingS nant eacheuedetedaed nn neh nied e beg htadied Handa Rae 11 44 11 13 2 Display operation of trigger backup setting 0 02 eee 11 44 11 13 3 Trigger backup setting operation asasan aaaea 11 45 A 16 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1to 12 6 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions 0 00 cece eee eee 12 1 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting 0 eee eee ee 12 2 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display 00 eee 12 3 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 to 13 113 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 13 1 1 Drive name allocation 1 2 oia a eaa a Ea eens 13 1 13 1 2 Data type and the storage location n n nannaa aaan 13 2 13 1 3 OS version confirmation 0 0 00 c tte 13 4 13 1 4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 13 6 13 5 Display ME ee aa e an an AA ibe OY A A E i e aia ra Ie 13 7 13 2 OS Information 13 8 13 2 1 Function of OS information 0 0 00 cette eee 13 8 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information 0 000 eee 13 9 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 0 0 00000 e eee 13 10 13 2 4 Oper
330. eeeeeees 2 2 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs 2 9 D Daily MS pectin e a eies nE EAN 19 2 Display and operation settingS cee 11 1 Display operation of display setting 11 5 Display setting function eee eeeeeeeeeeee 11 31 Display setting functions eects 11 2 Display setting operations ee eeeeeeees 11 6 Drawing CHECK enseina e uera er i 14 7 Display operation of drawing check s es 14 7 Drawing check function sesseseeeseeereseeeensnn 14 7 Drawing check operation 14 8 Drawing SOnWaTG cir anra i is 2 19 E Error message and system alarm 20 17 List of error message system alarm 20 19 Ethernet communication unit s es 2 7 8 1 Explanation of the GOT model name 6 2 2 Explanation of the option model name 4 2 3 External dimensions seeren App 1 External I O Unit ceecceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 8 26 Applicable external I O unit eee 8 26 Installation procedure 8 26 F File display ANd COPY cccceeeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaes 13 1 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 13 6 Data type and the storage location 13 2 Display IG erunano nean ENR 13 7 Drive name allocation 13 1 Index 1 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTE
331. een the changed value will be canceled OK 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 3 Q QnA ladder monitor setting operation Q Setting items are changed if setting item is touched 2 By touching the OK button the setting is reflected If touch gt lt button without touching OK button the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the DX button restarts GOT After restarting GOT operates with changed value 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 11 8 1 Function of the transparent mode When using the multi channel function the channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified For the multi channel function refer to the following manual C gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function Also refer to the following manual for the FA transparent function C gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 33 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Function Description Setting range When using other 1 2 3 4 hNG The channel No of a controller to which the FA than the GT1550 lt Default 1 gt transparent function is executed can be set When using the 1 2 GT1550 lt Default 1 gt 11 8 2 Displaying the transparent mode Main menu GOT setup 9 3 Utility Display Touch GOT setup Touch Transparent made Transparent made GOT setup Transparent mode Touch the channel No displ
332. efore formatting 13 44 13 6 Memory Card Format 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format When the formatting is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed O If touch OK button closes the dialog 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information O o ZZ u gt m E Point f Before using advanced recipe information E For writing reading into from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe file on the personal computer refer to the following manual Specifications and operating procedure are described lt L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual S lt O 13 1 Advanced Recipe Function zrg H Szo 13 7 1 Function of advanced recipe information For the advanced recipe file used in advanced recipe function copy delete file output are available E In addition it is possible to writing reading into from a controller by using this function without creating the n f f So screen to operate the advanced recipe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer2 is required FE a f Function Description Refer to aon Displaying file The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 47 13 49 folder data ip G1P CSV e g gt G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file 13 50 a a conversion Fl i G1P TXT lt a3 Advanced G1P f
333. election Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive D 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function o He Number of folders and f f 3 9 files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders er Z Point P Display of creation date and time k l EEE fe The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated go while displaying the alarm information display screen Za If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper ae hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed Zz Ro O Remark Folders and files displayed ug A Zu For the folders and files displayed refer to the following E 5o woz gt gt 13 1 5 Display file zuf Eeim ZEV 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 29 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation The display operation of alarm information D If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed indiane Size Date Time A Built in CF card DIR PROJECTI 07 08 04 16 03 C If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is t displayed 42 12KB 14990KB OF ile BIA gt CSvpIA gt TXT Del Copy Graph 2 If touch A W button of the scrollbar the
334. elf check function Carries out self check of screen data or memory etc The items which can be self checked are as follows Items Description Carries out write read check of the memory card and built in flash memory Reference page Memory check ee B 0 14 4 Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 7 Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 14 12 Totich panel Check Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit 44 414 16 dots x 16 dots I O check Carries out RS 232 connecting target confirmation and self loopback check 14 16 NETWK unit status Displays the LED status error information etc of the installed MELSECNET H 14 32 display communication unit or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 1 4 3 14 2 Self check 14 2 1 Self check function 14 3 Memory Check Zz O o Zz 14 3 1 Memory check function T Memory check function carries out the write read check of A drive Standard CF Card B drive Extended 5 memory card and C drive Built in flash memory Function Description L A drive memory check Checks whether the memory CF card of the A drive can be read written normally e O W Checks whether the memory Extended memory card of the B drive can be read written ZQ 6 B drive memory check a normally Sw E Q5 wu Checks whether the memory Built in flash memory of the
335. ely Product name Model name Description Co Commercially available RFID controller 4 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html RFID controller Memory card adaptor Sold separately Product name Model name Description Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Option function board Sold separately Product name Model name Description GT15 FNB Option function board Option function board GT15 QFNB Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function and document display function Option function board with add on memory Option function 16MB GT15 QFNB16M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function and document display function Option function board Option function board with add on memory Option function 32MB GT15 QFNB32M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function and document display function Option function board with add on memory Option function 48MB GT15 QFNB48M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder
336. emoving method with CF card unit Removal i Open the CF card cover Turn off the CF card access switch of the unit and check that the CF card access LED turns off When the LED turns off the CF card can be removed even while the GOT is on 5 z fej 7 5 Ay 28 2 fe 2 Press the CF card eject button to pop out the CF card and remove it lt B Qa Zz lt x W Ego zz tE o Point fP Precautions for removing CF card z 1 Do not insert or eject a CF card and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card owe access LED turns on One Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with sa the CF card unit 2 When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit support the card with the hand because the card might pop out Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit resulting in a damage or failure of the card a D Z o Z a 8 OPTION 8 8 CF Card 8 41 8 8 3 CF card inserting removing method with CF card unit 8 8 4 CF card inserting removing method with CF card extension unit Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF Installation When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw unscrew the screw 4 Turn on the CF card access switch 8 42 8 8 CF Card 8 8 4 CF card inserting removing method with CF card extension unit
337. en fastening cable is difficult attach a cable clamp to the printer unit Be sure to attach the cable clamp to section A see the following figure with its band positioned outside and press it until it clicks For the band inserting direction refer to the arrow As acable clamp RST 1NB manufactured by TAKEUCHI INDUSTRY CO LTD is used cable clamp Insert the dedicated printer connection cable in the looped cable clamp band and pull the band to fasten the cable Unit installation amp Power off the GOT 6 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT 8 20 8 3 Printer Unit 8 3 2 Installing procedure Fit the printer unit in the GOT case W W gt fo aan ameter 7 z0 4 Fasten the printer unit by tightening its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 DZ N m HO ie zZ T o m O a In the case a cable n clamp is attached 6 When mounting any extension unit in a later stage refer to the following 9 L37 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers y n When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed stick accessory stickers on the So top of mounting screws 2 places to cover the top of them in order to avoid receiving electrostatic ran awn charge Keep the connector cover and sticker fixed as shown in the following figure fe Accessory stickers 2 wW ow gt 226 Connector 2 D fe cover usa
338. er with another extension unit in this section refer to the following This section describes how to install a communication unit on a GOT gt 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers Bus connection unit NOILVYNDISANOO WALSAS ap lt 6 ve oO GS a E m 9 D D oO SNOILVOISIOSdS 2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT SONILLAS ANY AWVN Lavd Fit the communication unit in the GOT case AAILOSYIC ASVLIOA MO1 ANY OWS NOILLVTIVLSNI Fasten the communication unit by tightening its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m NIHIM foe oe 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure When installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed refer to the following 7 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid receiving electrostatic stick accessory stickers to cover the top of mounting screws 2 places Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the sticker stuck as it is Accessory stickers Connector cover Sticker 2 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Power OFF the GOT Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I F 2 side of the GOT After the installation detach the connector cover fro
339. eration 24KB 15600KB File Property Data check Download Upload A 5 Sets the project data stored in the A drive Standard CF Card or B drive Extended memory card to be used in the GOT z The GOT monitors using the data in the A drive or B drive ER r This item explains using the A drive Point f Before setup operation When storing project data from GT Designer2 to CF card select A Standard CF 5 A R R Card for Project Data in Boot Drive Sw ee Z200 Communicate with Memory Card S a Z Memory card write Boot 0S write Core OS write 5 m OZ Untitled Project1 GOT Type GT15 V 640 480 zi s dard monitor OS tandard monitor OS 02 04 00 Boot Drive ystem Screen Information 02 04 00 Project Data System Screen Data 02 04 00 C Buitin Flash Memory x YJ Standard Font TrueType Numerical Font 02 04 00 a C Communication driver g oO Extended function OS Sa 0 Option OS pe 3 a Z Intelligent module monitor data Q Wy E C 9 mation monitor data Do Ww C Servo amplifier monitor data aoo Se Des TE Q Install a CF card in the GOT i A Built in CF card YPROJEC 3K 11 09 05 14 56 Oo gt For how to install a CF card refer to the Z gt 3 oO C Flash Memory following E 2 n lt x lt 8 8 CF Card xaS oak IZE Ozo 2 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select E drive m zZ lt x z al ou
340. eration Panel e z 03 03 ED Sz Added connection types w 0 Version of GT11 a ae GT GT Soft n Item Description GT Version of OS we i 15 GOT1000 Bus Seral Designer2 toz Communication driver pees ucts 2 04E Bus Q 01 00 O x x x Bus A QnA 01 00 GT15 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 if Supporting connection to BUS Bus A QnA 03 03 a GT11 7 2 58L O O O x a BootOS 03 03 P Standard monitor OS 03 03 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 Bus A QnA 03 03 Bus connection Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K oO x O x Q173HCPU Bus Q 01 02 x na Communication driver g Priority order of data load can be set 2 43V O x O x Bus connection Q 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Bus connection Q 03 07 O O O z Supporting connection to CNC C70 s ti tion to CRnQ 700 2 738 Communication driver upporting connection to CRnQ iii Bus connection Q 03 09 O O O x Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade App 23 For GOT1000 Series Version of ct GT Soft GT11 o Item Description GT Version of OS 15 GoTioco Designer2 Bus Serial Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K
341. erter connection FREQROL 500 700 x Oo Ww S L Ww 1p O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 7 I O Check 4 14 7 1 I O check function 14 14 7 2 Display operation of I O Check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt gt 9 3 Utility Display ae l Touch D a N Self check Touch Touch I O check Debug amp self check 1 0 check Please select check channel 1 4 247 14 7 I O Check 14 7 2 Display operation of I O Check 14 7 3 I O Check Operation Zz fe Connecting target confirmation z If touch CPU button the connecting target confirmation communication check is carried out z After the CPU communication starts normally the dialog mentioned PU communication chec right notifying that it is on checking untill the connecting target ii Benut ine Ge E confirmation communication ends normally 6 x O W 226 pes When the connecting target confirmation communication ends its result is notified by dialog Ergon pikea oneek E If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally 26 the dialog notifying of the normal termination mentioned right is fee W displayed If touch OK button after confirming the result returns to Do ui I O check z ep gt If the dialog mentioned right is displayed after selecting connecting 225 target confirmation or during CPU communic
342. es and referring to the following 3 points 1 Protecting against noise a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high power drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach a surge suppressor on the terminal of the molded case circuit breaker MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor to supress the noise 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its ground resistance c Ground the power system and the control system separately 7 1 Power Supply Wiring e Make wiring connections to the power supply I O equipment and power equipment separately by system z as shown below When frequent noise is identified connect an isolation transformer u O Wiring diagram for power supply GOT Isolation 5 Main power power pe k ro PS E Oo O o o O GOT o JE ae a O power ETN e Oo Oo O equipment Main circuit power n ATN o o gt Main circuit equipment O lt o e Twist 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable as closely as possible and connect the cable of the minimum 5 length between modules a Also use the thickest cable as possible Max 2mm t
343. esigner2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 2 Utility Screen Utility screen is a screen prepared beforehand for GOT Installing BootOS or standard OS in the GOT from GT Designer2 enables utility screen displaying The utility screen has menus as Brightness contrast adjustment screen and GOT memory check screen etc For details refer to the following lt Chapter 9 to Chapter 17 About Manual The following manuals related to GOT1000 series are available Refer to each manual in accordance with the intended use i S F oc 1 Installation of the software programs Drawing Data transfer g i For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT refer to the following manuals Zz O k 5 O F 26 nO GT Designer2 Version Basic GT Designer2 Versi Purpose Operation Data Transfer slink O ie Screen Design Manual Manual 2 O i Pe S i Installing product on PC Detailed g icp Creating projects Detailed a n O ZZ Ef Eo Creating screens a W 28 lt x O Drawing figures Lgr wWw gt Q 5 Making Common Settings Detailed S ie Z Placing Setting objects Detailed o Z T Transferring data to GOT Detailed z 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format zZ O e ja O 2 3 Installing a GOT Connecting to a controller For the operat
344. ess 2 to 4 mm or less GOT A mm inch B mm inch Gtisgs 383805 1 282 5 11 12 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 ctisas 80201189 228 8 98 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 a ersz 28911 38 200 7 87 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 arise 2278 94 176 6 93 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 erisso 1936 02 121 5 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 2 Panel cutting dimensions when installing CF card extension unit Make a installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below Make space of 10mm on the left and right of the hole respectively for the installation fittings A Panel thickness 2 to 4 mm or less GOT A mm inch B mm inch GT15 BRE 94 3 7 33 1 3 oO cogser 2 0 08 0 0 2 0 08 0 0 6 2 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 3 Mounting Position n f m For installing GOT z W When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be left from the other device 3 Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation For the lead in allowance for cables at the bottom of the GOT refer to the following gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions z Dr LE nO ie zZ e C D E S 4 2 u O o wn lt Panel thickness Q 2 to 4mm 2 0 08 to 0 16inc
345. etail Settings a UTILITY FUNCTION 5V power supply setting operation When connecting a controller to the RS 232 interface whether to supply 5VDC power or not to the controller through 9 pins can be selected Thus it is not necessary to connect an external power supply When setting the RS 232 interface to 9 Host PC the 5V supply is automatically changed to NO Touch 5V supply eg ce on bw Zo Commun ice Q bu Standard I F Setting Channe l Dr iver assign zee ao oO wi ChNo RS232 BY supp lets ChNo USB Bo ui 1 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 Ga 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting a oO gt Extend _I F 1 Extend F 2 2 gt 4 Ist None Cio LO None None bka van 2nd Co None Cho None oe 0 Mone 0 None 525 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None a Zz Definition of ChNo r lt O None 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK z 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection z O gt 4 LO Select and define whether 5V power supply is supplied or not R 5V power supply X S T 5y power supply YES O 4 W 7 al oO z O b59 gy z4 to area oa 0K O wg gt Pe lS oO Oz a SEO 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 9 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation After setting completion is displayed indicating that 5V power supplying setting is on Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channel Dr iver assign
346. f the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC y Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2 at IN side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on the GOT 2 bus connection unit Yy Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1 at OUT side to further locate the error positions y Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error will not occur The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1 to the GOT 2 is judged faulty Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one End 20 16 20 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 2 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT controller or network there are two kinds system alarm and advanced system alarm For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm refer to the following KL GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Remark Error code and channel No Bd e Error codes can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function e The channel No where an error is occurring can be confirmed with the GOT
347. factured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD HITACHI IES PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Ltd FUJI FA PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Matsushita PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Yaskawa PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation Yokogawa PLC ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of Allen Bradley PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc SCHNEIDER PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Schneider Electric SA SIEMENS PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Siemens AG OMRON temperature me Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON controller SHINKO indicating _ Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co Ltd controller CHINO controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION FUJI SYS temperature co i Temperature troll Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd controller controller YAMATAKE temperature o Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by YAMATAKE controlle
348. fri Q QnA ladder nonitor Transparent mode If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected s Backup restoration setting 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Buzzer volume window move buzzer Touch detection mode E Setting items are changed if setting item is touched pa Setting contents are defined if OK button Kay sensitivit E ax 8 is touched 1 1 16 11 3 Operation settings 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation With do not push OK button amp If touch lt button without touching OK if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is 6 value will be canceled OK displayed 5 Zz O au If close the display setting and GOT setup E screens with lt x button after completing zag the setting of all items to change GOT 11 restarts and reflects the setting contents Security setting Refer to the following for the security setting operation zZ On EO nS wE oO W On L gt 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key Refer to the following for the utility call key operation L37 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Key sensitivity setting Buzzer volume OFF Q If touching the setting items keyboard is displayed Input numeric with the keyboard Window move buzzer ON FILE DISPLAY AND COPY Security setting
349. fter rebooting the GOT Confirm Changes are discarded if you close n the window before pressing Confirm Do you want to proceed OK Cance When you touch the setting item the setting contents change Input signal PAL NTSC Resolution 720 x 480 640 x 480 amp When you touch the Confirm button the setting contents are determined If you touch the X button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed After completing the settings for all the items you want to change in Video Unit Settings when closing Video Unit Settings and Video RGB Setting Communication Setting with the X button the GOT is restarted and the new setting contents are reflected 11 9 Video Unit Settings 1 1 33 11 9 3 Operating the video unit settings COMMUNICATION Py INTERFACE PF SETTING zZ On EO nS wE oO W On CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 10 Video Display Settings aga 11 10 1 Functions of the video display settings The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area and image quality can be set Item Description Setting range Channel 1 2 3 4 lt At factory shipment 1 gt Captive area Horizonta
350. function 9 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders Point P About the displayed file The files other than that for logging are not displayed on the logging information screen Remark Folders and files displayed Bd For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 13 1 5 Display file 1 3 70 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 3 Example of logging information display 13 8 4 Logging information operation Zz fe o l RE 5 Display operation of logging information T 5 5 Elect Drive LECT a x If touch a drive of select drive the A ae a m information of the touched drive is displayed 5 lt If touch a folder name the information of 29 the touched folder is displayed zr 5 m E If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is m displayed 68KBZ15632KB r Tild 2 BIL gt CSV Coj Move PAE ea F ia It touch a button of the scrollbar the x28 screen scrolls up down by one line z E If touch A X button the screen scrolls pok up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected Gz FE O For operation of operating switches pies refer to the following one GiL Csv Ob GIL gt TXT lt this section 13 ia Delete a lt gt this section Z gt COPY i L gt this section a MOVE aasan lt gt this sectio
351. functions 0 12 1 Touch panel calibration s 11 23 Touch panel check cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 14 Display operation of touch panel check 14 14 Touch panel check function ceeceee 14 14 Touch panel check operations 14 15 Transparent function Setting ec eeeeeeees 11 29 Transportation Precautions s e App 20 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting in bus connection 20 14 U Usage condition of utility function App 16 USB environmental protection Cover 206 8 54 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover E E EA T eu aL Eee aa 8 54 Installing procedure eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 8 54 Utility basic configuration eee tee eet ee tees 9 10 Utility call key Setting oc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 20 Utility call key display operation 00 11 20 Utility call key setting function 0 11 20 Utility call key setting operation 11 21 Utility call key settings 11 31 11 34 11 38 Utility call key setting display operations E stutacies sbivtea E EAA E 11 32 11 38 Utility call key setting function 11 34 11 38 Utility call key setting operations SELES a Nat tee ess 11 33 11 36 11 37 11 39 Utility GIS PAY E E irda eee tide 9 5 Display operation of main Menu 9 7 Main Menus iaeoa A 9 5 Password eo a A S 9 8 System message switch button 9 5 Utility ReCO eisai eeesecceeeeeseeceeeeeeteeceeenenteeee 9 1 Ut
352. g 00 0 cee ee 11 5 11 1 3 Display setting operations 0 0 2 0 tee 11 6 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 12 11 2 1 Functions of the brightness contrast 00 00 cece eee 11 12 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast 0 0 0 cee eee 11 12 11 2 3 Operating the brightness contrast 0 000 eee 11 13 11 3 Operation settings 11 14 11 3 1 Operation setting functions 0 0 00 cca 11 14 11 3 2 Display operation of display setting 0 0 ee 11 15 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 2 0 0 0 teens 11 16 11 4 Security Level Change 11 18 11 4 1 Security level change functions sssusa aasa ccc eee 11 18 11 4 2 Displaying the security level change 0 0c eae 11 18 11 4 3 Security level change operation 0006 c cee tees 11 19 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 20 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 00 eee 11 20 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation 0 0 eae 11 20 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 1 2 0 eee 11 21 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting 11 23 11 6 1 Touch panel calibration setting function 11 23 11 6 2 Touch panel calibration setting display operation n sasaaa aaua 11 23 11 6 3 Touch panel calibration operation s s s aaaea eaaa 11 24 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 26 11 7 1 Q Qn
353. g of GOT lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operation GOT Setup 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display Clock display z Carry out the display and seting of GOT clock data S The setup methods of clock data are shown below T gt E If touch the clock display section the keyboard for input is displayed and the clock update stops Zz 2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to e the table below Input the scheduled time 595 when the operation of is to be carried laa out since the input time is reflected at the 95u time of the operation of The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date Se LOV Sak GOO Key Description 1 2 0 to 9 Input numeric value in cursor position a gt Move the cursor m Move the cursor to the left by one character when D Del year month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Key is touched while inputting gt gt lt co LL OD ra Ln a5 s fm ze In Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display z Enter The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed amp The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of
354. g the GOT and GOT Ferrite Core gee ZCAT3035 1330 tf 130 5 12 5 12 230 or less 4 ae 230 or less 9 06 9 06 Unit mm inch 5 20 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 Ethernet connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below GOT side Ferrite Core PLC side ZCAT3035 1330 40 400 or less 1 57 15 75 Unit mm inch 6 External I O device connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps Refer to Section 5 4 3 e Connect the braided shield to the connector with the connector cover e Twist power cables GOT side External I O device side Braided shield Connector cover Power cable 360 or less 40 40 360 or less 14 17 1 57 1 57 14 17 Unit mm inch 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant 5 21 Product Ww a ar O gt OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol wi O wW 7 Q INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION
355. g the voltage with the following measure example 1 where the voltage is reduced Measure example 1 Refer to the measure examples 1 1 and 1 2 below When any potential difference occurs between the ground cable and the panel having the GOT and the GOT is influenced by the potential difference connect another ground cable to the panel When taking of measure 1 1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example perform the wiring as shown in 1 2 Connection cable Connection Ground cable Ground cable Use a short Ground to and thick the panel wire as 5 possible Ground to the panel Measure example 1 1 Measure example 1 2 If the GOT is affected by noise when measure example 1 is taken the influence of noise may be reduced with the following measure example 2 Measure example 2 Refer to the measure examples 2 1 and 2 2 below When the noise generated from the panel affects the GOT even if measure example 1 is taken attach the ferrite core When attaching a ferrite core insert the wire into the hole of the ferrite core several times approximately three times When taking of measure 2 1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example perform the wiring as shown in 2 2 Connection Connection Ground cable Ground cable lt Ferrite core z Ferrite core Use a short Ground to Ground to and thick wt the panel qthe panel wire as possible
356. garding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below When each item part is touched the respective setting becomes possible Items Description The title display period at the main unit boot can Opening screen time be set Setting range 0 to 60 seconds lt At factory shipment 5 seconds gt The period from the user stops the touch panel 0 to 60 minutes Screen save time operation till the screen save function starts can lt At factory shipment 0 be set minutes gt Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight ON OFF Screen save backlight simultaneously at the screen save function start can be specified lt At factory shipment OFF gt Confirmation of the current language and switching language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by utility and dialogue Language tis Japanese English English sam Chinese Simplified s Chinese Traditional 2301 Korean Deut sch German lt At factory shipment User s selection gt Whether to display system alarm when the Battery alarm display voltage of the GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified lt At factory shipment OFF gt The brightness can be adjusted Brightness Contrast L gt 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment Invert Colors Whether to invert white and black on the user Ch created screen and utility screen can be specified Q ON OFF lt At factory sh
357. ge ambient temperature 20 to 60 C Operating ambient humidity 6 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity 6 10 to 90 RH non condensing Half Frequency Acceleration Sweep count amplitude Compliant Under 5 to 9Hz 3 5mm Vibrati A 6 with JIS intermittent gt ibration resistance B3502 and _ vibration 9 to 150Hz 9 8m s pare in X Y an IEC61131 2 Under 5 to 9Hz 7 1 75mm PENET directions continuous 3 vibration 9o lS0nz 4 9m s i 7 Compliant with JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z Shock resistance directions Operating atmosphere No corrosive gas Operating altitude 3 2000 m 6562 ft max Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category 4 Il or less Pollution degree 2 or less Cooling method Self cooling 4 2 3 4 5 6 When mounting an extension unit on the upper stage of MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5 C against the maximum values described in general specifications When using the MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z or CC Link communication unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z refer to the manual of the communication unit you use Differs with the specification of GOT Do not use or store the GOT under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to observe t
358. gning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces Detail settings Display Setting communication parameters Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words canceling sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series CPU Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving Switching message languages Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF Setting the black and white inversion display to ON or OFF For GT15 applicable to only GT1550 Q Setting the human sensor Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S and GT1585 S Reference 10 Adjusting brightness and contrast Operation Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed Setting the touch detection mode Applicable to only GT1595 X Changing security levels 11 3 11 4 Setting the utility call keys 11 5 Adjusting the touch panel Applicable to only GT1595 X 11 6 Q QnA ladder monitor Setting the data storage location for the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q Transparent mode settings Video RGB Setting Backup restoration setting Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for the FA transparent function Setting the video display and RGB display Applica
359. gth 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller GT15 AC30B Cable length 3m CPU A series Extension base and A7GT CNB GT15 AC50B Cable length 5m GT15 A370C12B S1 Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S1 Cable length 2 5m For connecting Motion controller CPU A series Extension base and GOT GT15 A370C12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B Cable length 2 5m For connecting Motion controller CPU A series Extension base and A7GT CNB Small size CPU long distance connection cable GT15 C100EXSS 1 Cable length 10 6m GT15 C200EXSS 1 Cable length 20 6m GT15 C300EXSS 1 Cable length 30 6m For long distance connection of QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT For connecting A7GT CNB and a combined product of the GT15 EXCNB and GT15 COBS for long distance connection Continued to next page 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 8 be OVERVIEW Z Q z 3 o We Z 0 0 W j gt icp gt ep SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Product name GOT to GOT long distance connection Model name GT15 C07BS Cable length 0 7m GT15 C12BS Cable length 1 2m GT15 C30BS Cable length 3m GT15 C50BS Cable length 5m Description For connecting GOT and GOT cable GT15 C100BS Cable length 10m GT15 C200BS Cable length 20m GT15 C300BS Cab
360. h W Ego PAA EE o Sow oye S53 Soe wu gt a ez z O z l z A 2 WIRING OPTION 6 3 Mounting Position 6 3 Type GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 GOT only 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more or more or more 50 1 97 50 1 97 B nnectiorunitis tited 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 uS CO 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more or more or more 50 1 97 50 1 97 Serial communitati nit tited 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 eria 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more or more or more a 50 1 97 51 2 01 68 2 68 73 2 87 RS 422 Conversion unit is fitted ae or more or more or more or more 50 1 97 Ethernet communication unit is 50 1 97 or more or more fitted 20 0 79 or more 40 1 58 or more MELSECNET 10 communication 50 1 97 or more unit coaxial is fitted 20 0 79 or more CC Link communication unit 50 1 97 or more GT15 75J61BT13 Z fitted 20 0 79 or more 50 1 97 CC Link communication 50 1 97 or more or more unit GT15 J61BT13 fitted 20 0 79 or more 32 1 26 or more 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 MELSECNET 10 communication or more or more or more or more unit optical fitted 20 0 79 26 1 02 43 1 69 48 1 89 or more or more or more or more 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 MELSECNET H commu
361. h and after for half size character are not Ou displayed Z z The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen in 5 oa Zz O wg 2g Zu Zu z SEH 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 35 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 1 The function of hardcopy information Carries out delete copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function Refer to the following manual for details of hard copy function L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 13 2 Hard Copy Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 37 13 38 Delete Deletes the file 13 39 Copy Copies the file 13 40 Rename Renames the file 13 41 13 5 2 The display operation of hardcopy information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program Data control l Touch Hard copy information Hard copy informati Progran Data control Hard copy information Select drive g Nane Size Date Tine Flash Menory file A Built in CF card CTRDAT 07 25 06 11 59 DIR PROJECTI 01 31 00 05 23 Operate the Hard copy 8590KB Del Copy Rename 1 3 36 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 1 The function of hardcopy information 13 5 3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information
362. h the OK button To stop a search touch the Cancel button Fits Kiba AREA When searching is completed a z completion message is displayed in the 5 5 Zz paee Serean sal tching ee dialog 2 Pi leted Pal means Touching the OK button closes the E dialog 5 Zz poses e O W 50 Zz Piece Sie Ele Szo Q Fara Seg icp O08 n gt rs Fi Deo One Qos Ootn ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 107 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 13 11 5 Precautions Precautions for create delete 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in memory card for GT15 2 characters 1 character E xtension 4 characters Drive name 1 character SEO Eat Max 78 characters Remark f folder is assigned the hierarchy a The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set The following
363. he CF card extension unit is installed on the GOT Point gt 1 Cables to be connected to CF card extension unit Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines high voltage large current and I O signal lines 2 GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model Before wiring check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used 3 Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively For three or more ground cables connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal When the CF card extension unit is used ground the ground cable as shown below GOT GT15 CFEXIF i j LG FG N T w GT15 CO8CF D Install the shorting bar to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT s power For GT1550 shorting is not needed Shorting bar 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 15 7 6 2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE es INSTALLATION OPTION 2 Connect the ground cable of the connection cable with the GOT s ground cable to the FG terminal of the GOT s power For GT1550 connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the FG terminal of the GOT s power and connect the GOT s ground cable to the prot
364. he GOT 2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT Fit the GT15 751F900 in the GOT case 3 places with tightening torque 0 36 to D Fasten the GT15 75IF900 by tightening its mounting screws 0 48 N m 75IF900 then fasten them with 3 places to GT15 Attach the communication unit fixing brackets tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure 8 10 Mount the network unit A9GT QU71LP23 or AIGT QJ71BR13 or CC Link communication unit A8GT J61BT13 to GT15 75IF900 ae ae 5 ir ae gt oe Ss O z Ae A O 3 i re a ad MERZ m N Ues a lt Ww n TA Zz Ee o MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 ae O 1 Unit installation Pai 225 Power OFF the GOT enw mea 2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face zZ Q 5 lt A oO Zz a 8 zZ fe F 8 1 Communication Unit 8 11 8 1 2 Installing procedure Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I F 2 side of the GOT After the installation detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board For GT1550 the extension interface relay board is not needed Remove the connector cover Install the communication unit on the extension interface of the GOT rear face When the extension uni
365. he GOT main unit front side GT11 50UCOV For complying IP67 For 5 7 8 14 2 Installing procedure Q Fix the USB environmental protection cover to the GOT by tightening its upper fixing screw within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 N m It is advisable to set the USB environmental protection cover along a guiding hole which is provided in the GOT as it will make the installation easier For other than GT1550 For GT1550 Guiding Guiding hole mAN 2 When the USB interface is not used also tighten the lower fixing screw of the USB environmental protection cover within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 N m IP67 compliant For other than GT1550 For GT1550 A T NSR 8 54 8 14 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 14 1 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover When the USB interface is used remove the lower fixing screw of the USB environmental protection cover and connect the USB cable IP67 incompliant For other than GT1550 For GT1550 z S o W gt O Q A zZ fej 5 ae hz 26 nO Point gt Precautions when the USB environment cover is opened Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental cover is opened T j L O o wn Qa Zz lt x W Ego zz EE awn O ow 245 See Soe wu gt a Zz fe z Z o Z a Zz O E 8 14 USB
366. he build in aes flash memory Insufficient Flash ROM i a 520 1 Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified x capacity buffering area size 2 Install the option function board with add on memory The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user oe memory RAM Insufficient user memory i an 521 i 1 Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified x RAM capacity f buffering area size 2 Install the option function board with add on memory The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new f file has been created Unnecessary file deleted E aea 522 Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if x to create new file i the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files 524 Device writing error When writing in the device error occurred X Correct device Correct the device Unable to read write Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different 525 alarm log files under project x different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file f The file specified for the file conversion does not exist 526 File conversion failed f a x Check the settings for specifying a file to be converted The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or Improper monitor device f f 530 the channel is not the monitor target x Confirm monitor channel i Confirm the monitor target channel of the
367. he original level after changing security level temporarily Za iow Ww When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return o the security level to the original level Zz O wg 2g Zu Zu z Seu 11 4 Security Level Change 1 1 19 11 4 3 Security level change operation 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified For the key position 1 or 2 points can be specified from 4 corners on the screen When specifying 1 point a setting to switch the screen to the utility by keeping pressing the key position is available This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation The number of key positions that can be set differs depending on the GOT type Model name The number of settable key positions GT1595 1 point GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT155 1 or 2 points Point P Operation settings by GT Designer2 Set the utility call key at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation settings 9 3 Utility Display j ouch GOT setup T Touch O peration
368. he point table setting for MR Communication driver 2 32J O x x O J2S CP MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 Servo amplifier s ihoihetest d 532 Communication driver upporting the test run mode connection mb MELSERVO u3 J2S M 03 00 O Supporting settings for the number of Communication driver 2 73B O x x O retries the timeout time and delay time MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 09 Communication driver Robot controller i Supporting connection to robot controller 2 77F QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC O O x x connection CRnD 700 03 12 Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71024 MELDAS Supporting connection to CNC MELDAS 2 18U pe pa a OEZ C6 C64 series i n Q O O O 02 02 MELSECNET 10 02 02 CNC connection CC Link ID 02 02 eee Communication driver name has been Communication driver C64 2 43V n aa O x x oO changed AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 03 01 Supporting settings for the number of Communication driver retries the timeout time and delay time AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 03 09 O x x Q eee 2 73B Communication driver Communication driver name has been QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC O x x x changed CRnD 700 03 09 s i Genie dereader 2 09K Extended function OS upporting connection to barcode r i os O x oO oO Bar code reader Barcode 01 02 connection r g eee 370 Extended function OS upporting connection to 2D code reader pp g Barcode 02 04 O A O O Printer s i onioni 2D Extended function OS uppo
369. he upper backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left Similarly press the lower backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left x lt a zZ Q Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the following torque range Screw A 0 186 to 0 245 N m Other screws 0 36 to 0 48N m When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 15 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 3 Replacement 3 Power off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the extension unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted 5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Expanded figure of part A in 4 1 9 16 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight O Disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the GOT side connector ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF VANSA ANOT E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION Te STANDARD
370. hen selecting the C drive Displays the execution switch of functions download upload etc which can 7 Operation switch se ae be carried out in Project information Number of folders and f 8 files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders A Remark Displayed folders and files Ro 13 18 For the folders and files displayed refer to the following LC 13 1 5 Display file 13 3 Project Information 13 3 3 Display example of project information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Zz fe 8 l ed Z Display operation of project information T z JE E f Q Touch the drive in Select drive The Bee at ETO RAT ok COE HT i project data in that drive will be displayed 2 Touch the project data It is then selected 6 and highlighted Su ZO 5x9 zr Refer to the following for operation of zuk delete copy property data check gee download upload b TE mia Delete lt gt this section Property Data check a Delete Copy Download Up load Copy ERIC Rree ere ey Se this section A 2 lt x Property C gt this section tae Vow Data check lt gt this section p Download setup EEEE L this section A g z Upload setup cancel E 5 Als 2 PE F this section gas ook IZE 4 Touching lt lt button closes the screen Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file T
371. his instruction may cause a malfunction This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation The wet bulb temperature is 39 C or less for STN LCDs 3 1 General Specifications 3 2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the GT15 is as follows z L 3 2 1 GT1595 X g gt 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S 2 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN z 3 2 5 GT1555 V GT1555 Q GT1550 Q Ee a 55 miT T gt 3 2 1 GT1595 X BE 3 i Specifications z tem O GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD 3 iW Type TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view 9 oO Screen size 15 a Resolution 1 024 x 768 dots Display size 304 1 12 0 W x 228 1 8 98 H mm inch 9 16 dot standard font 64 characters x 48 lines 2byte character it Display characte
372. hown below e Present time Clock data lt 3 12 1 Time Setting and Display e Maintenance time notification data lt gt 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 8 11 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT1500 Model Description GT15 BAT Battery for backup of clock data and maintenance timing setting data 8 11 2 Battery specifications Item Specifications Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 1800mAh Storage life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Total power stoppage time Refer to Section 8 11 4 Battery life Lithium content 0 49g Application For backup of clock data and maintenance timing setting data 8 11 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically by referring to Section 8 11 4 Battery life Keep the GOT power supply on for 10 minutes or more and turn it off Executes step to 4 within 5 minutes of powering the GOT power supply off 6 Remove the battery holder form the GOT backside For other than GT1550 For GT1550 8 11 Battery 8 47 8 11 1 Applicable battery OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION Remove the old battery from the holder and disconnect the connector Connect the new battery to the connector
373. ht UTILITY FUNCTION z O Su 50 ae SG oE m OZ When the setting is completed the Touch panel calibration setup is message shown left is displayed completed Gali bration stai eala Touching the OK button returns to the previous screen z On EO nS wi E oO W On ox CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration 1 1 25 Setting 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 1 Q QnA ladder monitor setting function Storage locations and others for data to be used for the ladder monitor function can be set Saving the ladder data cuts out the need for reading the ladder data from PLC CPU at the next GOT start up enabling to start the ladder monitoring earlier Refer to the following manual for details of the ladder monitoring function lt gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Function Data save location Description Select the ladder data storage location of the Q QnA ladder monitor Setting range C Flash Memory B Memory card A Built in CF Card Not store lt Default C Flash Memory gt Automatic program read Priority comment Whether to automatically read sequence program when the ladder monitor starts from a touch switch or Advanced Alarm Display can be sel
374. ical graph display When set in accumulation mode displayed it in tally graph gt gt 2 Tally graph display Refer to the following for details related to setting of the extended alarm watch _ GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Touch and select the G1A file to display in a graph If touch Graph button displays the historical graph or tally graph according to the setting of the extended alarm watch quipment A failure e gO ine A stop on Q Material shortage in Ta e a 0 Major error _in Conveyan en ou quipment B failire eno When move a graph operate as follows e If touch A V button moves the graph up down line by line If touch A button moves the graph up down by one screen e If touch lt gt button moves the graph to left right by one column e If touch lt gt gt button moves the graph to left right by one screen TOR40 11 10 11 40 12 10 12 40 13 1 ja If touch D lt button closes the graph Example Historical graph 1 3 34 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 1 Historical graph display Program data control Alarm information Histrical graph x 5 Occur m ACK O Repair quipment A failure e gO 2 oO ine A stop ou O pa aterial shortage in Tal
375. igh intensity wide angle GT1585V STBA view 65536 colors video RGB compliant 100 to 240VAC memory size 9MB 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display high intensity GT1585V STBD wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB compliant 24VDC memory size 9MB GT1585 STBA 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1585 STBD 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle GT1575V STBA view 65536 colors video RGB compliant 100 to 240VAC memory size 9MB 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal display high intensity wide GT1575V STBD angle view 65536 colors video RGB compliant 24VDC memory size GT1575 STBA 9MB 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1575 STBD 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB GT1575 VTBA 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1575 VTBD 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65
376. ightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m Point gt Precautions when the attachment is installed TT The attachment can be used when the mounting panel thickness is 2 to 3mm If the installation panel thickness exceeds 3mm the GOT cannot be replaced by using the attachment e Replacing GOT with the attachment does not compliant with the standard IP65 IP67 NEMA4 of the waterproof and dustproof 8 58 8 16 Attachment 8 16 1 Applicable attachment 8 17 Multi Color Display Board The multi color display board is used when supporting 65536 display colors Depending on the function version of the GOT to be used 65536 colors are available without the multi color display board For GOTs requiring installation of the multi color display board refer to the following L gt 3 2 Performance Specifications 8 17 1 Applicable multi color display board The following multi color display board is applicable for GT1500 Model Description Multi color display board for XGA For 65536 color display GT15 XHNB 7 Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display GT15 VHNB Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display 1 To use it for a SVGA or VGA GOT install the following OS to the GOT Cannot be used for a SVGA or VGA GOT without installing the OS BootOS Ver 02 01 00 E or later Standard monitor OS Ver 02 01 00 or later For how
377. igital I O 24V or higher 1kV Digital 1 0 24V or less gt 250V Analog I O signal lines gt 250V EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity Immunity test in which lightening surge is applied to the product AC power type Power line between line and ground 2kV Power line between lines 1kV Data communication port 1kV DC power type Power line between line and ground 0 5kV Power line between lines 1kV EN61000 4 6 Conducted RF immunity Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power and signal lines is applied Power line 3V Data communication port 3V Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity 5 1 1 EMC directive Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive AC power type 0 5 cycle interval 1s or more DC power type 10 ms interval 1s or more Continued to next page Applied standard EN61131 2 2003 as 2 3 Test standard Radiated RF immunity Test details Test for checking normal operations when the power supply unit input voltage is fluctuated Standard value AC power type 47Hz 85V 264V 63Hz 85V 264V DC power type 20 4V 28 8V Third harmonic immunity Test for checking normal operations when the AC power waveform mixed with third harmonic wave is input 47Hz 85V phase 180 distortion rate 10 63Hz 132V phase 0
378. ile of advanced recipe file is converted to Unicode text file 13 50 l ak conversion pe je Recipe OTN Information Del File or folder is deleted 13 52 1 3 screen Copy File is copied 13 53 ja Move File is moved 13 54 Z gt Rename File name is changed 13 56 3 n Create Folder New folder is created 13 57 O W Create G1P New G1P file of advanced recipe file is created 13 58 Load record i Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 13 60 GOT PLC S d 6 ave recor Advanced The device of controller is saved in selected record 13 61 Recipe PLC GOT o iL Record List Match records m screen Selected record is verified to the device value of controller 13 63 2 GOT PLC 5 Delete Device Value The device value contained in selected record is deleted 13 65 u zZ O 38 g 22 x lt a 12 oa 0 w g 20 gt 27 Oe Zu z lt SEO 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 45 13 7 1 Function of advanced recipe information 13 7 2 Operation of advanced recipe information display Main menu Program Data control lt gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program Data 2 Touch Advanced control S Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Information HAPROJECT 1 KindName Size Date Time DIR DIR RECIPE1 03 15 05 11 DIR JREC PE2 03 15 05 11 DIR RECIPES 03 15 05 11 GIP J ARPOOOO1 1K 03 15 05 11 CSV ARP00001 1K 03 15 05 11 TXT JARPOOOO1 1K 03 15 05 11 Operate advanced rec
379. iles CF card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the logging after the processing for other files is completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of the logging folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen 13 8 Logging Information 1 81 13 8 5 Precautions 3 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS ee Sea N AND BATTERY fe STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 13 9 Memory Information 13 9 1 Memory information functions Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a personal computer 13 9 2 Memory information display operation 13 82 Main menu lt lt gt gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program Data control 13 9 Memory Information 13 9 1 Memory information functions Program Data control Touch Memory Information Memory Information Program Data control Flash memory empty area A Built in CF card information 9268 K byte C Flash Memory User area 7978 K byte e 1518 K byte Boot drive empty area size 56896 K byte Check memory information 13 9 3 Memory information display example z O o
380. ility FUNCTION SEs carane a 9 2 Index 3 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Memo WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range
381. ime can be set E E ag Approx 40 000 h or longer Lifes Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C z Type Matrix resistive film Car au gt Number of touch keys 1 200 objects screen 30 lines x 40 columns 295 ofuW Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots per ke Of Touch y p y asa panel Number of objects that can be simultaneously Maximum of 2 objects touched z Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max E Detection length None z ie Human _ Detection range None Z sensor Detection delay time None Detection temperature None C dri Built in flash memory 9Mbytes Built in flash memory 5Mbytes rive for string project data and OS for string project data and OS Memory i zZ Life Number of T eee 100 000 times Z write times Battery GT 15BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C zZ Continued to next page gt 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 10 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN Specifications Item GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 232 6 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function USB Built in interf
382. in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Bulit in CF card A drive memory check or Extended memory card B drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen Internal Flush memory area If select OK button the numeric keyboard window is write read check displayed Execute now lf select Cancel button returns to the initial menu Touch to input password 5 9 2 0 and touch Enter If touch Enter executes read write check for the built in MEME flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds Please input password efo 5 6 AE AC Dell Enter ESSE 1 4 5 14 3 Memory Check 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check z a Remark Password change 3 R The password cannot be changed Z i Ww When input password error the cancel Internal Flush memory area z dialog is displayed write read check Password error If touch LOK returns to the Memory check screen zZ O Su i 50 0K Sao a oan Internal Flush memory area write read check Ze Executing now Ion gt FO TaZ aa owe aon n gt 2 3 Ei
383. in the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version 3 2 Performance Specifications Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN Specifications Item lt GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD g TFT color liquid crystal LCD of high NP Q Type i j TFT color liquid crystal intensity and wide angle view Screen size 8 4 z Resolution 640x480dots 7 Display size 171 6 73 W x128 5 04 H mm inch fa Bz 16 dot standard font 40 characters x 30 lines 2byte character ae Display character Display 12 dot standard font 53 characters x 40 lines 2byte character 3 section Display color 65536 colors 2 16 colors no Left Right 65degrees Left Right 45degrees Display angle Top 50 degrees Top 20 degrees 3 Bottom 60 degrees Bottom 20 degrees E W oO Intensity of LCD only _ 380 cd m 150 cd m 2 Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment 4 level adjustment Life Approx 41 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C 9 Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is w Backlight included So Backlight off screen saving t
384. inana elke Selb eet alone Pe wie Mann de gus hese dae wt cowie een aces A Once dogg cee 5 14 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 15 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring method 00 0c eee ee eee 5 15 5 4 2 Processing connection cables 0 eee 5 18 5 4 3 Grounding the cable 0 2 0 0 eee 5 24 INSTALLATION 6 1to6 12 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 1 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 2 6 3 Mounting Position 6 3 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 11 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 11 WIRING 7 1to 7 16 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 3 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 4 7 3 Grouding 7 6 7 3 1 Grounding the GOT 20 0 2 ccc tte eee 7 6 7 3 2 Wiring related malfunction causes and the measures examples 00 7 9 7 4 Panel Inside Wiring Panel Outside Wiring 7 11 GAA CRanelinside witttG sects eiee wei aa cond edad OE eieeuuuhiad Pale kd 7 11 TAZ Panel outside Wiring sce i aeir en deted said Seis Gd ae aden ee ernie Geta 7 11 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment 7 12 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 13 7 6 1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable 000 c cece eee 7 13 7 6 2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable 04 7 15 8 OPTION 8 1to 8 60 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable communication unit a a auaa a
385. ing contents 1 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer2 Version Brightness Contrast Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters Refer to the following for brightness contrast setting 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment Invert Colors GOT setup Display Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF _ Battery alarm display OFF Brightness contrast Setting Invert Colors o Touching each setting item changes its setting ON lt OFF Touching the OK button fixes the settings 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 9 11 1 3 Display setting operations COMMUNICATION 4 INTERFACE ey SETTING Zz O lt o W Q 0 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION a 0 Z E Ww 7 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Touching the D lt button but not the OK button displays the left dialog box Changes are discarded if you close n the window before pressing Confirm Do you want to proceed 2 If closing the GOT setup Display and GOT setup screens after setting all i
386. ing related malfunction causes and the measures examples The malfunction causes in grounding the GOT include potential difference caused by groundings and noise Potential difference and noise may be reduced by taking the following measures u Wiring of GOT s ground cable and power line When the ground cable and power line of the GOT are installed together the GOT may malfunction due to noise z Separating the ground cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise z a ae hz v 58 GOT LG_F ie zZ O j L i ad Power for the power equipment Power for the power equipment T Good example The ground and power cables Bad example The ground and power cables are are separated in wiring installed together l l Z Leading of the ground cable from the panel having a control equipment in the panel n having the GOT ae E When a single ground cable is led from the panel having a control equipment such as PLC in the panel lt u having the GOT the cable may need to be directly connected to the terminal block of the GOT Connection 3 E a So Ground cable led from the panel Seu having the control equipment Q Zz fe z a z Z 7 OPTION 7 3 Grouding 7 9 7 3 2 Wiring related malfunction causes and the measures examples 7 10 The malfunction occurred by the potential difference caused by the groundings in such a case may be prevented by reducin
387. inuously The read device of the system information may have turned ON when the device was set turning ON the Buzzer output signal Check the setting of the read device When the Buzzer output signal has no error proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes 1 For models using STN monochrome LCDs unintended lines may be seen flowing from the displayed line Note that this phenomenon is a feature of the product not a defect or fault 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 3 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes screen operation stopped Phenomenon Cause status a Switching to the utility Action Error code system alarm O Enabled Example 460 Communication unit error When the system alarm display function can be used take the action for the error code system alarm displayed If the action cannot be taken proceed to 2 b The system alarm display function cannot O Disabled be used Proceed to 2 c b Executing of I O check from the GOT utility Display details O Communication error Example A message indicating the cause may be a connection error was displayed Proceed to 2 c The hardware such as a communication O No error interface has no err
388. invalid by the utility the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 turns ON when the human sensor detects human movement Unintended operation may result therefore if controlling the Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal System Signal 1 1 b1 and Human Sensor Detection Signal associating them with each other by a sequence program etc When setting the human sensor to invalid review the related sequence program etc 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting Main menu GOT setup 9 3 Utility Display Touch Touch GOT setup Display Display Touch an item to change settings Point f Restart after setting change If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the lt lt button after the setting of each item is changed and touch the x button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected Display Operation If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected FSi Q QnA ladder monitor Transparent mode Fai i P Ei Backup restoration setting 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting 11 5 COMMUNICATION 4 INTERFACE PF SETTING zZ On EO nS wE oO W On
389. ion do not store other data to the memory card If doing so the previous data will be unavailable Q Zz LON mi E atot 9 Dp GaP ood ora ee Sea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 1 3 113 13 12 4 GOT data package acquisition operation 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK The GOT can display the screen for debugging or self checking The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking function Item Description Reference page System monitor Ladder monitor A list editor List editor for MELSEC A Deb intelligent module monitor Network monitor Q motion monitor servo 144 ebu 3 g amplifier monitor CNC monitor Backup restoration and CNC data I O SFC monitor Memory check Drawing check Font check Touch panel check I O check Self check 14 3 NETWK unit status display System alarm display GOT errors CPU errors network errors 14 32 GOT start time Time when the GOT was started 14 34 Operator info p Operator management Password change Function setting 14 36 Management 14 1 Debug In this manual the overview of the debuggingfunction and the operation procedure until displaying the screen are described For display contents and operation procedure of debuggings refer to the following manual L GOT1000 Series Extended Option Fu
390. ion IOn gt F O G10 TXT se f G10 file of operation log file is converted to Unicode text file 13 97 a m liz conversion aon Del File or folder is deleted 13 99 Copy File is copied 13 100 i gt Move Folder is moved 13 101 g z S ETA Rename File name is changed 13 103 TE 2 In Create Folder New folder is created 13 104 oe lt List Displays operation logs in a list and allows searching 13 105 525 ja Zz lt x z a a n Ww Ww xe O W ele O i W 2 O 0 O 2 25 fi 12 oa O w g ge ze oO wz zu lt SEH 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 93 13 11 1 Function of operation log information 13 11 2 Display operation of operation log information Main menu Program Data control lt gt 9 3 Utility Display La rogram Data Touch Operation log Information Information Ol on on Intormation PROJECT 1 OPELOG Name Size Date Time OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 OPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 OPELOG_20060309_0001 7K 03 09 06 10 38 O maa 4K OPELOG_20060310_0002 11K 03 10 06 13 33 Operate Operation log file j 15560KB 0KB B10C8V Cony HD Folder 610 gt TXT Del List 1 3 94 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 2 Display operation of operation log information 13 11 38 Example of operation log information display
391. ion Number of IN side connectors 1 SE controller CPU A series For intermediary and last GOT GT15 ABUS2 1 connection standard model Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side Z Bus connection unit a p For last GOT on GT15 75QBUSL Z0 For QCPU Q mode motion Number of IN side connectors 1 Q z m controller CPU Q series For intermediary and last GOT For 15 H2a GT15 75QBUS2L connection slim model Number of IN and OUT side 12 1 connectors 1 for each side 10 4 8 4 For last GOT 5 GT15 75ABUSL 5 7 g For A QnACPU motion Number of IN side connectors 1 5 controller CPU A series For intermediary and last GOT s zZ GT15 75ABUS2L connection slim model Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 for each side GT15 RS2 9P For RS 232 interface connection connector type Serial communication i nit GT15 RS4 9S For RS 422 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 TE For RS 422 interface connection terminal block type z Ethernet a GT15 J71E71 100 Ethernet 100Base TX 10Base T unit communication unit 8 MELSECNET H GT15 J71LP23 25 2 Optical double loop unit communication unit GT15 J71BR13 2 Coaxial bus unit Zz fe E fe 8 1 Communication Unit 8 4 8 1 1 Applicable communication unit Product name Model Description Optical it GT15 75J71LP23 Z PUCA 00p uni popes MELSECNET 10 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 751F900 set 12 1 communication unit Coaxial b it 10 4 GT15
392. ion Unit Extend interface GOT front face GOT rear face USB interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 4 Channel number specification menu BOX Set channel No to use with standard interface or extend interface Refer to this section 5 for driver that can be assigned to each channel 0 Set when the communication interface is not used 1to4 Set when connecting to a controller Except bar code reader and RFID controller 5to7 Not available 8 Set when connecting to a bar code reader or a RFID controller A bar code reader cannot be used with a RFID controller Connect a bar code reader or a RFID controller 9 Set when connecting with PC GT Designer2 For USB and RS 232 interface the simultaneous setting is possible However when either interface is during communication communication is not possible for another interface Set when using the gateway function when connection types except the a UTILITY FUNCTION g c bw Zon Ethernet connection is used for connecting to controllers Ethernet download function printer video display RGB display RGB output CF card unit CF card extension unit sound output or external I O 2z 7 Fixed to 9 for the USB interface ze 2 E PEE 5 Driver display BOX aan The name of communication driver assigned to the
393. ion times reset Function to reset the writing addition times to 0 APPENDICES 17 1 2 Display operation of Addition times reset Main menu Addtion times reset 9 3 Utility Display Addition times reset Power on addition time Back light x 1000 H Reset INDEX Display x 1000 H Reset ouch key pushing addit ion times Touch key 10000 Reset Memory writing tipe Build in flash 00D 1000 Reset Touch Addtion times reset Addition time 17 1 Addition times reset 1 7 1 17 1 1 Addition times reset function 17 1 3 Operation of Addition times reset If touch Reset button of each item the addition time or the addition count becomes 0 If touch OK button the reset value is reflected If touch lt button instead of touching OK below is displayed and the screen closes button the changed contents are canceled after the dialog With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Cancel 4 Touching the gt lt button returns the main menu screen Point gt Addition times resetting timing It is convenient to reset addition times when replace backlight display section touch panel or built in flash memory 1 7 2 17 1 Addition times reset 17 1 3 Operation of Addition times reset 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS
394. ion unit as the B drive of the GOT Use the unit when a CF card interface is needed on the control panel a Z lt Example of how to use CF card unit Infrequently used data including project data are saved to a CF card and frequently used data b including alarm histories and operation logs are saved to another CF card The data can be saved in 3 each CF card 2 CF card fo Bs uF be Gl The first CF card Project data goz aes ol The second CF card Alarm history operation log mga GOT CF card unit APPENDICES Example of how to use CF card extension unit The CF card extension unit can be used in the same way as the above Example of how to use CF card unit For using the CF card extension unit there is no need to open the control panel s door when a CF card is inserted or ejected Inside the Project data is saved to ee nee control panel the first CF card p INDEX GOT CF card extension unit LA GOT E Alarm histories and operation logs are CF card extension unit saved to the second CF card Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive App 21 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series The following describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2 77F For function comparisons among GOTs refer to the following lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Appendix 3 2 List of Differe
395. ioned left is value will be canceled displayed OK Point 1 4 If touch gt lt button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the changed settings When connecting to an external device which does not have clock function If set to Adjust or Broadcast for clock setting while the GOT is connected to external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 3 PLC CPUs with clock function Clock setting when using the multi channel function The channel No of a controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted cannot be set by the utility The controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted can be set by GT Designer2 For channel settings refer to the following lt gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 1 Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU Setting of clock setting and battery The battery is not installed in GOT at purchase When select Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with installing the optional battery to the GOT Operation setting by GT Designer2 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display settin
396. ions from installing a GOT to communicating with a controller refer to the following manuals Included GT15 General Description GT11 General Description Purpose Confirming part names and specifications of the GOT KOAA ero k LOETA Connection Manual GT15 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual eS DAEUGO Confirming the GOT installation method Ove iow Confirming the mounting method for extension units or option devices aia Overview Confirming the PLC connection method Detailed Confirming the utility operation method Detailed Confirming error codes system alarm displayed on the GOT 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format Other manuals The following manuals are also available The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format a GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Describes functions for more efficient debugging as the ladder monitor function system monitor function and A list edit function b GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Describes how to use the gateway function GT SoftGOT1000 Version O Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT SoftGOT1000 and various functions GT Simulator2 Version O Operating Manual Describes how to simulate the created project data with the GT Simulator2 GT Converter2 Version O Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT Converter2
397. ipe file a bIP CS Copy Move Ere Execute GIP Tx Del Rename Steate 1 3 46 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 2 Operation of advanced recipe information display 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display z O o Z Advanced recipe information screen T E rogram Data Control Advanced Recipe Information E D Size Date Time A Built in CF card Zz O on ZQg Sas SE ui 2 3 4 95u fa Zz 7 8 og 25 Lt gt F O z FE KB OKB i Of reate 2ow ey Copy Move Ee Execute aon GIP gt TXT Del Rename Cygate 2 Number Item Description oe z 1 Drive The target drive can be selected Even if CF card is not installed this message appears E th 5 a i Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder g lt 2 2 Kind en ie om gt In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR oak 32h Displays the file name or folder name 2 For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 1 3 Confirm the nondisplayed part with the R ename button etc 3 Name l splayed part wi 2 gt 13 7 4 3 Rename operation gt ll After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 m 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed u 5 Size Displ
398. ipment OFF gt Human sensor Screen saver status cancel by human sensor can be set to Effective or Invalid GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X V S S Effective Invalid lt At factory shipment Effective gt Sensor detect level 2 The sensor detect level can be set GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X V S S 1 1 2 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions Oto 10 lt At factory shipment 10 gt Items Description Setting range The time corresponding to the Sensor detect z Sensor detect time level is displayed setting is disabled 5 c c c When the Sensor detect level is changed the 0 to 4 corresponding time is reflected by touching lt At factory shipment 4sec gt Z X V S S Enter button The time period from when the human sensor Sensor off delay P j OMin 10Sec to 60Min 0Sec detects no human movement until the Human Ch Ch Ch l lt At factory shipment OMin z mnll imeak Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 es 2 GT1595 gt turns OFF can be set Su 0 1 If setting 0 the title screen is not hidden z The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data a E hit contents SE 2 The monitoring time corresponding to the sensor detect level 0 to 10 is as follows 1 1 As the sensor detect level becomes greater the sensitivity of the human sensor becomes higher Sensor detect level 10 9 8 7
399. is attached to the GOT do not stretch and bend the cover too much Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber e Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine e When the protective cover for oil gets dusts wipe the dusts off with a damp cloth e When the protective cover for oil is used the USB connector on the GOT front face cannot be used e When the protective cover for oil is used the human sensor does not correctly operate Disable the human sensor with the utility For the human sensor setting refer to GT15 User s Manual 11 1 3 Display setting operations 8 13 Protective cover for oil 8 53 8 13 2 Installation procedure OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 14 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environment cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environment cover at factory shipment Replace when damage and deterioration are caused 8 14 1 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT1500 Model Description Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side GT15 UCOV For complying IP67 For 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 Environmental cover for USB interface on t
400. is the same z Source file ARP00001 G1P exists in the destination folder the dialog Change to ARPOOOO1 CSV Zz Do wou want to Overwrite the tile shown left appears without starting the 5 conversion If touch the button z overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels the conversion OK Cancel Zz O lt Sg Zao Proc ss completed me message of comperen 7 displayed TE in dialogue when conversion is ae zZ completed 2s If touch OK button the dialog is closed Q Fara s g atot n gt 2a ETA DES P E SE oor oar ja zZ lt x z e 5 m lu WL x O W ani O W ep O 0 58 g n gt Zz Wg oa Zz a wg 2g E EE zZ Seo 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 51 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Delete operation Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted Ix elect Drive PROJECT1 indName Size Date Time DIR GIL LOGO0001 1K 06 05 01 15 26 GIL LOGO0002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 G1L EET 001 1K_06 05 01_ 15 18 D Touch and select the file folder to delete m gt M eke SSE File BiL csy Copy Move Erate GIL TXT Del Rename Tavest file ARPO0001 CSV If touch Del button the dialog mentioned Are you sure do you want to delete left is displayed If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing
401. isplay operation of operator management Main menu Debug amp self check Operator setting menu L77 9 3 Utility Display Touch Debug amp self Touch Operator info check Management Operator management Uperatorhame Administrator her Add a Edit Delete Retura Drive in us Inport Export Save Display example of operator management 1 Operator information management screen b c d Edit Delete Return vort Expert Save Operator Name Displays operator names 1 4 37 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 1 Operator management Touch Operator management No Item Description Zz b ID Displays operator IDs 5 c Level Displays security levels for operators d Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information Z e Operation keys Execution keys for each function 5 Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information f Drive in use Touch the item and then the display switches A Built in CF card B Memory ow card Z2g The display switches only when a memory card is installed on the GOT r Se hi Ozo 2 Operator information edit screen Touch the button or touch the button with the operator information selected on the Operator information management screen and then the Operator information edit screen is E displayed lt 6 The ope
402. ite device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 1 4 33 14 9 System Alarm Display 14 9 3 Operating the system alarm display 14 10 GOT Start Time Zz O o Zz 14 10 1 GOT start time function 2 GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time 5 e Start time of GOT e Current time of GOT e Operating hours of GOT z z i i ow 14 10 2 Display operation of GOT start time 220 OZO Main menu Debug amp self check c7 9 3 Utility Display Q Zz s g Touch GOT start time aow Touch Debug amp self check ep 2 3 Fig WEG E Srp GOT start time oe Debug self check Start time GOT Start Time Da i 11 10 2005 THU 15 59 20 z Current Time 11 10 2005 THU 16 02 20 Z il Operating hours a A i ie TO 14 x W I u m 29 kK e 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 10 GOT Start Time 1 4 34 14 10 1 GOT start time function 14 10 3 Display of GOT start time Item Start Time Debug self check Start time GOT Start Time Start Time 1 10 2005 THU 15 59 20 Current Time 11 10 2005 THU 16 02 20 Operating hours Oh 02m 58s Description Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Operating hours Displays operating hours of the GOT The displ
403. ites the oar file ok Cance If touch Cancel button cancels the eee ea N AND BATTERY conversion Poner SUGCESSENT 4 The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed If touch OK button the dialog is closed x O W ani O i W ep O 0 Zz O DE On g n Sz z ui oa 12 oa Zz O wg 20 a ze oO Oz ou aq SEG 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 31 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Deletion operation Deletes selected files Delete file name AAMOOOOO G1A Delete now Delete is completed 1 3 32 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Touch and select the file to delete 2 If touch Del button the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch If touch OK button the file is deleted Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Copy operation Zz fe Copies the selected file S re gt Touch and select the file to copy 5 5 information lect grive PROJECTI Si ie Tie If touch Copy button the message a A JANO0000 IK 03 15 06 12 37 A Please select a destination is displayed C Flash Menory in the left bottom of the scree
404. ithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambiant temperature of 25 C RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps RS 232 6 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function USB Full Speed 12Mbps Device 1ch Connector shape Mini B fot USB Built in Application For connecting a personal computer Project data upload download interface OS installation FA transparent function Compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector shape TYPE Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Multi color display board For multi color display board mounting 1ch Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 Inside the enclosure IP2X Protective structure External dimensions Excluding USB environmental 397 15 6 W x 296 11 7 H x 61 2 40 D mm inch protection cover Panel cutting dimensions 383 5 15 1 W x 282 5 11 1 H mm inch Weight 5 0kg 11 0lb mounting fixtures are not included C tible software package AE p 9 2 17T or later 2 32J or later GT Designer2 Version
405. itsubishi Electric System Service Refer to the following section for the lives of the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight 3 2 Performance Specifications 19 1 19 1 Daily Inspection Daily inspection items Inspection No Inspection Item Criterion Action Method Check for loose Retighten screws within the 1 GOT mounting status Securely mounted gt mounting screws specified torque range Retighten screws Loose terminal screws i Not loose Retighten terminal screws with screwdriver Connection Proximate solderless i f 2 Visual check Proper intervals Correct status terminals Retighten connector fixing Loose connectors Visual check Not loose screws T Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one sage 3 Foreign material No foreign matter status Visual check 2 Remove clean attachment sticking Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure 8 12 Protective Sheet 19 2 Periodic Inspection Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Ambient Make measurement Display section 0 to 40 C l l temperature with thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C a SANNO pane Surrounding tem
406. ius is smaller than the lowest part of the case on the back of the GOT the dimension of 7 is equal to or less than 0 however it is written as 0 in the table Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 11 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES INDEX 7 App 12 External dimensions of the communication cable a External dimensions of the bus connection cable connector Dimensions mm inch and Cable model Cable length m ft shape of the connector GOT side PLC side GT15 QCOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 Fig 3 Fig 3 GT15 QCOBS 15 49 20 66 25 82 30 98 35 120 Fig 3 Fig 3 GT15 CONB 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 1 Fig 2 GT15 ACOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 2 Fig 2 GT15 A1SCOB 0 7 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 1 Fig 1 GT15 A1SCONB 0 45 1 5 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 4 Fig 2 GT15 J2COB 1 3 Fig 1 Fig 6 GT15 370COB S1 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 2 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 COEXSS 1 10 6 34 8 20 6 67 6 30 6 100 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 COBS 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 EXCNB 0 5 2 Fig 5 Fig 4 1 The GT15 CLEXSS GT15 CL1BS cable has a grounding wire 1 m Be sure to connect the wire to control panels 2 The GT15 CLJEXSS 1 is the set product consisting of GT15 EXCNB GT15 CLIBS Refer to Fig A
407. ive stresses including an incorrect bending radius of the cable on the connection cable gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions S9 10 OOP o ba 2 86 0 10W 10 GZ 25 or more It 0 98 500 or less 19 69 500 or less 19 69 im 7 Available area Prohibited area for installation for installation Unit mm inch z9 2 S9 10 009 6 6 6 3 Mounting Position 2 Prohibited area for installation The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the GOT When the CF card extension unit is used with the other extension units the control panel side r installation unit cannot be installed in some areas because the cables of the other extension units S get in the way of the control panel side installation unit g The following shows prohibited areas for the installation a For GT1595 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the 5 GOT gt Prohibited areas for the installation with the other extension units do not exist a FAE b For GT1585 DZ The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm 0 98inch from the oe GOT When the other extension units are used the control panel side installation unit cannot be m installed in the areas shown in the following figure 5 lt o m A X a Extension unit Model
408. l 1 A QnA QCPU QJ 1024 Change assignment 2 None Change assignment 3 None Change assignment 4 None Change assignment 8 Barcode 9 Host PC Channe1 Dr iver assign ChNo RSZ SWeSuppIY ChNo USB 1 A QnA QCPU 071024 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 1st ChNo None None 2nd None 0 None 3rd None Q None Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection As the communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 installed in the GOT is displayed touch it The screen returns to the Channel Driver assign screen Touch the OK button Touch the lt j button and return to the Communication Setting screen O Confirm that the selected communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is assigned After the confirmation touch the OK button Touch the lt j button to restart GOT 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 10 7 a UTILITY FUNCTION eg ce os bw Zon DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING Channel number setting operation Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set Co
409. l For intermediary and last GOT for each side GT15 RS2 For RS 232 interface connection connector type Serial communication it GT15 RS4 For RS 422 interface connection connector type uni GT15 RS4 TE For RS 422 interface connection terminal block type Ethernet ET GT15 J71E71 100 Ethernet 100Base TX 10Base T unit communication unit MELSECNET H GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical double loop unit communication unit GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z Optical loop unit A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set GT15 75J71BR13 Z Coaxial bus unit A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set CC Link IE controller network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX Optical loop unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compliant GT15 75J61BT13 Z Intelligent device station unit A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set Interface converter unit 227 GT15 75IF900 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Conversion unit for GOT A900 GOT800 series communication unit Number of IN and OUT side connectors 1 QCPU Q Mode bus connection cable Sold separately Product name Q extension cable GOT to GOT connection cable Description For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT Model name GT15 QC06B Cable length 0 6m GT15 QC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 QC30B Cable length 3m
410. l 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Vertical 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Image Quality and Color Tone 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Contrast 100 to 100 The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area in the horizontal direction and vertical Video Display Settings direction and image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity can be set Th i di lit lt At factory shipment 0 gt e captive area and image quality can p aSa Brightness 100 to 100 be set for each channel lt At factory shipment 0 gt Intensity 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt 1 1 34 11 10 Video Display Settings 11 10 1 Functions of the video display settings 11 10 2 Displaying the video display settings Main Menu gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch GOT steup Touch Communication Settings Video RGB Setting 37 10 1 Communication Setting i Touch Video Display Settings Video RGB Video R GB Setting Touch Video Display Settings 11 10 Video Display Settings 1 1 35 11 10 2 Displaying the video display settings COMMUNICATION INTERFACE m SETTING zZ On EO nS wE oO W On CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 10 3 Operating the video
411. l Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 For NTSC PAL 4ch analog RGB ich mixed input RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT For analog RGB output CF card unit GT15 CFCD For CF card installation B drive CF card extention unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET For CF card installation B drive External I O unit GT15 DIO For connecting an external I O device operation panel Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output Option unit dedicated cable Sold separately Product name Model name Description Dedicated printer GT09 C30USB 5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT USB mini to printer USB connection cable 6 Included with an option unit at the time of purchase Stand Sold separately Product name Model name Description GT15 90STAND Stand for 15 GT15 80STAND Stand for 12 1 Stand GT15 70STAND Stand for 8 4 10 4 GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Battery Sold separately Product name Model name Description Battery GT15 BAT Battery for clock data and maintenance report data backups 2 17 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Protective sheet Sold separately Product name Model name Description GT15 90PSCB Clear 5 sheets 5 GT15 90PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets 15 protective sheet m GT15 90PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT15 90PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets 2 GT15 80PSCB
412. later Dec 2006 Version F or later Dec 2006 5 3 1 GOT 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol wi O W 7 Q VOLTAGE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 2 Connection method Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive O Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive 5 10 Connection method GT15 Bus connection O Direct connection to CPU O Computer link connection O MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 2 CC Link IE controller network connection O CC Link connection intelligent device station O CC Link connection via G4 x Ethernet connection Oo Other connections o2 1 For details about each connection method refer to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 When connecting the GOT to other controllers as a PLC manufactured by other company create the cable by the user and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device lt 5 4 2 8 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier or CNC connection Point Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC Q series MELSEC QnA series or
413. layed screen Seu enn or points to For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the 303 large Decrease setting x following points lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Set trigger points too The number of objects using Sampling Cycle during ON 304 large Decrease setting Cycle during OFF exceeds 100 x points Decrease the number of objects The project data is not downloaded to the built in flash No project data 306 memory x Download screen data and Download the project data to the built in flash memory i The monitor device of the object is not set 307 Monitor device not set x Set the monitor device of the object 308 No comment data The comment file does not exist x Download comment Create the comment file and download to GOT 309 Device reading error The error occurred when reading a continuous device X Correct device Correct the device 1 Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project data Project data does not pee 7 310 2 Specified base screen window screen is out of the x exist or out of range NRN permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the No of alarm has alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum 311 exceeded upper limit points x Delete restored alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection freque
414. lder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed 83KB 1i i EE meam ieee 4 If touch A v button of the scrollbar the 6 2 screen scrolls up down by one line fee Q If touch A A4 button the screen scrolls Ear up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name Q o is selected and inverted Zg a KW oD ja 6 Refer to the following for operation of sas Q installation upload property data check 32E Installation lt this section 13 Upload i sa Randeeemaawnasen this section z r j gt PrOpErtY siess LF this section z e Data check LS this section G nll i D Touching lt lt button closes the screen GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 2 OS Information 1 3 11 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive Standard CF card or B drive Extended memory card can be installed in GOT This item explains using the A drive Install the CF card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card gt 8 8 CF Card oa SS Touch A Built in CF Card for drive MS or 8 02 05 1B ae E NN sa ta n selection 2 Touching Install button starts the install ma MERTES ETa Install Upload Propert
415. le 4 7 z warts 40 A N ES i Changes the Changes the Changes the 3 2 z number a number to the number a fa E Defaut confira certain amount touched certain a 5 aa in the position amount in the direction direction 1 1 When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined a o ae w H Oo Changes are discarded if you close If you touch the button without the window before pressing Confirm touching the button the dialog box Do you want to proceed Sar on the left is displayed Q o Zs r foe fay pee OES lt a 5 ook O25 OK Cancel Q Z lt z 4 After completing all the items to set if you z touch the X button the display returns to oe Video RGB Setting TO x O W ani O SR S aS m Point P Precautions for setting If the value for Horizontal or Vertical is too large RGB display may not be performed or the display may be disrupted or stopped If this happens return the settings to their default values and make settings in the A range where RGB display is possible t Za 1o oa Zz fe 20 zZ z SEH 11 11 RGB Display Settings 1 1 39 11 11 3 Operating the RGB display settings 11 12 Backup Restore Settings 11 12 1 Backup restore function The storage location for backup data can be set For how to use the backup restore function refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual
416. le and power line A GOT Current status Power for the power equipment O Installed The FG cable and power line of together the GOT are installed together O Not installed together Measure for GOT the cables installed UG FG together 6 Power for the power equipment Separating the FG cable and f O Effective power line of the GOT in wiring O Ineffective reduces the influence of noise 4 Surge measures Current status A surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor O Used When a surge suppressor is O Not used used fill out the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used Measure for the equipment Attaching the surge suppressor without a on the cable close to the load can O Effective surge reduce the influence of surge on 0O Ineffective suppressor the GOT The surge suppressor must be used attached close to the load Entry area Model name of the surge suppressor Equipment name 20 8 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 5 Grounding status Current status Measure for the FG cables connected Fig Fig Connection cable Panel grounding Panel grounding Connection
417. le length 30m AOJ2HCPU For connecting AOJ2HCPU power supply module connection cable GT15 J2C10B Cable length 1m A0J2 PW and GOT Buffer circuit cable GT15 EXCNB Cable length 0 5m Combined with GT15 COBS can be used as GT15 COEXSS 1 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs Sold separately RS 232 cable Product name QCPU direct connection cable FX communication function extension board connection cable FX communication function adapter connection cable data transfer cable Model name GT01 C30R2 6P GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m Cable length 3m Description For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting FXKCPU communication function extension board D sub 9 pins connector FXCPU communication function adapter D sub 9 pins connector and GOT For connecting personal computer Drawing software D sub 9 pins female and GOT D sub 9 pins female FX communication function adaptor connection cable data transfer cable GT01 C30R2 25P Cable length 3m For connecting FXKCPU communcation function adaptor D sub 25 pins connector and GOT For connecting personal computer Drawing software D sub 25 pins male and GOT D sub 9 pins female Computer link connection cable GT09 C30R2 9P Cable length 3 m GT09 C30R2 25P 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Cable length 3 m For connecting computer link module serial communication module and
418. lete Return Drive in use Inport Export Save 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 1 Operator management 5 Import operation Import the operator information that is already exported to a memory card to the GOT ne add Edit Delete Return Drive in use Import Export Save The import process overwrites existing files Do you want to proceed OK Cancel The import process of operator information file is completed 14 11 Operator Information Management D Touch the button Import 3 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in a memory card is imported to the GOT file name AUTHINF G1U 14 46 14 11 1 Operator management COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CLOCK SETTINGS DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTING AND BATTERY Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION SETTINGS STATUS DISPLAY a O Ww S LL w Ww 2
419. llation is completed the dialog as shown below is displayed Q The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off 22 CoreOS Install Ver 02 01 00 E 29 BTLEL Zo 5 COTMeBR EY FH REROT EEO Installation is completed O Turn OFF GOT and remove CF card Ed H aim o Phase 5 z CAJT ma Progress O Remove the CF card after powering the GOT off i Q Ze Q Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown below g lt The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment Install OS Standard monitor OS communication driver etc or download project data as required For how to install each OS or download project data refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA x 3 BASE VAK IUTK REV Please install the Standard OS BootO Version 02 01 00 E 18 5 CoreOS 1 s 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 8 s 18 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed When the CoreOS cannot be installed confirm the following item If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item the error may be caused by a hardware failure ss Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative Error The CoreOS installation is not executed even when installing the CF card in the GOT Action 1 Check whether the CF card access switch
420. llowing for details LF GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 1 2 Drive capacity required for data transfer 1 3 6 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 13 1 5 Display file Zz O 7 i i F The display screen and storage destination for each type of data are shown below 2 The file name and contents of each data can be displayed with property display of the utility T a a a aT aaa r Storage destination z Item Display screen i E Drive name folder name 2 BootOS A drive B drive C drive G1BOOTV Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management g information file S Standard monitor OS monitor function Si g Standard monitor 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters a E hit oZ OS 24 dot numerical HQ font OS information 32 dot numerical HQ font screen A drive B drive C drive G1SYS TrueType numerical font 12 dot standard font a Fara 16 dot standard font ILON gt F O Extended function OS rE w Option OS 5 D Communication driver Project data User created screen data 6 Project zZ Z zi Comment data i l a Fig information A drive B drive C drive PROJECT1 WE a 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic Screen v Z 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic Sak pat a TrueType Mincho Gothic J ED Advanced alarm
421. locate error positions ma 2 ae a Z lt lt Point gt Notes on narrowing the error part range 1 When disconnecting the extension base units in order use only an END instruction for the sequence program and any error resulting from the sequence 2 program will not occur and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained 3 easily a 2 When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low check the error by taking a S rather long time with the modules disconnected The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis operation is caused by noise ia Q zZ 20 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 15 20 2 2 Further locating error positions 20 2 3 Specific example of troubleshooting Taking the following system as an example troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used PLC main base unit GOT 1 GOT 2 Extension cable Bus connection Bus connection cable cable Start y Check the error code step appearing on the PLC CPU Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs The SP UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU y Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Ad Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further noton PLC CPU Turn of
422. lock data to the clock data of controller 5 on ZQg i Lz Adjust ce Szi Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function Adjust the time of controller clock data to the clock data of GOT fa Zz LOV ae Broadcast g re FE o Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function 1 2 None No adjustment of clock data z gt I Adjust the GOT and controllers to the controller whose clock data is used as a base THe tl O E e og Adjust Broadcast Zh It is same as set in the GOT setup in System Environment of the GT Designer2 GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function 2 lt z D line seti in E display If touch the setup item the setup contents a Clock setting Adjust O is changed TO 07708 2004 15 30 53 a Adjust N GOT internal battery Norma L 7 voltage status xe O Broadcast my S Le a None D l O 0 Adjust Broadcast LY OK If touch button the setup contents as Lu QO is reflected ge Z 5 fi 12 oa z fe wg 20 an ze oO woz Zu z lt x SEG 12 1 Time Setting and Display 1 2 3 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display 12 4 With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed If touch gt lt button without touching button the dialog ment
423. log file CSV file 4 1 3 Advanced alarm log file TXT file 4 Alarm o a information Z Advanced alarm log file binary file screen z Alarm log file CSV file 5 Hard copy file BMP file 4 Hard copy information ee L Hard copy file JPG file ae Adrive B drives l Resource data With GT Designer2 any folder name or file name can Advanced recipe file CSV file Advanced be specified 2 j x Advanced recipe file TXT file 4 S 9 information a Advanced recipe file binary file 4 screen m W Operation log file CSV file 4 Operation log 2 7 O Operation log file TXT file 4 information 6 Operation log file binary file 4 Screen 1 The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data z 2 Each folder is created automatically when a file is installed downloaded or uploaded E Q s O 3 The folder names and file names can be set at System Settings in System Environment of GT Designer2 a Ww Z gt L3 GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 1 GOT Controller Type Setting Z S oa Ww 4 A serial number is automatically added to file names d a Zz O wg BE m ge Ze oO wz Zu z q SEO 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 7 13 1 5 Display file 13 2 OS Information 13 2 1 Function of OS information Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS communication driver and optional function OS by which each drive A Standard CF card B Extended mem
424. logging file names Deleting logging folders creating a new logging folder Converting operation log files in G1O format CSV TXT format Operation log Deleting copying moving operation log files changing operation log file 13 11 information names i Deleting operation log folders creating a new operation log folder Hard co Ae Deleting copying hard copy files changing hard copy file names 13 5 information Memory card Formatting memory cards 13 6 format Memory f Displaying the available memory of the GOT 13 9 Information Deleting or checking special data files Special data Deleting special data folders 13 10 information Downloading special data stored in the A drive Standard CF card or B f drive Extended memory card to the C drive Built in flash memory GOT data package Copying the OS special data and project data to a memory card 13 12 acquisition Continued to next page 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING z O E O Z Ww gt SETTINGS STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Item Functions overview Reference Ladder monitor Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q System monitor A List editor FX list editor Intelligent m
425. m Data Control Operation Information A PROJECT 1 OPELOG indName Size Date Time DIRT G10 GPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 G10 JOPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 V OPELO XK i cao m k z L 15572KB 0KB 4Fil ew csy Copy Nove eae 610 gt TXT Del Rename List Target file OPELOG_200603 10_0002 610 Are you sure do you want to delete Process completed The folder is invalid If touch Del Touch and select the file folder to delete button the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed When it cannot be deleted the dialog showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute 3 13 11 the delete operation again 5 Precautions 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 99 13 11 4 Operation log information operation UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS ae ea Se AND BATTERY fe STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION
426. m the extend interface relay board For GT1550 the extension interface relay board is not needed Remove the connector cover 8 4 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure Install the communication unit in the extension interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit gt O zZ fej T 5 ag LE HO ie to 0 48N m T f L O a wn Q Zz lt W n Ego 22 E cr o O Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 2 places O a W 25 10O 23a wu gt a Zz O e 4 2 Point Removing the GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws CE above O o zZ a Zz O i 8 1 Communication Unit 8 5 8 1 2 Installing procedure amp When installing an extension unit on the outer layer refer to the following gt 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer cover the top of mounting screws 4 places with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the sticker stuck as it is 3 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Power OFF the GOT Remove
427. message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Process completed When it cannot be deleted the dialog showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again L gt 13 8 5 Precautions The folder is invalid 1 3 52 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation If touch Excute button the following dialog shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing Target file ARPO0001 G1P Do you want to copy the file j z Copy operation z Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied S m i Control 2 e pe e Te Touch and select the file to copy o e TEFA gt GIL 1K 06 05 01 15 6 Touch the Copy button zZ O a 30 Piece Soe Ele 82a M iz I6KB 15632KB File piL gt cs Copy Move Create pL TxT Del Rename j Q az 7 AE Eem T APPOCIN Select the target folder Zee ae lame Size Date Time elec e ta ge older se Z ia Ed iL IL co0001 1K 06 05 01 15 25 il Selecting a folder is not needed for oam GIL LOG00002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 g QOJ G
428. mment or Comment Group etc Basic comment u comment group Enables editing the comment group g 7 directly in settings for lamps and touch 2 77F O oO O eae mre switches Sant 304 Improved library structure and added S K 9 z import function i O O O Zao Improved user library structure expanded the user library registration capacity A i hie P 4 2 18U O O O Zz copying the figure data to the user library etc 26 Addition of fixed frame figure 2 18U O O Oo 5 W Zo Library workspace Enables setting the background color of ae f i 2 47Z O O oO Sz the figures in the Library Editor screen Enables sorting the figure data by subject or function and displaying different w 2 58L 5 O O oO 0 shaped figures in the same color in the k image list i es z2 Real type data are added to the subject in 5 n 2 63R z am the library 9 9 g S 3 ucts Project data Matching project data stored in GOT and l i A 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O matching project data opened on GT Designer2 Enables copying of only characters in lamp display touch switch and comment 2 18U Oo O O Copy ON gt OFF display 2 Copy OFF ON Enables copying of only comment No in bit lamp touch switch and comment 2 73B E O O O o display bit Enables editing of the settings for advanced alarm observation advanced user alarm alarm history advanced 2 18U O O O recipe function and recipe function in the I
429. mmunication Standard I F Setting Channe1 Dr iver assign ChNo RS232 5Y supply ChNo USB 9 Host PC 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist GT 15 5QBUSL c W None 0 None ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo A OP None O None S Barcode connection Other connection OK 5617 89 del lt 011121314 Cancel Enter keyboard The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed Input the channel number from the keyboard and touch Enter key and the value is defined Simultaneously the name of the communication driver corresponding to the channel number assigned by GT Designer2 is displayed in the driver display BOX Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channel Dr iver assign ChNo R5232 5V supply fe USB 9 Host PC 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo None ChNo None QO None 1 0 8 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Communication detail settings switching operation Q If you touch the driver display BOX the screen switches to the detailed setting screen of the related controller device L gt 10 2 Communication D
430. mmunication detail settings 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION Zz O SETTINGS GOT SET UP z PA Ww gt E Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from GOT setup In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set a fe Item Description Reference page E O W Opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight language Zg battery alarm display Invert Color human sensor sensor detect level sensor 11 2 Zi Display detect time sensor off delay O20 Brightness 11 12 11 Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume Key sensitivity 41 14 Key reaction speed Touch detection mode 5 fe Operation Security setting 11 18 z g lt 2 Utility call key 11 20 wi E On Touch panel calibration 11 23 Q QnA ladder Data save location 11 26 D monitor 2 s Era Transparent mode Ch No 11 29 uE 2 lt x nace Vid it video display RGB displ 11 31 b z ideo unit video display ispla E lt Setting pay p ay aze Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting Backup 11 40 the maximum number of backup data a restoration setting 9 Setting the trigger backup 11 44 3 5 o O gt wW A O wo x O W a a O i W n O 6 Zz fe 58 On Bho oa Zz O wg 2g E Boe Zw E SEH 11 4 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions Setting re
431. monitor function multi channel function and document display function Option function board with add on memory Option function 48MB GT15 MESB48M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function document display function and MES interface function 2 2 Component List 2 4 2 2 2 Option be OVERVIEW zZ o z gt o We Z 0 0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Multi color display board Sold separately Model name GT15 XHNB Product name Description Multi color display board for XGA For 65536 color display Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display GT15 VHNB Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display 5 To use it for a SVGA or VGA GOT install the following OS to the GOT Multi color display board Cannot be used for a SVGA or VGA GOT without installing the OS Boot OS Ver 02 01 00 E or later Standard monitor OS Ver 02 01 00 or later For how to install the OS refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Option unit Sold separately Product name Model name Description Printer unit GT15 PRN hea Someries USB slave PictBridge 1 channel printer Video input unit GT15V 75V4 For NTSC PAL input 4 channels RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 For analog RGB input 1 channe
432. mpleted 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 1 Operator management Touch the button without touching the button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed Select the operator information to be edited with touching the operator information Touch the Edit button The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a Level b Password c Make a permanent password For how to edit operator information refer to the following lt this section PA 1 Add operation Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is changed If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT add Edit Delete Return Drive in use Import Export Save Target operator OPOOO5 Do you want to delete the operator The operator information deletion process is completed 14 11 Operator Information Management Touch the button without touching the button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information Touch the button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button and then the select
433. mport Export CSV file format and other format x Items that can be imported or exported 2 with the advanced alarm observation and 2 77F O O x alarm history are added Device No comment No detail No and others Print Enables printing of header and footer 2 18U O O O Enables changing of the settings for the Data View j 2 18U O Oo O respective objects in grouped objects Enables global replacement of channel Batch Edit 2 18U O O x No Enables checking for security level Screen Preview switching and language switching in 2 18U O O image after switching Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 31 Item Description Version of GT Designer2 Version of OS GT 15 GT Soft GOT1000 GT 11 Wizard Wizard for setting the GOT type controller type and communication settings when creating a new project 2 18U O Screen script project script Settings on the Script Edit dialog are available for screen script and project script 2 27D Auxiliary setting Setting of maintaining screen numbers of the screens being displayed System Information during screen switching is added 2 27D Expansion Reduction Supports expansion reduction when multiple objects and shapes are selected 2 32J Supports automatically zooming in and out objects and figures suitable for the screen size
434. n ae Su If the copy destination folder is touched z lt g the screen display is changed to the folder 5 E W of copy destination O20 At this time it cannot be copied into the 7 same folder where the file exists 4 Select other folders g Please select Zz a destination LOn gt Saez Of No W Copy file name 4 If touch Next button the following dialog AAMOO000 G1A is di Seay Gest ication shown left is displayed a 2 6 gt Copy now g amp Fi 7 Q x N 808 ora Ea z File is already exist Q Touch OK button Overwrite now If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy eee ea ee AND BATTERY If touch the OK button overwrites the z O i file u _ok Cance If touch Cancel button cancels to copy co z O oO Copy is completed O When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog 58 Ze z3 Bio oa Zz O wg 2g Zu zZ SEY 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 33 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Graph operation Displays the selected extended alarm log file in a graph When the extended alarm watch advanced user alarm advanced system alarm is set in history mode the selected extended alarm log file is displayed in historical graph gt gt 1 Histor
435. n The password change is completed O When the new password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the password is changed UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY a Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 50 14 11 2 Password change 14 11 3 Function setting Function setting function The functions for the operator information can be set The following items can be set Items Description The time from when the last time the GOT is operated until when you Reference page Automatic logout time automatically log out of the GOT can be set 14 52 1 to 60 minutes 0 is invalid Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for the EER operator authentication Password expiration ra 1 to 1000 days 0 is invalid 14 53 date requests the password change Display operation of function setting Main menu Debug amp self check L377 9 3 Utility Display Touch Debug amp self Touch Operator info check Management Function setting unction setting Automatic logout time min 1 60 0 invalid Password expiration date 3 day 1 1000 0 always When the password is out of date after set
436. n h ud If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal EEEE Oe eam To Display check The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 14 5 Font Check Zz fe o 14 5 1 Font check function 2 E The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed 5 on the upper left part of the screen one by one 14 5 2 Display operation of Font check 5 i Su Zg Main menu Debug amp self check Self check z fee lt gt 9 3 Utility Display aur Ozo A Touch If check Displ heck Q ae Self check Display check ee Debug amp self check E ae a0n ep 2 3 FEA Display check GES EE a5 Starts font check Sok 32e O lt S Touch When touch F ont check of the Display check Font check Font check starts Ae FILE DISPLAY AND DA COPY Point f Notes on Font Check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic characters etc 0O x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill x Oo Ww S LL w Ww O 0 Hangul characters 0 x ACOO to 0 x D7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Kanji 0 x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed 59 Install the standard monitor OS again ZS 25 Bio oa Zz O
437. n Process completed Move operation 13 76 elect Drive An operation log file is moved 0001 x PROJECT1 LOG00001 indName Size Date Time DIR al 1K 01 04 01 1K 01 04 01 1K 01 04 01 1K 01 03 01 1K 01 03 01 00 10 1K 01 03 01 00 11 Eas H 104KB 499672KB BIL csy Copy Nove Jde BIL gt TXT Del Renane rmation 1 L0600001 Name Size Date Time EY 600001 1K 01 04 01 08 57 lA L0G00001_0000 1K 01 04 01 08 57 a LOGOO001_0001 1K 01 04 01 08 57 LOGOO001_0001 1K 01 03 01 00 10 LOGOO001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 10 LOGOO001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 M KA 104KB 4996 72KB OF ile Please select destination Execute Cancel Continued to next page 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation O When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog Select the file to be moved by touching it Touch the Move button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive If touch the Execute button the dialo Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L execute a Do you want to move the fi le shown left is displayed z Touch the OK button g While executing Processing message appears on the scree
438. n 5 Zz O au 226 rer guZ 5 When only file with the same name SHE Target file LOG00001_0001 G1L PERS ae Ob w Do you want to Overwrite the file exists in the destination folder the dialog 92 shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the button overwrites p the file n If touch the Cancel button cancels FE moving am Process conpleted O When moving is completed completion is dialog is displayed oe oo If touch the OK button closes the PES dialog x 2 a O lt m zZ lt z a 5 m Ww WL x O W ani O S W ep O 0 Zz O 5G ZS z3 it oa Zz fe wg 2e E E zZ SEY 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 77 13 8 4 Logging information operation g Rename operation An operation log file is changed Ix e aia _ APROECTIN 0600001 e D Select the file to be renamed by DIR GIL LOGO0001 1K 01 04 01 09 36 touching 04 01 0 36 GIL LOG0000 10000 GIL MEE 001 CSV LOG00001_0001 GIL LOGO0001_0002 CSV LOGO0001_0002 fea CEI H112KB 4 Fil SIL gt CSV Copy tove greate GIL gt TXT Del Renane A x If touch the Rename button displays the Path Name j j AA PRO JECT 1 L0G00001 screen shown left then input the file File Name name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed TETT a z English capital AISIDIFIGIHIJIKIL 0 9 Numeric Symbol L XICIVIBINIM Enter
439. n Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 25 ADDITION TIMES INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM RESET FOR MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Version of ct GT Soft GT11 0 Item Description GT Version of OS 15 GoTioco Designer2 Bus Serial Supporting connection to CC Link Via G4 Communication driver 2 09K a O x x O Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK G4 01 02 Q173HCPU Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU CC Link Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver connection Via 2 63R i i x x Ga Supporting connection to CNC C70 CC Link G4 03 07 2 Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit Supporting connection to AJ65BT R2N Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 Communication driver 2 73B 7 O x x O Supporting settings for the number of CC Link G4 03 09 retries the timeout time and delay time Supporting connection to the Ethernet Communication driver O Supporting connection to Q172HCPU 2 09K QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 O x x Q173HCPU 01 02 Supporting automatic system switching Communication driver 2 32J O O x x for QOPU redundant system QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 00 Supporting routing parameter setting with Communication driver j 2 43V O O x x GT Designer2 QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E
440. n base unit Communication driver Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 A QnA QCPU QJ71024 O O x O 03 09 Communication driver 2 73B A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 Supporting settings for the number of 03 09 retries the timeout time and delay time AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 O x a O 03 09 AJ71C24 UC24 03 09 App 24 For GOT1000 Series Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade Continued to next page Version of ct GT Soft GT11 o Item Description GT Version of OS 15 GoTtoo Designer2 Bus Serial 2 25B x x x Supporting connection to MELSECNET H O PLC to PLC network 555 Communication driver R 6 z z MELSECNET H 03 00 Supporting routing parameter setting with Communication driver i 2 43V O x x x MELSECNET H GT Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01 connection PLC Supporting connection to Universal model to PLC network QCPU Communication driver 2 63R O O x x Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELSECNET H 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B Communication driver u l 7 einer MELSECNET H 03 09 O O x x Supporting connection to MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC connection Communication driver O 2 09K Pa O x x Supporting connection to Q172HCPU MELSECNET 10 01 02 Q173HCPU 2 Supporting automatic system switching Communication driver 2 32J O O x x for QCPU redundant system MELSECNET 10
441. n cancels installation After executing or canceling installation restart the GOT 1 8 8 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS c When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the CF card conditions a and b above a The version information and a dialog for selecting whether or not to continue installation are 28 displayed Z22 eme QaAn 7 i awg Boot 0 has been already installed 1r Exsisting 0S Ver 01 01 B 1 8 Expected OS Ver 01 01 B Exsisting basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install as Zz ta oe lt x Og 52 of an OK ae Q lt GOT screen when BootOS is installed from memory card gt A W O 26 If touch OK button installation is executed o Lu Z If touch Cancel button installation is canceled lt 9 Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing standard monitor OS ie Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match z gE ae When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed a R Standard monitor OS 1 O Standard monitorOS 2 o o HEE Communication driver 2 O O Communication driver 2 O O Optional function OS tal O O Optional function OS o 2 O O EES Please match the number 8 o a lt x x lt W
442. n due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to GOT do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connec tion fault Before insert remove the connection cable power off the GOT Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction When replacing the backlight use the gloves Otherwise it may cause you to be injured Start changing the backlight more than 5 minutes after switching the GOT power off Not doing so can cause a burn due to the heat of the backlight Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted on the unit Doing so can cause the battery to be damaged due to the drop or the impact making the battery liquid to leak in the battery Do not use but dispose the battery that is dropped or given an impact Before touching the unit be sure to touch grounded metal or similar objects to discharge the static elec tricity from human body Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction of the unit When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES INDEX The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery backlight periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen please consult M
443. n f L Rename lt gt this section Create Folder gt this section x O If touch x button the screen is closed z S D 0 Zz O 5G ZS Za Ho oa Zz fe wg 2e E Bo zZ EB le SEY 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 71 13 8 4 Logging information operation Operation of G1L gt CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Logging file G1L file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on personal computer X elect Drive PROJECT 1 L0G00001 indName Size Date Time Built in CF card ii Bi GIL L0G00001 1K 01 04 01 08 31 i GIL LOG00001_0000 1K 01 04 01 08 31 a GIL L0G00001_0001 1K 01 04 01 08 31 1K_01 03 01 00 10 7 1K 0 210 1K 01 03 01 00 11 m Ba 104KB 499672KB GFilg GIL CV Copy Move greate GILSTXT Del Rename x elect Drive PROJECT 1 L0G00001 indName Size Date Time DIR ES GIL LOGO0001 1K 01 04 01 08 40 i GIL LOG00001_0001 1K 01 04 01 08 40 CSV LOG00001_0001 1K 01 03 01 00 10 GIL LOG00001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 10 CSV LOG00001_0002 1K 01 08 01 00 11 ij ha O96KB 4996 72KB File Please select destination ERE focal File conversion from GIL to CSV Source fi le Change to Change file format Example Dialog if the G1L gt CSV Vv LOGOO0001_0002 G1L LOGO00001_0002 CSV button is touched Continued to next page 13 72 13
444. nary format file output can be Operation log converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x external control Standard monitor OS 03 03 Option OS Enables saving the operation log for the me ae 2 58L Operation Log 03 03 O O x operator authentication i Extended function OS Operator authentication 03 03 2 00A Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x Comment Comment group can be used 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O Enables setting the background color of Part 2 47Z O O Oo the figures in the Parts Editor screen User defined key window display can be switched in synchronization with the 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo O Oo language switching device Key Window In the user defined key window input range maximum value and input range 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O Oo O minimum value are displayed 65 or later station numbers in the Devi iti MELSECNET G network system can be 263R Standard monitor OS 03 07 evice settin i 07 a set with using Universal model QCPU as O O x a relay station Object rename Function to allow setting of object name 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O x Figure created as a part can be used to a 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O L lamp amp Comment Group can be used 2 43V Standa
445. nces between the GOT1000 series and GOT 900 series functions For using the following functions use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later Applicable OS versions and communication drivers for GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 are different from those for GT10 The added functions for GT10 are listed separately from those for GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 Point gt How to use this table provides the versions of GT Designer2 and OS required for each GOT or communication unit PJ and the following provides description for the functions added with the version upgrade and the versions of GT Designer2 and OS with which the function is compatible Regarding and the following there may be a case where the function is not supported by a particular type of GOT even when the function is compatible with the version In such a case check the version for the function and the version of the GOT and use GT Designer2 or OS of the later version Appendix 6 1 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 Added GOT main unit Communication unit Target Models Version orat Version of OS Designer2 GT1595 XTBA 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1595 XTBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1585 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD 2 32J S
446. nctions Manual 14 1 1 The Debug function The Debug function is designed to confirm the device status of PLC CPU and to make the response for PLC system trouble more efficient The following shows the functions that can be performed with the Debug function Item Description The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be monitored or System monitor tested Ladder monitor The program of PLC CPU can be monitored in ladder format A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited FX list editor The sequence program of FXCPU can be list edited Buffer memory in the intelligent function module can be monitored or the data can be changed Intelligent unit monitor on the dedicated screen And the signal status of I O modules can be monitored The network status of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNETI II and CC Link IE controller network can be monitored Network monitor The servo monitoring and parameter settings of the motion controller CPU Q series are available Motion monitor Various monitor functions parameter change test operation etc of the servo amplifier are Servo amplifier monitor available Functions equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display such as Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor Tool Offset Param and Program Monitor are available CNC monitor 1 4 1 14 1 Debug 14 1 1 The Debug function
447. ncy exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory and Accumulate Average were set in the No of sampling has coe scatter graph 312 exceeded upper limit x 1 Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph Delete collected data EA 2 Set the Operation at frequency over time to Initialize and Continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device Correct device Correct the device In indirect specification of comment parts number the data f operation result exceeded the range in which device type can Cannot display or input f be expressed 316 operation value Review x expression Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range in which the device type can be expressed 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 19 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION i pa 2 ae a Z lt lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 20 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Data of an object to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set are collected too frequently or the number of objects has exceeded the number of objects Too high frequency of collectable simultaneously 317 data collection 1 Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to
448. ne Displays the cause of the interrupted communication transient transmission of the host station Normal Comm Cable disconnection Wrong cable connection Checking cable IN OUT Disconnecting returning to system Offline Offline test Self check mode 14 27 Cause of Stop Displays the cause of the interrupted data link cyclic transmission of the host station Normal Comm StopOrder D Link observation timer time up Testing Line Param not rcvd Host out of range Host reservation Dup Host No Dup CtrlSta Sta No not set Invalid NETWK No Param Err Params in comm CPU stop error CPU pwr stp err 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 4 Transient status 5 Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes 5 Zz No Item Description T 7 Transmission Err Displays the number of transient transmission errors Z The histories of 16 latest errors 5 Other than GT155 0 are displayed in 16 rows in 8 ErrCode reverse chronological order Only the latest error is displayed GT1550 z in one row Su Zg Bmg or 95u 5 Link scan time information 2E Displays the link scan time No Item Description Current LS time Displays the current link scan time 2 9 Max LS time Displays the maximum link scan time Seg Min LS time Displays the minimum link scan time aT icp Constant LS time Displays the link
449. ng cable connction OUT wrong cable connction Normal OUT cable disconnection OUT connecting a line OUT wrong cable connection T1 eT155 CI IN cable disconnection IN connecting a line IN wrong cable connection Disconnect IN cable disconnct count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors IN line err count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors OUT cable disconnct count OUT line err count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display CC Link communication unit z o Z Debug self check Self check NETWK unit T GT 15 J61BT 13 ST 1 E lt LED m lt D Link_Info gt D Link Boot Status an o STC Error Status a LB Normal c swi z st O g S St Z26 MPT 5 SmE ue 824 Q Pe Seg e lt lt Z aoa a uE oO OOo 7p gt o gt 5 FEA Hug aoe lt a ome 1 LED status Oo Displays the CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 operation status BaS LED k No Item Lit Not lit Blink color 9 WDT error occurred or unit RUN Green Running normally x being reset a aoe os There is a communication 2 All station communication No communication error i A ERR Red eek error station or duplicated E O error occurred or uni
450. ng its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48N m Z o zZ a 8 OPTION 8 7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8 31 8 7 1 Applicable CF card unit and CF card extension unit 8 32 Point P Installation and removal precautions e Extension units cannot be installed on the CF card unit and the CF card extension unit For installing extension units install the CF card unit or the CF card extension unit at the last e When installing the CF card unit on extension interface 1 left side do not install more units on extension interface 2 right side than on extension interface 1 left side If doing so the CF card cannot be installed or removed e For removing the CF card unit or the CF card extension unit tilt PULL A of the unit and remove the unit so as not to break the connector e The CF card unit cannot be used with the CF card extension unit For details refer to the following Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive 8 7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8 7 2 Installing on GOT 8 7 3 Installing on control panel The following shows how to install the CF card extension unit on the control panel Insert the control panel side installation unit into the installation hole of the control panel For the installation hole refer to the following 5 376 INSTALLATION Zz O 5 a LE HO ie Fix the GOT side installation u
451. nication or more or more or more 50 1 97 72 2 84 unit coaxial fitted 20 0 79 24 0 95 38 1 5 or more or more or more or more or more MELSECNET H communication 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more unit optical fitted CC Link IE controller network ae soe 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more communication unit fitted 50 1 97 50 1 97 o 50 1 97 or more or more or more 50 1 97 Printer unit fitted 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more or more or more Video input unit fitted 6 3 Mounting Position 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more Continued to next page Type GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 RGB input unit fitted A P 0 79 or more 0 1 97 or more rs Video RGB input unit fitted E gt 2 0 79 or more RGB output unit fitted O 1197 Or miorre output unit fitte p 0 79 or more 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 5 CF card unit 26 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more po 26 or more or more HO 50 1 97 50 1 97 f 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 P AINERE I 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more 4 or more or more lt iL External I O unit a Satay g 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 or O 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 more Sound output unit or more or more 80 3 15 or more z 20 0 79
452. nit by tightening its fixing screws 2 places with a tightening torque 6 of 0 36 to 0 48N m S 5 o wn Zz Z W n Ego zz Insert the connector with the ground cable into the GOT side installation unit and insert the connector without the ground cable into the control panel side installation unit For GT1550 before connecting the connection cable to the GOT side installation unit connect 2 the ground cable of the connection cable to the GOT s terminal block Because the GOT s 2 w terminal block overlaps with the connection cable the ground cable cannot be connected to the 2 z F GOT s terminal block So After inserting the connectors tighten the connection cable fixing screws GOT side installation unit Control panel side Z installation unit Aside a D z MX pund B side Connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the FG terminal of the GOT s power For connecting the ground cables refer to the following g L3 7 6 Grounding Extension Units OPTION 8 7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8 33 8 7 3 Installing on control panel 8 7 4 Protective structure for CF card extension unit The protective structure of the outside the enclosure for the control panel side installation unit is IP65 in shipping When the dustproof rubber for the CF card cover is changed with the CF card cover fixing screw the protective structure is IP67 Part Protective structure Dustproof rubber IP65 CF card cover
453. nit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 16 Battery holder Houses the battery 17 Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement 1 It is provided for the GT1585V S only 2 For the multi color display board refer to the following 3 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 Point gt Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1585 is as z W follows S m GOT model name Hardware version Connector 3 GT1585V STBA A March 2006 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent GT1585V STBD A May 2006 or later product Z Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd z B April 2005 or before oc GT1585 STBA Model name GM C9RMDU11 or equivalent product z m e C April 2005 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd z Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent NO GT1585 STBD A July 2005 or later product oO Z O lt 9 u O W E oO Q Z lt x lw n Fao zz HE Pam Zo EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 4 5 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1570 2 3 oe 1 r 5
454. now 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 4 Special data information operation It touch the Download button the screen mentioned left is displayed Downloading is executed when the OK button is touched If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed If touch the OK button the project data is downloaded and the project data in the C drive is overwritten Downloading is canceled when the button is touched When the downloading is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT 13 11 Operation Log Information O o ZZ u 13 11 1 Functi f tion log inf ti n unction Ot Operation iog iInrormation Operation log files created with the operation log function can be copied deleted or renamed etc Without using a personal computer you can manage operation log files on the GOT For details of the operation log function refer to the following manual 5 lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 15 2 Operation Log Function S m Zxg 5 u aa SEn Function Description Refer to Displaying file 3 The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 95 13 96 folder data G10 CSV gt G10 file of operation log file is converted to CSV file 13 97 S gt convers
455. nput 1 channel Only for video RGB 3g GT15V 75V4R1 For NTSC PAL 4ch analog RGB 1ch mixed input compliant models GT15V 75ROUT For analog RGB output fa 8 4 2 Installing procedure Sow This section explains how to install a video RGB unit on a GOT 205 A video RGB unit can also be installed together with another extension unit SRD When installing a video RGB unit together with some other extension unit after executing the procedure in ala this section refer to the following One video RGB unit can be installed only in the first stage of the extension interface 38 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers O Power OFF the GOT Z Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face o Z a OPTION 8 4 Video RGB Unit 8 23 8 4 1 Video RGB unit types Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I F 2 side of the GOT After the installation detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board Install the video RGB unit on the extension interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the video RGB unit After the installation tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 8 24 8 4 Video RGB Unit 8 4 2 Installing procedure Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step
456. nterface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 5 RS 232 interface Connector type D sub 9 pin 6 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 7 Extension interface For installing an extension unit 8 CF card interface For installing a CF card 9 CF card ess LED Lit CF card accessed card acc Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 10 CF card access switch 7 ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board 11 P For installing the optional function board interface Multi color display board f 12 For installing the multi color display board interface Hardware reset switch 13 Reset switch er A Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 14 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 15 Battery holder Houses the battery 16 Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement 17 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup i i 1 For the multi color display board refer to the following 3 3 2 1 GT1595 X Remark Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the cconnector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1595 is as follows Manufacture
457. o minimize the voltage drop Use M3 solderless terminals and securely tighten them with a tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 8Nem so that no problem will result a e Separate the 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable from the main circuit lines high voltage large current Z and or I O signal lines So Keep a distance of 100mm or more So As measures against surge due to lightning connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below ran awn Lightning surge absorber connection 3 AC GOT Ow 5 1 O equi t b 4 equipmen lt z g a aoa j j Lightni ghtning surge absorber Zz p 5 Point b A ie 1 Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber E1 from the grounding Z of the GOT E2 7 2 Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber so that the supply voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage of the surge absorber even when it rises to the maximum OPTION 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 3 7 2 Wiring to GOT Power Section This section provides an example for connecting power cables and ground cables to the power terminals situated on the back of the GOT 100 110V AC In the case of 100V AC GOT INPUT 100 240VAC In the case of 24V DC GT1595 GT1585 GT157L and GT156 0 In the case of 24V DC GT1550 GOT INPUT 24VDC D Fe al Ground cables 1 Grounding
458. oS The conformed standards such as CE are described Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards App 15 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type Moreover there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Refe Item Functions overview GT15 SoftGOT GT11 A 1000 rence f Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to Communication setting T O x O O communication interfaces Setting communication parameters O x O O Detail Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words settings canceling sequence program protection status When O x O x connecting to FX series CPU Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time O o O Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving O O Switching message languages O O o Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF O O O sa Setting the black and white inversion display to ON or OFF For GT15 applicable to only GT1550 Q ns Sa Setting the human sensor Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S and GT1585 S x x x Adjusting
459. odule monitor Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q Network monitor Debug Motion monitor for Q series motion controller CPU 141 Servo amplifier monitor CNC monitor Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S and GT1575 S Backup restoration Debug amp CNC data I O Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S self GT1575V S and GT1575 S check SFC monitor Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q Memory check 14 3 Drawing check 14 4 PEANN Font check 14 5 Touch panel check 14 6 I O check 14 7 Network unit status display 14 8 System alarm Displaying or resetting GOT errors 149 display Displaying CPU errors and network errors GOT start time Pepeng the GOT start date and time current time and accumulated 14 10 operating hours Operator info Adding editing deleting operator information changing passwords 44 11 management Setting the automatic logout time and password expiration date Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display 15 Setting the maintenance notification times for the backlight and display Maintenance timing setting Setting the number of maintenance notifications for touch keys and the 16 built in flash memory denise est reset Resetting accumulated hours and counts for maintenance time 17 notifications 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens fot each utility the main menu has to be displayed first 1 Main menu The menu items that can be set
460. of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Displays details in OS information project information alarm information hard co Utility i py 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo x O information and advance recipe information properties Function to display the status of Network unit ANE MELSECNET H communication unit and 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O x status display a CC Link communication unit Function for copying the installed OS or GOT data package dai i th iaaa 2 toth 243V Standard monitor OS 03 01 ata in the main unit to the memor i acquisition BootOS 03 01 M O x O car Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 40 n Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 a 7 Extended function OS and option OS can z o z be installed unlimitedly 5 2 z Extended function OS and option OS can m 5 be operated up to 21 Q T Conventionally both of above OSs can 2 18U BootOS 02 02 E oO x x ini be installed and operated up to 9 The i its extended function OS data size is twice as 5 instalation large as other OS data The logging OS Zn 8 extended function ooi OZ data size is three times as large as other E lt F OSs and option Jag OS data 306 OSs pa me Extended function OS and option OS can a Q be
461. of Versions and Conformed Standards App 15 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 16 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions App 20 Appendix 4 1 Relevant models 0 00 e eee eae App 20 Appendix 4 2 Transportation guidelineS 0 0 0 ete eae App 20 Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive App 21 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 22 Appendix 6 1 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 2 kee App 22 Appendix 6 2 For GTt0 sra dvaasise ais Seed a eae oe fay Soe ve A tee ok App 44 INDEX Index 1 to Index 3 A 20 ABOUT MANUALS The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below Related Manuals Manual Number M IN anual Name Model Code GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual SH 080602ENG Describes the screen configuration functions and using method of GT SoftGOT1000 1D7M48 Sold separately GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Describes methods of the GT Designer2 installation operation basic operation for drawing and transmitting data to SH 080529ENG GOT1000 series 1D7M24 Sold separately GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 2 3 SH 080530ENG GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 3 3
462. of the GOT is on If the switch is off switch it on 2 The writing from the GT Designer2 to the memory card may not have been completed normally Execute the writing from the GT Designer2 to the memory card again The message is displayed on the GOT 18 14 GOT error Contact your local sales office The GOT main unit is broken Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative CF card error Installation will be cancelled Check whether the CF card can be used The CF card is defective 1 Format the CF card and re execute 2 Replace the CF card Optional unit has been connected to extension I F slot The optional unit should be removed before starting installation Installation will be canceled Remove the extension unit installed on the GOT GOT type and OS version do not match Installation will be canceled The GOT type selected at Core OS write of the GT Designer2 is not correct Confirm the GOT type and perform Core OS write again The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT Installation will be canceled Confirm the version of OS Install CoreOS from the latest GT Designer2 Memory card access switch is off Turn on the switch and restart the GOT Installation will be canceled 18 5 CoreOS The CF card access switch is off Turn the switch on and restart the GOT 18 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 19
463. of the GOT when processing screw os holes or wiring as Failure to do so can cause a fire failure or malfunction Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range A Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction 5 Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or 3 the unit 5 Make sure to install the connection cable to the connector specified during the power OFF Z Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to the poor contact Q a a W 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting z8 EE GOT lt i Install the GOT and the CF card extension unit on the control panel out of the way for the equipment inside the control panel Do not install the GOT and the unit in prohibited areas for the installation z Point P Applicable cable Seu Soe Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting 7 ez to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation z O z l z A 2 WIRING OPTION 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 1 Panel cutting dimensions when installing GOT Make a installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below Make space of 10mm above and below the hole respectively for the installation fittings A Panel thickn
464. oint 7 About the displayed file mi The files other than that for operation log are not displayed on the operation log G information screen Remark Folders and files displayed we a _ gt n A n O O Refer to the following for the details of folders and files displayed g a Z gt z3 i i Ed 13 1 5 Display file in 55 oa z 0 wg 2 iS m an Ze oO woz Zu z lt x SEO 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 95 13 11 3 Example of operation log information display 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Display operation of operation log information eration Los nfornat ion x It touch a drive of select drive the indN i Dat Ti RI me me e information of the touched drive is OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 G ELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 01 j displayed 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed 15560KB 0KB z Folder Be 4 If touch A Y button of the scrollbar the j M J screen scrolls up down by one line If touch A X button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 6 If touch a file name the file is selected O For operation of operating switches refer to the following G10 gt CSV G10 TXT gt this section Delete i
465. oject files F F f O x O x Information displaying project file property checking project file data Deleting or copying alarm log files O O Alarm f Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV TXT format O x information Displaying graphs of alarm log files O x Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving advanced recipe files creating a new Advanced advanced recipe file Recipe Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders changing O x x x information advanced recipe folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading matching record data and deleting device Program values with the advanced recipe record list data control Converting logging files in G1L format CSV TXT format O x x oO Logging Deleting copying moving logging files changing logging file information names O x x x Deleting logging folders creating a new logging folder Converting operation log files in G10 format CSV TXT O O x O format Operation log Deleting copying moving operation log files changing operation information log file names f O O x x Deleting operation log folders creating a new operation log folder Hard copy Deleting copying hard copy files changing hard copy file O x x x information names Memory card Formatting memory cards O x x format Memory Displaying the available memory of the GOT O x oO x Information Continued to nex
466. olor RUN Green Data link normal Data link error Operating other than as control MNG Green Operating as control station station Operating other than as sub S MNG Green Operating as sub control station P f control station a D LINK Green Data link being executed Data link stopped a T PASS Green Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed SW E Green Switch setting error Normal Duplicate station number and M S E Green Normal control station error PRM E Green Parameter error Normal GOT R W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT CRC Red Code check error Normal OVER Red Data entry delay error Normal AB IF Red All reception data 1 Normal TIME Red Time limit exceeded Normal b DATA Red Reception data error Normal UNDER Red Send data error Normal Forward reverse loop reception LOOP Red Normal error SD Green Sending data RD Green Receiving data For monochrome display it is displayed as W lit or O not lit 2 Loop information Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit loop status No Item Description F loop Displays the status Normal NG of the F loop R loop Displays the status Normal NG of the R loop 14 23 FLoopBK Sta i station at which loopback is executed Displays the F loopback station execution status No per Number of the Displays the R loopback station execution status No per Number of the data link not possible Perf During loopback For the GT15 J71BR13
467. ommunication driver Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 47Z O O x x YASKAWA PLC Ethernet YASKAWA 03 02 connection f Communication driver Supporting settings for the number of i 2 73B YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H O x x O retries and the timeout time CP9300MS 03 09 s i tion to CP 312 o77F Communication driver upporting connection to CP ene Ethernet YASKAWA 03 12 O x E Communication driver Supporting connection to STARDOM 2 32J YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 O x x O STARDOM 03 00 YOKOGAWA E f i Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 47Z Communication driver O O x x PLC connection i Ethernet YOKOGAWA 03 02 Supporting connection to the Communication driver 2 73B O x x xX MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP 03 09 Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000 Communication driver 2 18U i O x x O 1200 1500 series AB MicroLogix 02 02 ALLEN Communication driver Supporting connection to Control BRADLEY PLC f 2 58L AB Control CompactLogix O x x O CompactLogix connection 03 03 s fing the Eth t ti 263R Communication driver upporting the Ethernet connection i Peg EtherNet IP AB 03 07 O of SCHNEIDER Supporting connection to the Communication driver 2 73B O x x x PLC connection MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP 03 09 SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 Communication driver 2 18U O x x O connection 200 series SIEMENS 7 200 02 02 Microcomputer Supporting XON XOFF control Communication driver l 2 3
468. on GT15 J71E71 100 Mar 2005 Microcomputer connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 Third party PLC connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration Version D or later Jan 2006 Continued to next page 5 14 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol wi O W is ia VOLTAGE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection method Temperature controller Communication unit used GOT RS 232 interface Hardware version of the communication unit Production year and month GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE Version D or later Jan 2006 Inverter connection GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 Servo amplifier connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 CNC connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 GT15 J61BT13 GT15 J71E71 100 Version C
469. on describes setting items and display contents for Communication Setting lt lt F 2 None None None None None None Definition of ChNo ON 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK A device connection 9 PC connection Channel Driver assign Channel No can be assigned to the communication driver installed in the GOT a Communicating without setting Communication Setting of GT Designer2 Even without setting Communication Setting on GT Designer2 communication with controller is available by assigning channel No with this function lt lt gt gt 10 1 4 E Channel Driver assign operation b Changing the assignment of communication drivers to channels in the utility Without using GT Designer2 the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed When change a communication driver the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT1500 There are the following 2 types RS232 ees For communicating with PC GT Designer2 controller USB eeeeee For communicating with PC GT Designer2 Extend interface display BOX The name of the unit installed in the extend interface is displayed Displays None when any unit is not mounted For details of each uint refer to the following L gt 8 1 Communicat
470. on displays a mE i the list aon crew Np Ooeration aheatar epi a E In the list the following contents can be amarico Inst 4 checked i Display items Date eS i Foo OX Time Eug en toe DEA cz Screen No TE Sereen wai trhine Base E E ee Operation type pE z Seltch languages Maria es T Value after change Switch aoli E 1 3 Search Z z PRGA SNE DEN EEE D To display the details of an operation a a 206 log touch the row for that operation log A Tm rat Dage To ianitor r to select it The color of the row is T 3 1 inverted white black eee RSE WwW lt E10 oO utility W Moni tor an RE 10 oO PEI Ww mE T 067 Ko mitra 7 O utitity E 0 Search i l Z Function TSH SORN a F Touching the selected row again Me ouch switch reen switching a O Screen No BASE_2 displays the detailed information for the On perat ion i Z gt Setting screen operation log Za Operator Level0 ID 0 wo aires gt lt Touch the xxxx button to close the ag Date Ree dialog Device Change To BASE_10 zZ Chng From wk BE m ee Ze oO woz ou Ed SEO 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 105 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 13 106 File Mame A PROJECTTVOPELOGVOPELOS 200603 100002 610 Sei teh aol ications ha 10 12206349 Seron wai tching Base 1 Marica Inout 1 Marico Ineut 1 Numerical Input 1 Touch itch Sereen switching Seron switching Base 2 Touch welch
471. on driver 2 32J O x x O FUJI SYS temperature controller FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 00 temperature The functions to automatically stop controller monitoring faulty stations and to Communication driver A i ae 2 58L O x x O connection disconnect communications with FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 03 controllers are added Supporting connection to YAMATAKE Communication driver 2 18U O x x O YAMATAKE temperature controller YAMATAKE SDC DMC 02 02 temperature The functions to automatically stop controller monitoring faulty stations and to Communication driver a i 2 58L O x x O connection disconnect communications with YAMATAKE SDC DMC 03 03 controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA aure conire 2 43V YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 O x x O u YOKOGAWA UT2000 03 01 temperature The functions to automatically sto controller saatioanareuleraci A 4 Communication driver itori u ions and to connection y D 2 58L YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 x x O disconnect communications with UT2000 03 03 controllers are added Communication driver Supporting connection to RKC i 2 18U RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O x x oO temperature controller 02 02 RKC temperature 7 Supporting connection to SRZ controller a connection The functions to automatically stop Communication driver monitoring faulty stations and to 2 58L RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O x x O disconnect communications with 03 03 controllers are added
472. on sheets for protecting cables When connecting the cable connectors of the backlight and the GOT unit connect by crossing the cable connectors each other as the below The following figure shows an example with the insulation sheets for protecting cables Insulation sheets SN for protecting cables Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 1 9 14 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 2 Replacement 2 icp Q Power off the GOT 6 Fa Z PON Z22 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable z BE Remove the GOT from the control panel aus Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the extension unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted m 526 oa EPE AE Gere Zan 4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws 8 pcs with a screwdriver and remove the case Screw A must be tighten in the torque range of 0 186 to 0 245 N m as it is made of plastic VANSANT E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION W 0 Bs uF S z 6 Disconnect the cable connector of the upper H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 O lt backlight from the GOT side connectors ais io o Q zZ o z O Press t
473. onnection type 1 Station numbers other than master local station are Specified station access is 406 j f Conf specified at the CC Link connection via G4 s out of range Confirm g 2 APLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed station no i Confirm the station number of the project data e When monitoring the same network as the GOT The GOT accesses the other networks with the MELSEC NET H MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC network or CC Link IE controller network connection Confirm the network INDEX number of the project data so as not to access to other networks Accessed other network a 407 f When monitoring other networks O Change network setting i f F Reconfigure the Routing Information Setting of GT Designer2 or the Routing parameters of GX Developer e When the GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z is used These models cannot monitor other networks Confirm Network No of the project data in order for not accessing other networks 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 23 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 24 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Cannot perform operation The operation which could not be performed during RUN of 410 because of PLC run PLC CPU was performed O mode stop the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is write The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or 411 protected Check the E PRO
474. operated up to 32 The extended function OS data size is i 2 73B BootOS 03 09 S O x x twice as large as other OS data The o logging OS data size is three times as ai S large as other OS data Z Built in option l BootOS 03 03 P ab GT15 FNB built in the GOT is enabled 2 58L f O x x E m function board Standard monitor OS 03 03 A D Function for monitoring testing device of za unction for monitoring testing device o a Extended function OS PLC CPU or buffer memory of intelligent 2 09K x Oo System monitor 01 02 function module i o Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 57D Extended function OS z a monitoring Traditional German Korean System monitor 02 04 O x O da unction Supporting connection to Universal model Extended function OS oc S 2 63R i O x Oo QPF QCPU System monitor 03 07 cas ucts Supporting connection to CC Link IE Extended function OS 2 77F O x x controller network System monitor 03 12 Function to monitor the network status of Option OS 2 18U Oo x x MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 etc Network monitor 02 02 s uw Network monitor Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Option OS S Me 2 27D i O x x Q function Traditional German Korean Network monitor 02 04 A a Enables monitoring the status of the CC Option OS Q 2 77F O x x Link IE controller network Network monitor 03 12 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC A Function for displayi D
475. or Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU c Objects not displayed on the monitor screen Details O Found a Example The numerical display object is O Not found not displayed 3 Status of the PLC CPU Phenomenon Cause status Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU Action a PLC failure An error such as CONTROL BUS ERROR or SP UNIT LAY ERROR may have occurred Aasers always Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault The PLC CPU may be influenced by noise or the hardware may be faulty Occurrence frequency O Occurs sometimes Example Once a month Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault 20 4 O Operates normally Proceed to the following 20 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection Proceed to 4 GOT restoration procedure 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet GOT restoration procedure 4 Follow the procedures below starting from a and in order to check if the GOT is restored If the GOT is not restored proceed to the next item Check item Cause Action a Press the GOT reset switch 1 3 O Restored O Not restored Proceed to b b Power the GOT ON OFF 2 3 O Restored O Not restored Proceed to c c Reset or power ON OFF the PLC The GOT may have malfunctioned CPU temporarily due to noise O Restored O Not restored Proceed to d d Power the GOT and PLC
476. or display board For GT1562 VN 65536 color display is interface not supported even with the multi color display board installed Hardware reset switch 13 Reset switch T F i Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 14 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 15 Battery holder Houses the battery 1 For the multi color display board refer to the following CF 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN Remark Connector used for the RS 232 interface Ro 4 10 The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1560 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Mode name 17LE 23090 27 D4Ck or equivalent product 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1550 on iu ra 8 3 2 3 gt Z lt E me 1 p gt 06 2G UH no 4 13 _ i 7 ain qn S f l 9 ra Sel 4 5 14 6 o ii o EgO Zz EE a O ow auw gt pul 9 225 mi 19 Sd Orm 12 asa O 11 3 z Z oO zZ a O F O 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155 4 11
477. or for MELSEC o x X currently displayed program automatically Q QnA 03 09 reflect the set value of TC changed in the test function Supporti tion to CC Link IE Opiom os upporting connection to CC Lin Pporing 2 77F Ladder monitor for MELSEC O x x controller network Q QnA 03 12 Function to monitor and change the data ne i Option OS of intelligent function module buffer 2 18U se O x x Intelligent module i Intelligent module monitor 02 02 memory using a dedicated screen monitor function Supporting connection to CC Link IE Option OS 2 77F O x x controller network Intelligent module monitor 03 12 List editor for Function for displaying editing sequence 209K Option OS MELSEC A program saved from ACPU with list mode i List editor for MELSEC A 01 02 O O Function to display edit the sequence Option OS program read out from the FXCPU in the 2 18U List editor for MELSEC FX O x O list mode 02 02 Extended function OS List editor for Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX O x O MELSEC FX 02 04 Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Traditional German and Korean Extended function OS i d 2 27D A Oo x Oo GT11 supports display of Chinese List editor for MELSEC FX 02 04 Simplified Traditional and Korean Function to monitor the servo amplifier Servo amplifier j Option OS i and also to change parameters execute 2 18U 7 N O x x monitor function Servo am
478. or function multi channel function and document display function 2 Option function board with add on memory Option function 32MB GT15 QFNB32M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function 28 and document display function E cw Option function board with add on memory Option function 48MB beetles GT15 QFNB48M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function and document display function Option function board with add on memory Option function 48MB Z GT15 MESB48M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function a m S document display function and MES interface function E To a aSa 8 10 2 Installing procedure Power OFF the GOT 6 Detach the extension unit cover I F 1 side of GOT rear face When extention units are mounted on the GOT remove the extention units Z o zZ a Zz O E fo 8 10 Option Function Board 8 45 8 10 1 Applicable option function board Insert the option function board to the option function board interface to which the positioning crenas are fitted After the installation of option function board attach the extension unit cover For installation of extension unit install the extension unit 8 46 8 10 Option Function Board 8 10 2 Installing procedure 8 11 Battery Battery is used to backup data when the power supply of GOT is OFF The data which can be backed up with the battery is s
479. or more gt g When the CF card is not used 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more l 100 3 94 or o When the CF card is used 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more more 50 19 7 or more 20 0 79 or more z 100 39 4 or more owe 20 0 79 or more Seu Soe Unit mm inch 7 oe The values enclosed in parenthesis apply to the case where no other equipment generating radiated noise such as a contactor or heat is installed However keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower even in such a case The required lead in allowance for cables may be larger than the size of A above depending on the unit or cable used Z O z l z A 2 WIRING OPTION 6 3 Mounting Position 6 5 For installing CF card extension unit 1 Installing location a Depth dimensions When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel 180mm in depth including the bending radius of the cable is required inside the control panel 180 or more 7 09 aS Unit mm inch b Available area for installation When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel a distance of 25mm is required around the unit Keep a distance of 25mm or more between the control panel side installation unit and the GOT The control panel side installation unit can be installed in the area shown in the following figure For the installation do not g
480. ormation 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive A Built in CF card B Extended memory card C Flash Memory is displayed The functions below can be carried out for files For details of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual _ GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 29 13 30 G1A CSV conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV file 13 31 G1A TXT conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to TXT file 13 31 Deletion Deletes file 13 39 Copy Copys file 13 20 Graph Displays the advanced alarm watch result by historical graph or tally graph 13 34 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information Main menu 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program Data control Touch P rogram Data control Alarm information Alarm information Program Data control Alarm information Belect drive C Name Cine A Built in CF card DIR PROJECTI DIR G1SPC DIR ICIRDAT C Flash Memory Operate Extended alarm log file or Alarm log file 5058KB bi A gt CSVb1A gt TXT Del Copy 1 3 28 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information 13 4 3
481. ory card C Built in flash memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 10 13 11 Install All OS files written in the A drive Standard CF card and B drive Extended 1942 nstal p memory card can be installed in the C drive Built in flash memory Uboad All OS files in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive 1343 oa p Standard CF card and B drive Extended memory card F Displays the property file name data size type version and creation date of the Property display file 13 14 le Data check Data check of files is possible 13 15 Point gt 1 Precautions for installing OS Installing Boot OS and OS will delete project data in the GOT After installing them install or download necessary data again 2 Precautions for operating OS files When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card installing and uploading OS files are not available 3 8 13 2 OS Information 13 2 1 Function of OS information 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information Zz O 5 Ze i Main menu P rogram Data control lt gt gt 9 3 Utility Display 5 Touch OS Touch information E Program Data control ow B
482. ouch and select the file to delete ae ea N AND BATTERY Delete protect data Screen mentioned left is displayed if PROJECT 1 button is touched Do you want to delete Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly 5 i If touch OK button the file is deleted mi If touch Cancel button the deletion is 5 canceled 2 OK Cancel Zz fej DE on Delete is completed amp When the deletion completes the dialog go box shown left is displayed Za If touch OK button the dialog is closed ae Zz fe wg 2e Zu HOS z m E Seu 13 3 Project Information 1 3 19 13 3 4 Operation of project information Copy operation Using the A drive and B drive the following operations are possible Copying to another directory in the same drive Copying between A drive and B drive Copy to from C drive is disabled This item explains using the A drive Install CF card in the PC in which create a folder for the copy destination Set the same character with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designer2 for the folder name C gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 3 1 GOT Controller Type Setting Install the CF card mentioned above to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card lt gt 8 4 Video RGB Unit Open Project Information screen to select the file to copy S e Te If touch button
483. over the top of mounting screws 4 places with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the sticker stuck as it is Accessory stickers Connector cover Sticker Point P Remove the serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit If you remove the serial communication unit or Ethernet communication unit detach it from specified direction shown PULL so as not to break a connector 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure 2 Terminal block socket installation For GT15 RS4 TE only Insert the terminal block socket in the serial communication unit a gt O zZ fe 5 ae iz Fasten the terminal block by tightening the terminal block fixing screws 2 places with the as tightening torque of 0 20 to 0 25 N m Extended figure of part A T o L O o wn Qa Z EORR Aa Ego zz EE awn Point P When attaching or removing a communication cable When attaching or removing a communication cable to from the terminal block socket detach the terminal block socket from the connector v When extension units are installed in multiple layers the units do not have to be one x removed from the GOT main unit SKg ala Zz z z o zZ a Zz O E 8 1 Communication Unit 8 9 8 1 2 Installing procedure Link communication unit CC MELSECNET 10 communication unit amp Power off t
484. p WES NE D lt o 5 Bak Internal Flush memory area oan write read check Normaly completed zZ lt z E a e Q 0K 46 LO Point P When error is found in memory 14 When error is found by memory check 5 the dialog indicating the area in which Internal Flush memory area T the error occurred is displayed rierren m In case of error contact your local write read error E oO Mitsubishi Electric System Service If touch LOK returns to the Memory check screen z ue OK og 22 Se tn wi amp a oa 0 88 Ww Zu 250 Oz EHE lt SEO To rrr 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 1 Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens 14 4 2 Display operation of drawing check Mainmenu Debug amp self check Self check c 9 3 Utility Display roe e y Touch Touch Vv Self check Display check Touch Debug amp self check Display check Start Drawing check If touch the Drawing check of Display ons check the screen for drawing check is A Touch displayed Drawing check Point gt Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn ac
485. p restore setting x x Enables the setting for monitoring local devices 2 58L O Enables setting the drive for collectively reading comment data O x x Enables settings for the backup trigger setting and the maximum number of 2 73B x x backup data Designation of the channel No used for Clock Setting ae a i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x adjusting and broadcasting is possible Function for setting any screen for the Standard monitor OS 01 02 2 09K O O O GOT startup screen Boot OS 01 02 C Startup Logo Enables displaying a BMP data stored in the A drive as the startup logo when the 2 73B Boot OS 03 09 S O x x OS boot drive is set to the A drive App 34 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Handy GOT Setting of the grip switch LED of hand i 7 oe 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x x Oo Setting GOT System messages to be displayed on Dialog window GOT can be customized or created by the 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O user i Standard monitor OS 03 00 Function to save the GOT operation j 2 32J Option OS O O x performed by the user as a history Operation Log 03 00 Function for converting multiple files 2 43V O O x The bi
486. perature inside control 1 Ambient hygrometer environment 10 to 90 RH panel is ambient humidity Measure corrosive temperature Atmosphere gas No corrosive gas Power GOT with 100 to 240VAC su 100 240V is x Measure voltage 85 to 242VAC Change supply power voltage AC power E across terminals 2 check GOT with Input polarity 24VDC L tt eft 24VDC of 24VDC Measure voltage Right Change wiring ight power power across terminals g Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws Mounting 3 Dirt foreign No dirt foreign matter status Visual check a Remove clean matter sticking 19 2 19 1 Daily Inspection Continued to next page No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Loose i D wy Retighten screws with Beg terminal f Not loose Retighten terminal screws Jos screwdriver of screws EE ane r Connection Proximate ows status solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals O Loose Retighten connector fixin Visual check Not loose 3 a 26 connectors screws Exo INT Replace with new batter J29 Check GOT internal p Y g 9 a when the current battery Pe ea battery voltage status a has reached the specified 1 9 5 Battery in Time setting amp No alarm appears i i life span even if battery a display of the Utility Z voltage low is not z Refer to 13 E displayed Z Z lw E zZ lt INSPECTION 1
487. placed 2 9 with a new one the error may be caused by the effect from another module Z22 Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the zis module located furthest from the operating position in the system and check for the status of occurrence of QWs the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur The module or extension cables bus connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error he Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below When use the extension base unit Ba 2 QnASCPU oa Soe Example 1 Example 2 729 FOZ QO Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the GOT ZaD Turn off the power of the PLC Turn off the power of the PLC a Z Disconnect the bus connection cable Disconnect the bus connection cable x D IN side from the final stage GOT OUT side from the GOT located one E 2 Z stage before the final stage 7 5 2 Turn on the power of the PLC a aoo E g 4 Turn on the power of the PLC TA E Turn on the power of the GOT 4 Z 2 Turn on the power of the GOT Lo dae DSN f an error does not occur the final 4 a stage GOT May be faulty f an error does not occur the final Hi 7 N A stage GOT and the bus connection i NI aa gf cable before the final stage may be MN z 77 aulty See ae Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to
488. played in the left bottom of the screen If touch the folder of the copy destination the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination T zE The copied file cannot be copied to its e a own folder Select the different folder HD Fle cane If touch Next button the dialog box SNAPOOO1 BMP shown left is displayed Copy destination A Copy now or File is already exist Touch OK button Overwrite now If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the screen shown left is displayed without starting to copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Copy is completed 1 3 40 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information Rename operation z Rename the selected file S re Select a file to be renamed with touching Z the file 5 Zz O au Z20 PEE r Del Copy Renage 2 Zz LOV gt F O Hee Touch the Rename button and then the aban Path Name screen shown left is displayed Input the file A PROJECT1 name to be changed Eile wee Character types to be input can be 2 o gt INGOOOE changed with touching the following ep buttons HES sa
489. pletion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog Folder create operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created PROJECT1 indName Size Date Time IRJ IR JRECIPE1 03 16 05 15 17 nN IR JRECIPE2 03 16 05 15 17 IR RECIPES 03 16 05 15 17 VoOCOOF F Oil 15600KB 1P gt CSV Copy Move ER Execute GIP TX Del Rename Crate Path Name A PROJECT1 Folder Name REC PES HSEEE LIXICIVIBINIM Enter Create new folder Process completed Q Touch the Create Folder button 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left If touch the OK folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation button starts creating 13 57 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS ae ea N AND BATTERY de STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION
490. plifier monitor 02 02 test run etc Function to execute servo monitor and Si xe 7 y Option OS parameter setting for motion controller 2 18U Oo x x Q motion monitor 02 02 CPU Q series Parameter setting is enabled for F 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x x Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Lie eae Supporti tion to Q17nDCPU 263r OPN OS upporting connection to n ENTON 23 2 Q motion monitor 03 07 O z Enables clearing the SFC error history Option OS 2 63R Oo x x Universal model QCPU only Q motion monitor 03 07 Supporting connection to CC Link IE Option OS 2 77F O x x App 42 controller network Q motion monitor 03 12 Continued to next page Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series n Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 a 7 Function to monitor the MELDAS that is Option OS 2 x 2 2 18U i m O x x ZO CNC monitor connected to the GOT CNC monitor 02 02 ro a i ELS nee Supporti tion to CNC C70 263r OPOS ae upporting connection to poe CNC monitor 03 07 O x lt r Function to back up setting data for E ee the Extended function OS controllers and to restore the data to the 2 58L Oo x x Backup Restore 03 07 S Backup restore Controles Zag function Supporting Backup Data Conversion Tool 2 63R oO x x oz Q
491. position closest to the load The GOT s ground cable and communication cable must not be installed close to the load Output equipment such as PLC s output module The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Measures for AC inductive load The GOT s ground cable and communication cable must not be installed close to the load Output equipment such as PLC s output module The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Measures for DC inductive load 7 12 7 5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment 7 4 2 Panel outside wiring 7 6 Grounding Extension Units 7 6 1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable This section describes wiring of the FG cable when a PLC CPU is connected to the GOT Point P Cable connected to the PLC CPU Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines high voltage large current or I O signal lines When connecting QCPU or motion controller CPU Q series to the GOT e Grounding of the FG cable for QCPU and motion controller CPU Q series is not necessary since they have no FG wire When connecting QnACPU ACPU or motion controller CPU A series to the GOT e When using GT15 C O EXSS 1 or GT15C OBS perform the grounding in the following steps Point 1 GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model Before wiring check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used 2 Ground cables Up
492. ption function button are required When setting the maintenance notifying time refer to the life descrived in Section 3 2 Performance Specifications as a guide to set time or count The maintenance time notification is output by the following two methods e Outputs to GOT special register GS680 e Outputs as system alarm For details of the GOT special register and system alarm refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Point gt Switching OFF the maintenance time notification output The maintenance time notification setting which has been set once is not switched OFF even if changing its setting Switch OFF the maintenance time notification by the following methods e Execute addition time reset e Switch OFF each bit of maintenance time notification cancel information GS638 Maintenance oints Item Description Setting range Unit P Reference page f Sets energization time for the maintenance Backlight aes j notification output 0 to 100 maintenance time ee 1000 rae When 0 no message notification lt At factory 18 5 notification period A i hours The time is counted only when backlight is lit shipment 0 gt 0 to 100000 hour i in every ten minutes f Sets energization time for the maintenance Display section ae j notification output 0 to 100 maintenance time ee 1000 ies cite When 0 no message notification lt At factory notification period j hou
493. quality adjustment for documents is TES 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O x possible m W f Standard monitor OS 03 01 a Function to execute data linkage between 2 43V Option OS O x x the control and information systems MES Interface 03 01 Oracle 8i ACCESS2000 ACCESS2003 and MSDE2000 are added to the Standard monitor OS 03 02 MES interface applicable database unei 2 47Z Option OS O x x nction i i ion i unctl The trigger buffering function is added MES Interface 03 02 Enables setting Do not sample for the sampling setting in the device tag settings Industrial SQL Server 9 0 and Microsoft Standard monitor OS 03 03 SQL Server 2005 are added as an 2 58L Option OS O x x applicable database MES Interface 03 03 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade App 43 For GOT1000 Series Appendix 6 2 For GT10 GT Designer2 Version 2 43V or later is applicable to GT1020 GT Designer2 Version 2 58L or later is applicable to GT1030 Added GOT main unit Version of GT f Target Models j Version of OS Designer2 GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL 2 43V GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW 2 58L GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 2 58L Added connection types O Applicable x N A Applicable from the first version a Version of GT Item Description i Version of OS GT1020
494. r DDK Ltd Mode name 17LE 23090 27 D4Ck or equivalent product 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 MAIAYSAO NOLLWHNSIANOO SNOLLWOISIOAdS Ng SONILLAS 3A193410 NOILYTIYLSNI ONIMIM NOLLdO WALSAS ANY JNWYN LHYd J VL0A MO7 ANY OWS m rt 2 E 4 5 co TT pe al D ae b jl Q O iy 4 oO i eb f 2 o O N N J Oo g df oO C gt C J Q elre l S IN A J c y a C ER s J C 2 C 2 C J J C 2 s Cc J D C t C Pie _ a C i at p T fap Lo cc Cc m an gt GJ a G amd ar eo en 5 4 3 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 No Name Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen
495. r YOKOGAWA temperature troll Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation controller RKC temperature e Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC controller PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD GOT server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2 Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network A 25 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Functions This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version2 77F For the added functions by the product version upgrade refer to the list of functions added by GT Desiger2 version upgrade in Appendices Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual Point P Refers to the information Yack operation required Carries out writely ad check of memory T Remark Refers to the supplementary explanations for reference Point When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displa
496. r 26 12 dot standard font 85 characters x 64 lines 2byte character zz Display d E 9 xt section Display color 65536 colors Se Left Right 75 degrees Display angle Top 50 degrees Bottom 60 degrees z Intensity of LCD only 450 cd m a w gt L Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Q a i Life Approx 52 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C ma Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set e Approx 50 000 h or longer lt Lifes Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature z of 25 C Type Analog resistive film Key size Minimum 2 x 2 dots per key Touch Number of objects that _ i Simultaneous presses not allowed panel can be simultaneously o Only 1 point can be touched Z touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Continued to next page zZ O E 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 2 1 GT1595 X Specifications Item GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD Detection length 1 39 37 m inch Human Detection range Left Right Top Bottom 70 degrees sensor Detection delay time 0 to 4s Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air 4 C or higher C drive Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory ane tear F 100 000 times Battery GT15 BAT l
497. r OS 01 07 O O display Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 45 ADDITION TIMES INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM RESET FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Other functions added nae Version of GT Item Description j Version of OS GT1020 GT1030 Designer2 Installing Enables installing or uploading the OS uploading with communication drivers project data and others 2 77F O O GT10 LDR with the GT10 LDR Enables installing the OS without the OS i Installing OS 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 Oo O App 46 installation screen of the GOT Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series INDEX A PGNSE COITOM ts Se e aa na aa a Ae Sy ce 14 1 Addition times reset for maintenance time notification De eavitanscetict E cade ceauetasuaeen seers S 17 1 Addition times reset fUNCTION 00 ees 17 1 Display operation of addition times reset 17 1 Operation of Addition times reset 08 17 2 Advanced Recipe Information s 13 45 Alarm information 2 2 ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 28 Alarm information operation ceeee 13 30 Function of alarm information 0006 13 28 The display operation of alarm information 1
498. r earthing Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1550 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Mode name 17LE 23090 27 D4Ck or equivalent product 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155 5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE W amp gt O For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are lt required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products pZ Ae 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive no EMC Directives are those which require any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external 5 Emission electromagnetic interference and It is not influenced by the electromagnetic wave from the lt external Immunity electromagnetic sensitivity a Items 5 1 1 thru 5 1 3 summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to wi match the EMC directives 2 Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi they do not completely guaran
499. r how to confirm the function version refer to the following z lt gt Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards a kK ie GT1585 STBA A ele GT1585 STBD A 3 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life 4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB Z interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment 6 For using multiple extension units a bar code reader or a RFID controller the total current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function ee ao 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 6 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN Item Specifications GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD TFT color liquid crystal LCD of high intensity and wide angle TF
500. range O Screw A 0 186 to 0 245 N m Other screws 0 36 to 0 48 N m z When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT a zs Q z 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 11 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight For GT15 60VLTT or GT15 60VLTN Backlight replacement varies with the hardware version of the applicable GOT Before replacement please confirm the hardware version lt gt Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards Type Hardware version Reference April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 GT1565 VTBA March 2005 or later Replacement procedure 1 ao GT1562 VNBA Sep 2005 or later 3 Replacement procedure 3 D 2 E 1 GT1565 VTBD A Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 A 3 A 3 GT1562 VNBD Sep 2005 or later 3 Replacement procedure 3 1 Replacement 1 Power off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the extension unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted 5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Expanded figure of part A in 1 9 12 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1
501. ration in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT1oo00 GT15 User s Manual MODEL GT 15 U SHQ E MODEL 1D7M23 SH NA 080528ENG M 0802 MEE afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
502. rator information can be edited aap 28 ep 2 3 FEA Hug gaa 583 oak ob Q Z On a o O gt No Item Description 46 wo The operator name to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be a Operator Name 1 4 added Up to 16 alphanumeric characters a The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added Q b Operator ID f i T Setting range 1 to 32766 Maximum number of registrations 255 2 a i Navel The operator security level to be edited is displayed or input an operator security Do c eve L level to be added 0 to 15 Z d Password Input a password Make a permanent Switches the setting of the item disabled and enabled e O password __ Disabled D lt Enabled oE ZS Za Wg oa Zz wg E E 92 Zu z SEY 14 11 Operator Information Management 1 4 38 14 11 1 Operator management Operator management operation 14 39 i ettii mi Operator manageaent BJ Password change ial Function setting password authentication Password a TUU f T ere R atorhane niniatrator 3 Wee 1 10 2000 01 30 k nE 4d Edit Delete Return Drive in use Import Export Save 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 1 Operator management Touch Operator management in the operator setting menu 2 The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator
503. rd device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped
504. rd monitor OS 03 01 O O Oo Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 Oo O x figure Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Touch switch Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O Figure created as a part can be used to a i 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O G x touch switch Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 35 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Data change switch can be used 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Oo O Comment Group can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O Oo Adjust Text Size setting is possible 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O O Auto repeat can be used 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O O O The toutch switch on the ladder monitor f l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo Oo O with device search function can be used PX Developer Function call is added to Switch Action of the special function 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 x O x switch Enables specifying the transpa
505. reased y voltage is low Replace the GOT built in battery 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Error code 502 Error message Warning Backlight needs replacement soon Action The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached 80 or more of the set time The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time Channel No storage 503 Warning Display section needs replacement soon The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached 80 or more of the set time The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time 504 Warning Touch panel needs replacement soon The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached 80 or more of the set count number The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the touch key The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a c
506. reation date author name and the version of GT Property display l 13 14 Designer2 Data check Data check of the file can be executed 13 15 Downloads the project data written in the A drive Standard CF card B drive Download cae 13 23 Extended memory card to C drive Built in flash memory Setup The project data to be displayed can be selected 13 25 Upload Uploads the project data written in the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive 13 26 Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card Setup cancel Cancels the item which is selected for the project data to be displayed 13 27 Point gt Precautions for operating project data When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card deleting copying downloading setting up and uploading project data are not available 1 3 16 13 3 Project Information 13 3 1 Functions of the project information 13 3 2 Display operation of project information Zz O 5 z Tr Main menu Program Data control gt lt gt gt 9 3 Utility Display 5 Touch Touch saad i E P roject information O Program Data control z Sy Be SF Kb OSN OZo Project Informati t information Name Size Date Time PROJECT 1 3K 03 08 04 04 51 CIRDAT 62K 02 27 04 21 09 Q Zz 2g z2 Bae No Ww D00 Operate Project data file n oO gt zZ gt 5 ECA T UES Qe 5058KB 2File 5 5 P t Data check EB roperty lata chec Q lt Delete
507. refer to the following manual lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 11 3 Logging Function Function Description Refer to Displaying file iolder daia The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 70 13 71 1L V G 0S G1L file of logging file is converted to CSV file 13 72 conversion 1L TXT G gt G1L file of logging file is converted to Unicode text file 13 72 conversion Del File or folder is deleted 13 74 Copy File is copied 13 75 Move Folder is moved 13 76 Rename File name is changed 13 78 Create Folder New folder is created 13 79 1 3 68 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 1 Function of logging information 13 8 2 Display operation of logging information Main menu Program Data control c 9 3 Utility Display Touch P rogram Data Touch Loggi control ouch Logging Information Logging Information elect Drive PROJECT1 lame Size Date Time L0g00001 1K 06 05 01 14 Loso0002 2K 06 05 01 V Loso0002 2K 06 05 01 13 Li a LO il LOGO00001_0002 4K 06 05 01 13 Operate Logging file 77eskB TSSSoKB Create GIL gt CSY Copy Move fella GIL gt TXT Del Rename 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 2 Display operation of logging information 13 69 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS FSN N AND BATTERY de
508. rent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 O O x figure Toue owen FX List Monitor Operator Information Management Log in Log out Operator Authentication Password Change O O x Operator Authentication and Backup Restore are added to Switch Action of 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 the special function switch The name Password is changed to Password Security Level in Switch O O oO Action of the special function switch CNC Data Input Output is added to Switch Action of the special function 2 63R Standard monitor OS 03 07 Oo x oO switch SFC Monitor is added to Switch Action i li f Swi l 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 O x O of the special function switch Setting to display input value when entering the value at input target object 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x x Numerical Display position is possible Numerical input Format String setting is possible 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O Oo O When Bit Trigger is not met whether to p pies ae 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O O enable Hold Display can be selected Function to store NULL 0x00 at the end E 7 Si 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O oO of input characters Standard monitor OS 02 02 Function to convert characters input in j 2 18U Option OS o o X Kana into Kanji ana imo sanji KANA KANJI JP 02 02
509. ril 2005 or later GT1575 STBD A July 2005 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4Ck or equivalent product GT1575 VTBA D April 2005 or before Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Model name GM C9RMDU11 or equivalent product E April 2005 or later GT1575 VTBD A July 2005 or later GT1575 VNBA A July 2005 or later GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA A July 2005 or later A September 2005 or later GT1572 VNBD A September 2005 or later 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4Ck or equivalent product 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1560 MA3IAYSAO NOLLWHNSIANOO SNOLLWOISIOAdS Ng SONILLAS 3A193410 NOILYTIYLSNI ONIMIM NOLLdO WALSAS ANY JNWYN LHYd J VL0A MO7 ANY OWS i i oO Fagin af z m 2 N C oe Lo lt ar a P Q TS g ISP a 9 o Ue PE CNN i g D D Ke z gt gt F me oe SS gt cS L N C n AAE 8 C J C J gt
510. riod the GOT will be reset pu e Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power off as 3 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply icp Zz O q o m Specifications g ep GT1575V STBA GT1575 STBA GT1575 VTBA Item GT1585V STBA GT1595 XTBA GT1585 STBA GT1575 VNBA GT1572 a VNBA GT1565 VTBA GT1562 VNBA z S Input power supply voltage 100 to 240VAC 10 15 E E an Input frequency 50 60Hz 5 Input max apparent power 110VA maximum load Power consumption 56W or less 41W or less 39W or less gt At backlight off 30W or less 28W or less 2 w 50A or less 4ms 45A or less 4ms 40A or less 4ms z O Inrush current Qar maximum load maximum load maximum load isa Permissible instantaneous 20ms or less 100VAC or more power failure time o 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1us noise width when measuring with a noise simulator z Noise immunity O under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Ee Dielectric withstand voltage 1500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth 10MQ or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance Insulation resistance tester Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A Applicable solderless terminal FV2 N3A g Applicable tightening torque z i 3 a 1 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Terminal block terminal screw zZ
511. ror Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No code storage 604 Sound output unit error Check if the sound output unit is correctly installed x ae The memory capacity for the MES interface function is Insufficient memory a 610 insufficient x capacity f Delete unnecessary files and reserve memory The contents for job files are unmatched with the settings for 611 Improper job files job files Confirm job setting Check if there are mistakes in the settings on the setting screen Cannot access Logging 1 Insert a memory card 612 Files Check the memory 2 Turn onthe memory card access switch x card 3 If the memory card has unnecessary files delete the files 1 Insert a memory card 613 Error in writing logfile 2 Turn onthe memory card access switch x 3 Check if the memory card is writable 1 Insert a memory card 614 Error in reading logfile 2 Turn onthe memory card access switch x 3 Check if the memory card is readable The server does not work normally or the connection path to 615 Cannot connect to MES the server is made up incorrectly x Server Check the Server 1 Check the operating conditions of the server 2 Check the network to the server The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to ate Cannot connect to SNTP_ the SNTP server is made up incorrectly x Server Check the Server 1 Check the operating conditions of the
512. rotection Set a keyword with initial letter of B Incorrect write protect Set a keyword with initial letter of C eg ce Pami a bw Zon b When setting keyword and 2nd keyword Select a protection level by Registration condition 2z m ope N 2 Monitoring availability at each keyword protection level Z 9 Device monitoring availability at each keyword protection level is shown in the aE following por When registering keyword and 2nd When registering keyword only g ines Kaper keyword not o istered Ee Read registere Fe Item All Incorrect Allon line Read Fins n Incorrect i i Write or m ea operation tare write operation write prota protection x lt z protect protection protect protect protect pencalled og 3 O lt Monitoring devices O O O x O O O T C set a value and gt file register 3 x x x x O O O z Changing D1000 and 2 devices the wa 0 following Lo Other than O O O x O O O the above 5 3 Difference between all online operations prohibition and all operations prohibition m When specifying All online operations prohibited displaying devices and inputting m Le W data with a programming tool or GOT are all prohibited 5 When all operations are prohibited displaying devices and inputting data with the g GOT are enabled while all operations using a programming tool are prohibited Zz 58 ZS z3 fi 12 oa Zz a wg 2g Zu l nO Zu z x SEO
513. roves waterproof property oil resistance and chemical resistance of the GOT 8 13 1 Applicable protective cover for oil The following protective covers for oil are applicable to the GT1500 Product name Model Description GT05 90PCO For 15 GOT GT05 80PCO For 12 1 GOT Protective cover for oil GT05 70PCO For 10 4 GOT GT05 60PCO For 8 4 GOT GT05 50PCO For 5 7 GOT 8 13 2 Installation procedure Point P Before attaching protective cover for oil For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control panel follow the procedures as below e Remove the GOT from the control panel Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance e Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel 7 When the USB environmental protection cover is installed on the GOT remove the cover After removing the cover put the USB connector protective sticker on the USB connector 8 13 Protective cover for oil 8 13 1 Applicable protective cover for oil 8 51 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION Check that the rubber packing is installed on the GOT rear face and then fit the protective cover for oil to each corner of the GOT front face Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER
514. rs The time is counted only when energized in shipment 0 gt 0 to 100000 hour every ten minutes Touch key Sets touch key touching count for the dione o maintenance time maintenance notification output 10000 oe oe lt At factory _ notification count When 0 no message notification times shipment 0 gt 0 to 2000000times Counts by every screen touch o Sets built in flash memory writing count for the Built in flash memory coats i maintenance notification output 0 to 200 maintenance time ao 1000 Pa When 0 no message notification lt At factory notification count Be A f times Counts by every writing in built in flash shipment 0 gt 0 to 1000000times 16 2 memory 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting By using system alarm the message that notifies that the maintenance time is near or it is already maintenance time is displayed z For the display of the system alarm refer to the following Zz K gt 20 TROUBLESHOOTING fi gt E For the display of the system alarm refer to the following K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 16 1 2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting z z Sg Main menu Maintenance time notification settings Er g lt lt gt gt 9 3 Utility Display SmE Maintenance report setting a 5 FA Maintenance report time setting Back light 0
515. rs when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards Model Function version GT1565 VTBA A aes GT1565 VTBD JA The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment For using multiple extension units a bar code reader or a RFID controller the total current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller and the current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 3 11 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN 3 2 5 GT1555 V GT1555 Q GT1550 Q i Specifications em GT1555 VTBD GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD TFT color liquid crystal ae STN monochrome Type ee I STN color liquid crystal LCD of high intensity and wide angle view liquid crystal S
516. rting connection to printer connection eee p Printer 02 04 O x x x GT15 s tina the FA t tf ncionvia Standard monitor OS 01 02 upporting the ransparent function vi aa g p 2 09K GT11 O x O O Standard monitor OS 01 02 Boot OS 01 02 C FA transparent p MT Developer via USB MR Configurator and FR Configurator are added as 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O O compatible software GX Configuration and PX Developer are 9 p 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x O O added as compatible software Multiple GT11 Connection with multiple GT11s 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 x x O Oo connection Ext ivo s i idrrtoei iO Extended function OS xternal upporting connection to external f Pe 9 2 58L External I O Operation Panel Oo x x x device connection devices 03 03 RFID i Supporting connection to the RFID 2738 Extended function OS connection controller RFID 03 09 O x O O App 30 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Added GT Designer2 functions D wy JE Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Fog It Description Version of OS ZO a a Designer2 15 GoTio00 11 Of ai W z ans Ethernet download Downloading the project data via Ethernet 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O x x Q ul Copying comments in column unit on py 2 2 09K O O O Basic Co
517. ry soldered terminals Cable distinction numbers for one manufacturer s products Two digit sequence number 01 02 When cable distinction is needed for one manufacture s products Example Wirings are different for each PLC type Connecting targets are different such as servo inverter temperature controller Cable classification 01 For OMRON PLC 02 For YASKAWA PLC 03 For YOKOGAWA PLC 04 For HITACHI PLC 05 For TOSHIBA PLC 06 For SHARP PLC 07 For ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 08 For SIEMENS PLC 09 For MATSUSHITA PLC 11 For KEYENCE PLC 12 JTEKT PLC Application classification R2 For RS232 communication For GOT1000 side R4 For RS422 communication Length classification Indicated in 10cm unit Example 3m 30 30m 300 Third party PLC connection cable Commonly used for GT15 and GT11 2 2 Component List 2 4 be OVERVIEW zZ Q z aa o TE Z 0 0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 1 GOT GOT Product name Model name GT1595 XTBA Specifications 15 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1595 XTBD 15 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal h
518. s a FETE ZIXICITIBIEIN Enter A Z Alphabet capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Before SNAPOOO1 BNP Touch the Enter button and then the After IMGOOO1 BMP dialog box shown left is displayed Change filename ae ea N AND BATTERY 4 Touch the OK button and then renaming x the file is started T S D O 0 Process comsicel amp When renaming the file is completed a E f completion dialog box is displayed 59 Touch the OK button and then the g dialog box is closed Za 12 oa Zz fe wg 2g Zu zZ Seo 13 5 Hard Copy Information 1 3 41 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information 13 6 Memory Card Format 13 6 1 Function of the memory card format Formats the memory card 13 6 2 Display operation of memory card format Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display amp Touch Program Data control z N Touch Memory card format Memory card format Program Data control Memory card format elect Drive A Built in CF card Y Select the drive and format 1 3 42 13 6 Memory Card Format 13 6 1 Function of the memory card format 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format Zz fe o Zz T 7 Install the memory card to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of memory card L gt 8 8 CF Card Zz O 2 Touch
519. s displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog 92 LOV zS SmE GOD n 2 3 Fi amp HEG 583 Property display operation o9z Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder 1 3 pat S W tt a ner2 Version2 00A E If touch P roperty button after selecting z B2 Seten Hon tor il the project data to display the property gt m L Item Description Date Displays the creation date of the file S W Author Displays the author of the project data S i Drawing Displays name and version of the drawing mi Y S W software by which the project data is 5 u version created 0 2 If touch A button the screen scrolls Z up down line by one line BS g n gt If touch 4 button the screen scrolls 24 up down by one screen ae 4 If touch x button the property display is Zz closed and returned to the previous S screen ate e Ze oO woz Zu le lt x SEO 13 3 Project Information 1 3 21 13 3 4 Operation of project information Data check operation Carrys out data check of the selected project file Dialog at data ch ck normal a Touch the Data check button after Data normal selecting the file for data check The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left If touch OK button the dialog is closed Dialog at data check abnormal Data error OK 1 3 22 13 3 Proje
520. saving 1 POWER LED me Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen 7 For installing the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit or RGB 4 Video RGB interface output unit For connecting a personal computer 4 4 5 USB interface Connector type MINI B f For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 6 RS 232 interface Connector type D sub 9 pin 7 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 8 Extension interface For installing an extension unit 9 CF card interface For installing a CF card 10 CF card ss LED Lit CF card accessed card acce Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the 11 CF card itch gt n card access switc ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board 12 For installing the optional function board interface Multi color display board i 13 For installing the multi color display board interface f Hardware reset switch 14 Reset switch cited mk Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 15 Hole for u
521. scan time set in the parameter o0 n 2 3 Foo E Wi 05 aoe xg 2 Sok O25 a Z lt fa D o gt wo Ig LO x m I u a W Yn kK O Z Q 58 On to 4D oa Zz wg 2g E fog zu SEH 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 1 4 28 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 29 6 No 10 Host station line status Displays the connection status of the CC Link IE controller network communication unit Item Connction Description Displays the connection status of the host station Normal IN Loop Back OUT cable disconnection IN Loop Back OUT connecting a line IN Loop Back OUT wrong cable connection OUT Loop Back IN cable disconnection OUT Loop Back IN connecting a line OUT Loop Back IN wrong cable connection Disconnect IN cable disconnection OUT cable disconnection Other than GT155 O Disconnect IN cable disconnection OUT connecting a line Disconnect IN cable disconnection OUT wrong cable connection Disconnect IN connecting a line OUT cable disconnection Disconnect IN connecting a line OUT connecting a line Disconnect IN connecting a line OUT wrong cable connection Disconnect IN wrong cable connection OUT cable disconnection Disconnect IN wrong cable connection OUT connecting a line IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN Disconnect IN wro
522. screen a ep O 0 Process completed When deleting is completed completion Z dialog is displayed t5 Lu If touch the OK button closes the oe dialog Za Ho oa Zz O wg ge Zu lS HQ zw le lt x SEO 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 65 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 7 5 Precautions Precautions for create delete 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in memory card for GT15 AN Folder name name File name name CSV f characters 1 ce Extension 4 characters Drive name 1 character ee Max 78 characters _ Remark If folder is assigned the hierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used e The folder name which begins with G1 e Folder name and file name which
523. screen scrolls up down by one line If touch A button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected Refer to the following for G1A gt CSV G1A TXT delete copy graph operations G1A CSV G1A gt TXT this section Delete i lt gt this section COPY eee lt gt this section Grape L gt this section If touch D lt button the screen is closed 1 3 30 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation G1A gt CSV conversion operation G1A TXT conversion operation Z The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file S re Touch and select the G1A file which is to Z be converted to CSV file or TXT file 5 Sar file 2 The following dialogue is displayed when AAMOOOO1 GTA touching the following button accordingto 6 Destination file AAMOO001 CSY the file type to convert to FS ir Convert now Z26 e CVS file G1A gt CSV Button Se Lu TXT file FXT gt CSV Button Sii Q Zz LOV Example Dialogue when G1A gt CSV zg 2 button is touched aia aon File is already exist Touch OK button Overwrite now When the file whose name is the same am exists in the destination folder the dialog Z a x ep showed at left appears without starting the m a N conversion 5 R If touch the OK button overwr
524. sed the message that notifies of the backlight replacement time can be displayed on the GOT screen System alarm 502 Warning Backlight needs replacement soon Refer to the following for the system alarm display lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Point gt Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement 1 9 5 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF VANSANT E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION fe STANDARD OS ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES INDEX 19 6 Backlight Replacement This section explains the backlight replacing methods 19 6 1 Applicable backlight The following backlights are applicable for GT1500 Model name GT15 90XLTT Description For 15 high intensity wide angle view TFT XGA Target GOT GT1595 X GT15 80SLTT For 12 1 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1585V S GT1585 S GT15 70SLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1575 S Function version B or earlier GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA VGA For 10 4 TFT VGA GT1575V S Function version C or later GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT15 60VLTT For 8 4 high intensity wi
525. series GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Simulator2 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2 GX Developer GX Simulator Abbreviation of SWOD5C GPPW E EV SWLD5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of SWOD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions Document Converter Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series PX Developer mw License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of SWOD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control Abbreviations and generic terms Description License GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P mw License key for GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviations and generic terms Description License key A9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC License key FD SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module w Others Abbreviations and generic terms Omron PLC Description Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation KEYENCE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE Sharp PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation JTEKT PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation Toshiba PLC Abbreviation of PLC manu
526. sheet troubleshooting in the bus connection and the error zis message system alarm list ons 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet g O o This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally which are listed FE in check sheets z 2 S The following explains how to use each sheet Zor 1 When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions GOT status check sheet 9 When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions identify the cause of the malfunction etc with 5 GOT status check sheet and take corrective action 26 When the GOT is restored see the status for a while Eg TA 2 When the wiring status needs to be improved GOT installation status check sheet When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction etc based on the check result of 1 above take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet When the GOT is restored see the status for a while 3 When corrective action other than 1 and 2 above is required System configuration check sheet If malfunction etc occurs even after checking with 1 and 2 above please contact your local ma pa 2 ae a Z lt lt Mitsubishi Electric System Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system When sending a troubled product attach the GOT restoration sheets GOT status check sheet if Q J GOT installation status check sheet System
527. signal NTSC PAL zt Z lt At factory shipment NTSC gt 95u The input signal and resolution can be Video Unit Settings p 9 Resolution 640 x 480 1 1 selected x 720 x 480 lt At factory shipment 640 x 480 gt Only when PAL is selected zZ On EO lt 2 wE oO W On Point f Input signal settings Set the input signal as follows according to the output format for the video camera or the like connected g gt k n Z2 gt If the settings made differ from these video images may not be displayed correctly a Wwe a aeRO SE Output format for video camera or the like Input signal setting Q ea lt O lt NTSC format NTSC PAL format PAL EIA format NTSC Z CCIR format PAL amp eh n O gt w Q a6 LO xe O W an oO Ww W no oO Zz O 59 gy z4 aS a2 Oa wg o m Zu ze oO wz zu x SEQ 11 9 Video Unit Settings 1 1 31 11 9 1 Functions of the video unit settings 11 9 2 Displaying the video unit settings Main Menu 77 9 3 Utility Display Video RGB setting Touch GOT setup Touch Touch Video Unit Settings Communication setting Video RGB Setting gt 10 1 Communication Setting Touch Video Unit Settings Video RGB Touch an item to be set 1 1 32 11 9 Video Unit Settings 11 9 2 Displaying the video unit settings 11 9 3 Operating the video unit settings Input Signal NTSC Resolution 640x480 WARNING Changes are valid a
528. special registers GS262 to 264 refer to the following manual gt GT Designer2 Versiong Screen Design Manual 2 9 1 GOT internal devices 2 The assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 3 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code Hexadecimal displayed on the servo amplifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number Example When GOT system alarm is 20144 the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H 4 Channel No will not be stored depending on the error code For channel No storage availability for each error code refer to the following L gt 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 5 An alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access however it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal b7 to 10 of system signal 2 2 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 1 Error Contents Display 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Decrease the number of objects from the disp
529. splays the author of the project data 5D Axis monitor data 2 4 A ents Drawing S W Displays name and version of the drawing 3 gt Pos speed control version software by which the project is created TOn Axis control data 1 gt EO 75P QD75D Axis control data 2 Z OD7AP ODTAD Axis contral data 3 a gE na a00 2 If touch the A button the screen scrolls up down line by one line n o If touch the 4 button screen scrolls up Fo a down by one screen Gee 4 If touch the X the property display is ean closed and returned to the previous screen 3 ae ea Se AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 89 13 10 4 Special data information operation 13 90 Data check operation Checks the selected special data Dialog when data is normal Data normal Dialog when data is error Data error ok 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 4 Special data information operation Select a data check target file and touch the Data check button The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left If touch the closed OK button the dialog is Download operation z Transfers the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Card or B drive Extended memory card S to the C drive Built in
530. st be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency b The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires By twisting with the earthing wire noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing However if a filter is installed on the power supply wires the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 2 Control panel 5 1 3 Noise filter ower supply line filter The noise filter bower supply line filter is a device effective to reduce conducted noise Except some models installation of a noise filter onto the power supply lines is not necessary However conducted noise can be reduced if it is installed The noise filter is generally effective for reducing conducted noise in the band of 10MHz or less Usage of the following filters is recommended Model name FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 11 Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK Rated current 3A 6A 3A Rated voltage 250V The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below 1 Do not install the input and output cables of the noise filter together to prevent the output side noise will be inducted into the input side cable
531. stallation FA transparent function CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector shape TYPE Application Data transfer data storage GOT startup 3 icp Zz f z 7 O Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch z O Multi color display board For multi color display board mounting 1ch k W Extension unit 6 For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch a Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 5 Protective structure a Inside the enclosure IP2X Z W External dimensions Z8 PAA Excluding USB environmental 316 12 44 W x 242 9 53 H x 52 2 05 D mm inch HE protection cover o Panel cutting dimensions 302 11 89 W x 228 8 98 H mm inch Weight 2 8 kg 6 2lb mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package 5 2 32J or later 2 04E or later 2 17T or later ie GT Designer2 Version Sox ILO Opa 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics a g a It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed 2 Fo
532. sword is verified the settings 3 are reflected and then the screen returns to the trigger backup setting screen When the trigger type is not changed 2 touching the OK button reflects the Ou settings Z z Bio oa wg An HOS zar 323 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 1 1 45 11 13 3 Trigger backup setting operation 11 46 Target data SYMP Specify the day and time to make backup copies Day BREE RAS Execute Wot execute Tine 12 00 With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Cancel Point gt Precautions for setting 4 When the trigger type is set to Time touch a setting item for Detail and the screen is switched to the trigger time setting screen In the screen specify the days and time that the GOT executes the backup Day Select days that the GOT executes the backup by touching displayed items Multiple days can be selected Time Setthe time that the GOT executes the backup by touching the displayed item Touch the D lt button without touching the OK button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed O After all settings in the backup restoration setting are completed end the backup restoration setting and GOT setup with touching the lt lt button and then the settings are reflected When the trigger type is set to Rise set the trigger device with GT Designer2 in
533. t being reset LO station numbers No responses from all 1 4 stations due to cable TIME Red e Responses from all stations lt breakage or transmission Q path affected by noise 5 Operating as master Operating other than as a MST Green H a station master station C SW Red Switch setting error No switch setting error 8 LINE Red Cable breakage error No cable breakage error Operating as standb Operating other than as S MST Green ee J eee master station standby master station Duplicate master station No duplicate master station Lh M S Red On error error g 2 f Operating other than as local Zs LOCAL Green Operating as local station no station a 2 PRM Red Parameter error No parameter error GOT R W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT z O wg 2 9 m an SE iQ Zu z lt x SEO 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 1 4 30 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 2 Data link information Displays the CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 data link startup status and error status No Item Description Displays the data link startup status D Link in prog Data link being executed D Link Offline Data link being stopped Initialize Set to the initial status Parameter wait Parameter not received Disconnect No Polling In cut off status with no inquiry from master station i Disconnect Line Err In cut off status due to line error b D Link Boot
534. t corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates DISPLAY SECTION Ol GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 15 1 Clean 1 5 15 1 1 Display operation of Clean 15 1 2 Operation of Clean After cleaning the screen touch the screen following the instruction displayed After touching the screen the screen returns to the Main Menu Depending on the GOT to use either of the following screens is displayed e Display pattern 1 p corner buttons simultane e Display pattern 2 Please press the upper left of of the screen and the upper right of in turn 1 5 2 15 1 Clean 15 1 2 Operation of Clean 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION Energization time touch count and writing times used as standard for the maintenance time are set When use the maintenance timing function battery and option function board are required Refer to the following below for details of battery and option function board gt 8 OPTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION VANOOR gy CLEANING OF SETTING 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting When use maintenance time notification function battery and o
535. t is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit After the installation tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 8 12 8 1 Communication Unit 8 1 2 Installing procedure Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 2 places m gt O zZ fej 5 ae nz cas Point gt Removing the MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network A _ communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 i Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws S pii fa IF above a When installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed refer to the following Qa Zz lt gt 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers a When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid 22 receiving electrostatic stick accessory labels to cover the top of mounting screws 4 places lt u Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the sticker stuck as it is Sow 25 See Soe wu gt a Zz fe 2 2 Terminal block socket installation For GT15 J61BT13 only z Insert the terminal block socket in CC Link communication unit Z T Zz O E 8 1 Communication Unit 8 13 8 1 2 Installing proce
536. t page Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 17 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Refe Item Functions overview GT15 SoftGOT GT11 rence 1000 Deleting or checking special data files Deleting special data folders Special data Downloading special data stored in the A drive Standard CF O x x x Program information i i card or B drive Extended memory card to the C drive Built in data flash memory control GOT data f Copying the OS special data and project data to a memory package O x x x a card acquisition Ladder monitor Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q O x x x System monitor O x O x A List editor O x O x FX list editor O x O x Intelligent module monitor Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q A 7 a Network monitor Q x x x Debug Motion monitor for Q series motion controller CPU O x x Servo amplifier monitor O X x x CNC monitor Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S and GT1575 S E x x X Backup restoration O x x x CNC data I O Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S Debug amp O x x x self GT1585 S GT1575V S and GT1575 S check SFC Monitor Inapplicable to GT155
537. tandard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1565 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1555 VTBD 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA App 22 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page Version of GT p Target Models k Version of OS Designer2 GT1155 QTBD 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 g W Fa Z GT1155HS QSBD to GT1150HS QLBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 5 Q 2 nE GT SoftGOT1000 2 27D ane Ir Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT15 QBUS 2 GT15 ABUS 2 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE 2 18U Communication driver For communication drivers used in m each connection use 02 02 or 2 a 2 OZ GT15 J71GP23 SX 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 d F a E CA ar S Standard monitor OS 03 01 aS S GT15 CFCD 2 43V nos BootOS 03 01 M Zan GT15 CFEX CO8SET 2 45X Standard monitor OS 03 02 Extended function OS A GT15 SOUT 2 58L lt Sound Output 03 03 E Zz Extended function OS GT15 DIO 2 58L External I O Op
538. tation No device Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No code storage The station number set in the GOT s utility is the same as the station number set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module or in the project data Check the following contents so that the multiple station Same sta on GOT amp numbers should not be the same 424 project data Review 1 Check the GOT s station number in the GOT s utility a communication 2 Check the station number set in the project data parameter 3 Check the station number set in the Ethernet setting Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer 4 When using the station No switching function check the data of the switching station No device A device outside the range of QnACPU file registers and the PLC cannot handle as a buffer memory was specified 448 requested Correct ee O Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC devices CPU Dedicated device is out of 1 Set the address for the special function module in the 449 range Confirm device GOT monitor
539. te protected and execute the recipe function again When the recipe function is executed specifying the file Processing from another register name other peripherals carry out the process to the 359 peripheral device file register x Execute it after Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe function again 0 divisor division error Zero division occurred by the data operational expression 360 Confirm operation Review the data operational expression so that the divisor x expression should not become 0 i f The entered file number is out of range Specified device No is 361 Check the entered file number and enter a valid value 1 to x out of range 9999 When controllers are controlled with the GOT s time action 362 Invalid device value in function the set No is our of range or the set device values x time action setting regarding the operation settings are out of range or invalid Set valid values Upper and lower limit The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower 370 value error Confirm value limit X setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit gt Lower limit 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No storage code The time out error occurred during communicating 1 Confirm the cable omission the communication unit ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINT
540. teed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directives The manufacturer itself 9 which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC a directives 26 zz amp E o Sz w w gt OE TO Bw nal og gt Q INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 z 5 1 1 EMC directive The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below Applied standard EN61131 2 2003 Test standard EN55011 Radiated noise Test details Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured Standard value 30M 230MHz QP 30dBuV m 30m in measurement range 3 230M 1000MHz QP 37dBuUV m 30m in measurement range 3 EN550114 Conducted noise Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured 150k 500kHz QP 79cB Mean 66dB 2 500k 30MHz QP 73aB Mean 60dB 2 EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic immunity EN61000 4 3 Radiated field AM modulation Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product 4kV Contact discharge 8kV_ Aerial discharge 80 1000MHz 10V m 1 4 2GHz 10V m 80 AM modulation 1kHz EN61000 4 4 Fast transient burst noise Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal lines Power line 2kV D
541. tems to be changed with the lt j button the GOT restarts and reflects the setting g Human sensor GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X V S S Setting item is changed if setting item is touched Effective ay Invalid Setting contents are defined if button is touched With do not push OK button If touch AX button without touching if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is value will be canceled displ d 0K isplayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with DXX button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 1 1 10 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Sensor detect level sensor off delay z 5 Zz 611595 GT1585 E Pa X V S S z 5 a If touching the setting numerical orean save tims nin om keyboard is displayed Input numeric with swe okie outs CIN the keyboard Z ee To move the cursor touch the lt or gt q Op owe button ZQg i 2a eer SET a Setting contents are defined if OK button 828 PD is touched 11 5 6 7819 del lt gt i 21 314 Camel Enter pea Ne Xe zZ On EO nS wE oO W On With do not push OK button If touch DX button without touching OK if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is value will be canceled
542. that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corpo
543. the GOT Z z aL ZAV 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 3 13 1 2 Data type and the storage location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and standard monitor OS When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 13 4 1 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installtion so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed When installing from the standard CF card the dialog is displayed by the main unit When installing from GT Designer2 via USB or RS 232 the dialog is displayed by the GT Designer2 When install standard monitor OS communication driver option OS When standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist amoung all OSs standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled When download project data GOT automatically compares the version
544. the error An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds The error may occur in the sequence program Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program An error occurs when a specific device operates The mis operation may be caused by noise Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device If the line is too close to the device separate the line 100 mm or more from the device c Locating the module where an error occurs Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information locate a specific module where an error occurs By the method stated above correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one and check whether the error occurs If the error continues to occur it may have another cause Referring to 20 2 2 Further locating error positions locate the error position further 20 2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 2 1 Locating error positions 20 2 2 Further locating error positions a 3 U w If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is re
545. ting the cables between the case and the GOT 2 Replacement 2 E Power off the GOT 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the extension unit cover from the right side of the GOT Remove the extension unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted 4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws 8 pcs with a screwdriver and remove the case Screw A must be tighten in the torque range of 0 186 to 0 245 N m as it is made of plastic 1 9 10 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight O Pull up the backlight drive board and disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the backlight drive board E m Ecz grg mi Sag lt r 5 5 526 O Press the backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left En When pulling the backlight press the packing with your finger so that the backlight will not be hit with the z packing e When replacing GT15 80SLTT When replacing GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT or GT15 70VLTN 9 VANSANT E BOOTOS AND INSPECTION W 0 Bs CH ag EZ W lt lt Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly p Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the following torque
546. ting the password the GOT Operator setting menu Touch Function setting 1 4 541 14 11 Operator Information Management 14 11 3 Function setting Function setting operation z 5 Touch Function setting in the operator T E overator xanasencat setting menu and then the Admin Z JE Pasovord change password authentication dialog box is id Fonction setting displayed Zz fo ao 50 TE SE O2n Admin password authentication i i 7 i TEES Input the administrator password re Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons 9 lt LO A Z Alphabet capital Za g ao a z Alphabet small letter am 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the TAXI CUUI BIN M Eater g Enter key z gt Fig o oka iae logout tine 10 ainti 60 O invalid 6 When the administrator password is x a Q aesvord expiration date En day 1 1000 0 alvays correctly input the Function setting screen oss in displayed Touch an item to be set a Automatic logout time Z b Password expiration date z A gt 48 _ Lo 14 a Touch Automatic logout time and then the Automatic logout time edit dialog box is displayed Input the time When the input is completed x Oo Ww S LL w Ww 2 O 0 touch the Enter key z EE ate 5 t 15 ater s5 Qo Be tn Sa 12 Oa z O
547. tional grounding CD Improves the noise resistance 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 7 5 2 3 Control panel OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol w W gt OE 1O Bw all o gt oO INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 5 External wiring 1 External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the GOT select a model which complies with the Low Voltage Directive s requirements for isolation between the primary and secondary circuits 2 Insulation requirements Dielectric withstand voltages are shown in the following table Reinforced Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category II source IEC664 Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 us 150 VAC or below 300 VAC or below 5 8 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 2 5 External wiring 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration The information of the EMC Directive compliant models is obtained from the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb homepage MELFANSweb website http wwwi2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html 5 3 1 GOT Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate For how to confirm the hardware version of a GOT refer to the following L Appendix 2
548. tly displayed drive folder is displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed i Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by 7 The size of drive ae age f drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function Number of folders and 9 files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders Displayed folders and files For the folders and files displayed refer to the following Lae 13 13 2 OS Information 1 5 Display file 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Zz a o Z Display operation of OS information E z Program Data control 0S information 5 elect drive EAGISYS D I touch a drive in Selec drive the pie ANENG care Pale IS 0SMONT 1156K 08 06 05 02 31 i information of the first folder of the GIF12ST6 108K 08 06 05 02 31 touched drive is displayed C Flash Memory BIOSMONT 1K 08 08 05 02 3 ouched drive Is displayed z IG 10SMONT 302K 08 06 05 02 3 O at REFRE iorta 7 G10S0CIR ik 02 27 04 06 3 If touch a folder name the information of Ow GICMAQDR 107K 08 06 05 02 3 be es Zlo p1osacIR SK 02 2708 06 33 the touched folder is displayed 2 Zz ZuE If touch a fo
549. to OFF the above signal has no effect on 6 the screen save backlight 59 Z gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Za wW 3 6 Setting System Information ag Zz O 45 Zu aos z m E SEY 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 3 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 4 4 Display control by human sensor Specific to GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S The human sensor is a function that releases the GOT from the screen saving mode without the necessity to touch the GOT This function releases the GOT from the screen saving mode when the operator has come closer to the GOT Approach Go away Approach Go away Operator motion S ensor detect Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 b5 f I 1 Sensor Sensor OFF delay OFF delay Screen saving mode released Screen saving mode active Screen saving 1 Screen save time When there is no operator around the GOT for the time set as Sensor OFF delay the Human Sensor Detection Signal turns OFF When the time set as the Screen save time elapses after the Human Sensor Detection Signal turns OFF the GOT enters the screen saving mode Refer to the following manual for the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 6 Setting System Information 5 When setting the human sensor to invalid Specific to GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S Even if setting the human sensor to
550. to install the OS refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Point P When using GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1562 VN For GT1575 VN GT1572 VN and GT1562 VN 65536 color display is not supported even with the multi color display board installed 8 17 Multi Color Display Board 8 59 8 17 1 Applicable multi color display board OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 17 2 Installing procedure Power OFF the GOT 2 Remove the extension unit cover I F 2 side of GOT rear face Install the multi color display board in the multi color display board interface When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the multi color display board logoe Z 0 Ley y O 47 Lene Ril 8 60 8 17 Multi Color Display Board 8 17 2 Installing procedure 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and controller screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc z O E O Zz Ww gt Refer to the following for the utility function list LC 9 3 Utility Display Z Su SE 9 1 Utility Exec
551. toring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED flickers green orange and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out
552. ts in unit of 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x project file 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O Word device values can be converted into Project Script data in the specified data type and the P ypsi 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O o GOT can read or write the data Data type conversion function The file operation functions are added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Oo Oo Oo Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x POIEEN 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O o O Word device values can be converted into Screen Script data in the specified data type and the ype 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O O O GOT can read or write the data Data type conversion function The file operation functions are added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 O Oo Obiect Seri Function to execute scripts in unit of SABU Option OS ect Scri P object Object Script 02 02 O O x Key codes for increment key and 4 7 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O decrement key are added Key code for historical trend graph is ik 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo Oo x added Key Code Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion j y l 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x is added Key codes for user ID ascending descending order movement of cursor are 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O Oo added Other functions added a Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description h Version
553. uaa 8 1 8 1 2 Installing procedure aooaa ra Ee A EAA tees 8 3 8 1 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 0 0 00 aaa 8 15 8 2 RS 422 Conversion Unit 8 18 8 2 1 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit n sanasa anaana 8 18 8 2 2 Installing procedure a EE tenes 8 18 8 3 Printer Unit 8 19 8 3 1 Printerunittype e m a a e a eee 8 19 8 3 2 Installing procedure sans menpean aa a a tenes 8 19 8 4 Video RGB Unit 8 23 8 4 1 Video RGB unit types 0000s 8 23 8 4 2 Installing Proceduren sasaa ra naa EA EAN eee 8 23 8 5 External I O Unit 8 26 8 5 1 Applicable external I O unit 00 00 tees 8 26 8 5 2 Installation procedure 0 0 cect 8 26 8 6 Sound Output Unit 8 28 8 6 1 Applicable sound output unit naaa aana aana 8 28 8 6 2 Installation procedure 0 cette 8 28 8 7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8 31 8 7 1 Applicable CF card unit and CF card extension unit 0000 cae eee 8 31 8 7 2 Installing on GOT 0 2 cette 8 31 8 7 3 Installing on control panel 0 0 tee eee 8 33 8 7 4 Protective structure for CF card extension unit 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 8 34 8 8 CF Card 8 35 8 8 1 Applicable CF card diii eiae aatan i dai aa aiei tne 8 35 8 8 2 CF card inserting removing method with CF card interface of GOT 8 36 8 8 3 CF card inserting removing method with CF card unit 0 00 00 ce eee eee 8 40 8 8 4 C
554. uce the potential difference may prevent O Effective the malfunction O Ineffective Coan When wiring as shown in Fig A cone is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig B Fig Ground cable B Ground to Measure _ the panel for the ground cable led Fig Attaching the ferrit to th Sioundcabie ebene coi aching the ferrite core to the Usea cnertand Gigunate ground cable connected to the He panel having the GOT as shown in Fig C reduces the influence of O Effective noise O Ineffective When wiring as shown in Fig C is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig D Fig Ground cable D lt Ferrite core Ground to _ the panel 20 10 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 7 Power supply system io 6 Faz The power from the same ZOOS Main power PLC power e AC200V A system is used for the GOT I O 1c Used eu E GOT i Se Current status I O power equipment such as relay and ers 2 2 at Wei ment O Not used bn dase quip power equipment such as servo Main circuit power E3 e PONET ant amplifier k fo 2 ep 820 E lt A a b 5 lt oO oc Connecting an isolation 383 j e Measure for the Isolation transformer transformer as well as bof Main power PLC power z Zz 9 5 equipment for AC200V_ S3 a3 3 PLC separating the wiring of the GOT GOT O Effective which the power VO power power from that of the power of frorn ih 63 gt VO pent the 1 0 egui tand
555. uch a folder name the informationof 9 the touched folder is displayed zr 5 m E If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is EE l displayed BiP cs Copy Move Pitter Execute 9 p Del Rename SHS i touch A F button of the scrollbar the 29 screen scrolls up down by one line Fis If touch A X button the screen scrolls 565 up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected Gz Ei amp O For operation of operating switches pies refer to the following oe E G1A CSV Ob G1A gt TXT 13 Delete l n Z gt COPY eae k a Move F ic Rename K gt this section Create Folder gt gt this section M x O Create G1P lt gt this section Execute 5 gt this section E to a ep He If touch x button the screen is closed S Zz fe 59 gS 2a 5 oa Zz wk Ee E Bo Zu le SEY 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 49 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation G1P gt CSV conversion operation G1P TXT conversion operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited 13 50 on personal computer elect Drive L GIL LOGO0001_0001 1K 01 04 01 08 31 LOGI 0001 0 210 LOG A lt 01 0 CSV LOGO0001_0002 1K 01 03 01 00 11 X PROJECT 1 L0G00001 indName Size Date Time Riaz FS GIL LOGO0001 1K 01 04 01 08 31 GI
556. ues Logging 02 02 Logging Function Function for converting multiple files 2 43V 7 O oO x The binary CSV Unicode format files output can be stored to another folder by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo Oo x external control Function t d the device value and Device data ns we bie ees Extended function OS write in the other device when the trigger 2 73B ee O x x transfer function a Pe Device data transfer 03 09 condition is satisfied Number of devices settable for one recipe Standard monitor OS 02 04 in GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Option OS O O Oo Up to 8192 devices Recipe 02 04 F Standard monitor OS 02 04 Recipe tuned Function to save recipe data of GT11 in 5970 Ontion OS ecipe function CSV file format p O O O Recipe 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Function to save recipe data to the A drive 2 27D Option OS O O Oo standard CF card for GT11 i Recipe 02 04 App 38 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page aw Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 ue Standard monitor OS 01 02 The extended function of the existing 2 09K Option OS O x recipe function f Advanced recipe 01 02 Function for converting multiple files 2 43V O Oo x
557. unication detail settings the communication interface details are set Communication parameters setting eg ce on bw Zon Q Zz LOV EO 10 1 1 Communication setting functions lt 2 owe aon Function Description Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name a Ener O z Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Standard interface Zza Channel no Ch No setting Eug Extend interface HEG acs va Q Communication parameters ae oo l AE f Set communication parameters of communication devices 92E setting oTo Q vongi A 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation gt a 2 o gt w Q ss 10 Main menu Communication setting TO 9 3 Utility Display S xe s O Chi l Dr iver i T Touch anne river assign 5 Communication PS SSA o USE 4 setting 9 Host PC 9 Host PC m He F Setting 2 xtend F 1 Extend F 2 shNo GT 15 5QBUSL ChNo None 1 Q BUS 0 None ShNo None ChNo None Zz 0 None 0 None DE hNo None ChNo None O T 0 None 0 None On Z gt ion of ChNo 5 5 8 Barcode cc tion Other connection OK wi amp levice connection 9 connection a oa O wg Eg m gu Zz oO wiz zZ EB z lt SEO 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 1 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 10 2 This secti
558. upply refer to the following manual lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 4 3 2 1 GT1595 X EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM n 7 Z O lt o L O W oa 7 PART NAME AND SETTINGS DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S Specifications Item GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD Display Type TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view Screen size 12 1 Resolution 800 x 600 dots Display size 246 9 69 W x 184 5 7 26 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 50 characters x 37 lines 2byte character 12 dot standard font 66 characters x 50 lines 2byte character section Display color 65536 colors 2 Left Right 60 degrees Left Right 65 degrees Display angle Top 40 degrees Top 45 degrees Bottom 50 degrees Bottom 55 degrees Intensity of LCD only 350 cd m 400 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 50 000 h or longer Life s Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature
559. using FA device startup tool and eliminates the necessity of indirect La works opening and closing the control panel cable replacement cable rewiring in order to 22 improve the working efficiency lt u e The blown backlight bulb can be confirmed even during screen saving with the blinked POWER LED at backlight shutoff detection 3 Enhanced support of FA device setup tools Transferring and monitoring sequence programs with the personal computer connected to the 2 u GOT can be executed when connecting to a PLC CPU with the direct CPU connection or bus ROR connection FA transparent function 3 E 1 The specifications differ depending on the GOT to be used For the specifications refer to the following lt 3 3 2 Performance Specifications 5 Z a 6 E O 1 1 Features 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown y Install GT Designer2 in the PC Refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Create project data Refer to GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual y Wire for the GOT power supply Refer to Chapter 7 WIRING Mount the option function board or multi color display board lt Refer to Chapter 8 Option As necessary When transferring data from PC to built in flash memory and starting GOT with built in flash memory When transferring data from
560. ut password 7 8 9 aj e esferen EEA 0 A D Enter 9 8 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu When the password is not matched displays the error message The password is wrong z O O Z Ww gt x Zz O lt When touching OK the screen returns to the monitor screen oF 1 Input operation of password 95u 1 Input the password after touching 0 to 9 A to LF key 2 Define the password by touching Enter key after password input 3 To correct the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character 97 and reinput retype the new character zeg 2 Password input cancel operation TEE Ww When X button is touched it returns to the monitor screen eee Refer to the following for the details related to the password setting Q lt x GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Fea BES 57 gt Q Z lt z 5 O gt wa O LO x O W ani O D O 0 Zz 58 ZS z3 Bio oa Zz O 88 Zu Zu z SEH 9 3 Utility Display 9 9 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of utility is as follows Title display Close Return button X Slat drie in Name Size Date Time DIR t OUT G10SBTOS 405K 06 01 04 10 48 A C Flash Memory Scroll key Screen
561. ution fae Ozo For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the C drive built in flash memory Se There are following three types for the installing BootOS and standard monitor OS methods Seg Saf 1 GT Designer2 GOT Ooty ACH Via USB interface or O RS 232 interface e Installed directly from the GT Designer2 RR s j 3 8 le ai A oe GT Designer BootOS or standard OS installation E fa i Oe 2 GT Designer2 CF card gt GOT TE OS file BootOS or standard Q 5 lt write onitor OS installation Va OTU manag e When GOT is remote installed easily ee GOT using the CF card Ge the CF as card in GOT GT Designer2 CF card Z z 3 GOT gt CF card gt GOT z OS file BootOS standard O gt Z upload monitor OS installation VA at 5 GOT gt aos GOT Install OS from GOT to GOT using LO CF card se the CF CF card card in GOT amp O Refer to the following for the installation which uses GT Designer2 T L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual m Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT G K gt 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Zz O 5G ZS zg aS 12 oa Zz O wg ge Zu l iQ Zu z x SEO 9 1 Utility Execution 9 1 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Commun ication setting GOT setup Item Functions overview Assi
562. vanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected re E ipe In x R E RECI s BSS E 7 Select the recipe file and touch the 2 l 1K 03 16 05 15 17 i Excute button Zz O au 30 Piece Sie Ele Szo m 156 Fd 1P 1 Copy Move T te Execute a BIP TxT Del Rename eke A op gt E 0 Z Data Contr e Informe El om Ga File Nane A PROJECT 1 REC IPE1 ARPO0001 G1P As the Advanced Recipe Record List Bo ui etting No H De eee screen is displayed select the record A comment for matching the device value 3 Process 3 setting E 4 P Process 4 setting o 3 2 ETA mmi EC lt o 2 Sak ob U 13 m Load record Save record Match records Delete Device zZ GOT PLC PLC GOT GOTPLC alue lt z al 5 Record No If touch the Maerecce s button dialog O Record Comment Process 1 setting shown left is displayed T Execute record matching 4 If touch the OK button starts matching record ani oO Ww W ep 0 Zz O Continued to the next page 5 5 9 a gt z3 fi 12 oa Zz O wg 2 Zu Ze oO Oz zw le q SEO 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 63 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 64 Matching progressed Matching error 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation QO When matching is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the dialog OK button closes the If selected recor
563. ve unnecessary units The communication driver set in the Communication Setting and the communication unit installed on the GOT do not Communication unit not match z 486 corresponded to set 1 Check whether the communication driver set in the O communication driver Communication Setting is correct 2 Check whether any incorrect communication unit has been installed on the GOT Please turn on the PLC 487 Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again O and the GOT again Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum Too many units mounted 1 488 number of mountable units Check the number of units and O on GOT Reduce units remove unnecessary units Inactive channel No has been set in the project data Inactive channel has been 1 Check whether any unnecessary channel No has been 4 489 selected at set in the project data O Communication Settings 2 Check whether channel Nos set in the project data are set in the Communication Settings f Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT Simultaneous mounting of 1 490 simultaneously are mounted Check the mounted units and O the units are not allowed remove unnecessary units Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum Too many units mounted 1 491 number of mountable units Check the number of units and O on GOT Reduce units remove unnecessary units 500 Warning Built in battery The voltage of the GOT built in battery is dec
564. wer is not supplied O Not lit When the power is supplied the GOT hardware may be faulty 20 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 2 Check if the power is supplied If the GOT is not restored proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation Phenomenon d Screen display O The screen is completely black Cause status Action The LCD or BootOS may be failty Perform the following in order 1 Reinstalling BootOS 2 Reinstalling standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by 1 and 2 perform the following 3 Reinstalling CoreOS and then standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by the above operations proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O The screen is completely white The GOT hardware may be faulty Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O Aline is displayed on the screen O Other faulty displays The GOT hardware may be faulty Example A vertical line is displayed LI Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O The screen freezes e Buzzer sound O Does not sound The screen display is not updated and any operation is not allowed Proceed to 1 e O Continues to beep randomly O Continues to beep ina particular pattern Buzzer sound Example The rhythm as three beeps one beep and then two beeps is repeated Proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes O Beeps cont
565. wg 2g Zu Zu z SEY 14 5 Font Check p 14 5 1 Font check function 14 ie 14 5 3 Font check operation Font check starts by touching Font Check in the Display check screen The character data of the built in font in the built in flash memory can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch Upper right touch position position The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen R Font data R m Point gt Option fonts To display optional fonts the followings are required e The option font installation e Option function board installation The option fonts are displayed at the end 1 4 7 13 14 5 Font Check 14 5 3 Font check operation 14 6 Touch Panel Check Zz O o 14 6 1 Touch panel check function 5 Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit 5 16 dots x 16 dots 14 6 2 Display operation of Touch panel check 5 ae F 226 Main menu Debug amp self check Self check 2 Z C7 9 3 Utility Display SwE Szy A Ae jr reee aster E roman en D E ent it oe rigo Touch h
566. when the GOT type is changed to a GOT type with different resolution 2 73B Screen capture Function for capturing the specified range and loading to GT Designer2 2 43V Zoom Interval of magnification specification has been changed buttons have been added Zoom in zoom out operations using the Ctrl key and Mouse wheel have been added 2 43V Communication Holds the previous downloaded drive 2 472 Enables updating BootOS without the standard monitor OS updated when only BootOS is already installed on the GOT e Enables installing the standard monitor OS with the communication driver at once when only BootOS is already installed on the GOT 2 58L BootOS 03 03 P Enables installing OSs on the A drive with the OS boot drive set to the A drive 2 73B Preferences Enables setting the maximum number of screens to be displayed on GT Designer2 2 63R Device list Functions of the collection target selection jump file output and others are added 2 73B Reading BMP or JPEG image data App 32 Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data reduced to a resolution of 2000 x 1600 or less on GT Designer2 2 77F Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Added common settings object functions ay Version of GT
567. where noise has been eliminated by the noise filer Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction Output side device side Output side device side a Installing the input and b Separate the input cable output cables together will from the output cable cause noise induction 2 Connect the noise filter s ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable as possible approx 10cm 3 94 in or less 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 5 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS Ol w W gt OE 1O Bw all o gt oO INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive The Low Voltage Directive requires each device which operates with power supply ranging from 50VAC to 1000V and 75VDC to 1500V to satisfy necessary safety items In the Sections from 5 2 1 to 5 2 5 cautions on installation and wiring of the GOT to conform to the Low Voltage Directive requires are described We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the Directive that we have collected However compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above Directive is not guaranteed Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the fin
568. with the CMCIA interface Refer to the following for the details related to CF card 8 8 CF Card 8 9 1 Applicable memory card adaptor The following memory card adaptor is applicable for GT1500 Mode Description GT05 MEM ADPC Converts the CF card into a memory card 8 9 2 Installing procedure Fit the memory card in the memory card adaptor L LZ CF card Memory card adaptor 8 44 8 9 Memory Card Adaptor 8 9 1 Applicable memory card adaptor 8 10 Option Function Board The optional function board is used to extend the option function and the built in flash memory z When the function version of the GOT to be used is D or later the option functions operated with the GT15 gt FNB can be used without an option function board installed The latest standard monitor OS must be wi installed on the GOT Y For the option functions operated with the GT15 FNB refer to the following gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual O 8 10 1 Applicable option function board 7 The following option function boards are applicable for GT1500 26 Model Description GT15 FNB Option function board an Option function board 6 GT15 QFNB Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function multi channel function S and document display function Q oO Option function board with add on memory Option function 16MB 2 GT15 QFNB16M Applicable to MELSEC Q QnA ladder monit
569. x 1000 H Display 0 x 1000 H laintenance report times setting Touch key 0 x 10000 Times a z Flash memory 0 x 1000 Times Seg Touch Maintenance Epis timing setting Eok n gt Ze FEA mmi HEG 583 oak ob For the addition times as power on addition time refer to the following x gt aus lt x lt 17 1 Addition times reset a ep o gt wo a6 LO x O W ani O W ep O 0 Zz He oO Lu n 3 oO D Q VANOOR gy CLEANING OF SETTING 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 1 6 3 16 1 2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting 16 1 3 Operating the maintenance timing setting Touch a select button item to be set on the screen e Numerical Key If touched displays the keyboard in the bottom part of the screen For keyboard operation refer Section 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change page OT 243 4 Camel Enter Define the numerical input by Enter a Remark If touch Enter after inputting the value out of the setting range the alarm message is displayed Example Please set a value as the range of 0 100 o If touch OK button the settings are reflected amp If touch gt lt button instead of touching displayed and the screen closes OK button the settings are canceled after the dialog below is With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK
570. xt time and after 1 0 4 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Communication setting contents b Priority against Communication Settings of GT Designer2 If download the communication settings to the GOT with GT Designer2 after the automatic assignment the GOT will operate with the communication settings of the GT Designer2 The GOT operates with the latest communication settings 3 When the communication driver does not match with the unit that is installed in the GOT An error is displayed on the GOT when displaying Communication setting If an error is displayed confirm the combination of the communication driver and communication unit Refer to the following manual for the combination c gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual System Configuration in each chapter an UTILITY FUNCTION eg ce Pami a bw Zon DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 5 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Channel Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel Driver assign The example of changing to direct CPU connection Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 for the GOT of computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24
571. y The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the 570 Recipe device points too specified range x large Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range 571 Capacity shortage of user There is no empty area space in D drive x memory RAM Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe Abnormal Advanced i m tgs 581 recibe file file with incorrect contents Delete the advanced recipe file x p from the memory card Cannot generate advanced recipe file Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again 582 Cannot generate 1 Confirm whether the memory card is installed x Advanced recipe file 2 Confirm whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is ON 3 Confirm the available memory of the memory card f Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file Unable to save device i f 1 Confirm the write protection of memory card 583 value to Advanced recipe R x fi 2 Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading ile only oo An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing Advance recipe file save 584 Do not pull the memory card out while the Advanced Recipe x error is operating 20 3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 3 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 29 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTE
572. y button The display depends on the status of copy c maian destination and setup opy destination ae Operate with following the displayed Because of the copy destination is Boot drive Project data and setup dialog box condition can t copy After execute disable setup please execute copy operation After copying OS and data the dialog box for notifying the completion appears Touching the OK button closes the dialog box Copy is completed Remark Processing time reference Qs The time required for the processing depends on conditions such as OS data capacity and file structure Reference values e When the capacity is 4 Mbytes Around 6 seconds e When the capacity is 12 Mbytes Around 18 seconds 1 3 112 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13 12 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Precautions for operation z E 1 Copying project data z If the Boot source drive and copy destination drive for project data is the same the project data cannot be copied If the drives are the same cancel the setup 2 When project data are copied to the GOT If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the memory card created with GOT data package 2 acquisition the utility setting is also copied ae Check each utility setting after copying to the GOT and change the setting according to need Ee o 3 Memory card to be used 55 m When performing GOT data package acquisit
573. y 2006 or later April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 March 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1585 STBD Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575V STBA March 2006 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575V STBD May 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 STBA April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 GT1575 STBD Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VTBA April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 March 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VTBD Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VNBA Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VNBD Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1572 VNBA Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 19 8 GT1572 VNBD A A B C A A A B C March 2005 or later A D E A A A A A Sep 2005 or later 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 Replacement procedure 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Replacement procedure 1 1 Replacement 1 icp Q Power off the GOT 6 Fa Z PON Z22 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable in Remove the GOT from the control panel aus
574. y Date check 4 When the installation is completed the dialog shown left is displayed GOT restarts if touch OK button Install is completed Restart now 1 3 12 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Upload operation z BootOS and OS in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Standard CF S card T The CF card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT E c gt 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 5 This item explains using the A drive 6 Q Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT Refer to the following 595 for inserting removing method of CF card Se T 8 8 CF Card 95u u ee ve Touch A Built in CF Card of Select ai drive cin 2z 2 Touching Upload starts the uploading Seg TaZ aoe aoe ip 2 gt Eug WE a x Yn ae odqge e ora Upload is completed 4 When the upload is completed the dialog 3 shown left is displayed Touching OK closes the dialog ae ea N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 13 2 OS Information 1 3 13 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder 13 14 US intormat ion Prol ty i i ion Kind Vers
575. y an image taken by a Video display pay 9 E 2 32J Extended function OS O x x video camera on the GOT i Video RGB 03 00 Endar l i Standard monitor OS 03 00 unction to display the personal computer RGB display R P j 2 32J Extended function OS Oo x x screen on the GOT Video RGB 03 00 Number of screens that can be called on GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Oo O Oo Up to 2047 screens Screen calling setting with dragging is g g gging 243V o o o possible Set overlay screen Specifying of placement position Front Back for the basic and called screens is 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Oo O O possible Disable background colors of overlay screen when setting an overlay screen 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 O O oO can be set Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 39 ADDITION TIMES INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM RESET FOR MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX ae Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Function for changing device value with Test function a 9 9 2 09K Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x Oo displaying test window Function to execute scrip
576. y those who are familiar with power facility to unlock the panel b Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the control panel is opened 2 Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust water and other substances Insufficient ingression protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better Pollution level1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution level3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment 5 2 4 Grounding The following are applicable ground terminals Use them in the grounded state Be sure to ground the GOT for ensuring the safety and complying with the EMC Directive Protective grounding D Ensures the safety of the GOT and improves the noise resistance Func
577. yed confirm the mounting procedure P a or memory type with reference tothe folowing m Indicates the items in which the detailed CF card insertingitemoving method 17 Section 7 1 CF Card explanation is described manual chapter When no fauits are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen section item of the manual i Replace the CF card or built in flash memory For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 0 0 The followin example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory Q For the 07 card memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in 3 z flash mory Indicates the operation steps Select duit in flash memory in the Memory check setting screen If select OK button the numeric keyboard window is Menu and items are differentiated with parentheses If select Cancel button returns to the initial menu refers to the menu of GOT utility refers to the button in the dialog box of GOT utility Touch to input password 151020 and touch Emer if touch Enter executes read write check forthe built in flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds Please input parmeord 13 2 Memory Check 13 23 Mamory check operation 13 3 The above is different from the actual page as it is provided for explanation only A 26 PACKING

GT15 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents